IPF605 ServiceManual E

Service Manual
iPF600 series
iPF605
Dec 16 2014
Application
This manual has been issued by Canon Inc. for qualified persons to learn technical theory, installation, maintenance, and repair
of products. This manual covers all localities where the products are sold. For this reason, there may be information in this
manual that does not apply to your locality.
Corrections
This manual may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors due to improvements or changes in products. When
changes occur in applicable products or in the contents of this manual, Canon will release technical information as the need
arises. In the event of major changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period, Canon will issue a new edition
of this manual.
The following paragraph does not apply to any countries where such provisions are inconsistent with local law.
Trademarks
The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered trademarks of the individual companies.
Copyright
This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may not be copied, reproduced or
translated into another language, in whole or in part, without the written consent of Canon Inc.
COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC.

Printed in Japan
Caution
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information.
Introduction
Symbols Used
This documentation uses the following symbols to indicate special information:
Symbol Description
Indicates an item of a non-specific nature, possibly classified as Note, Caution, or Warning.
Indicates an item requiring care to avoid electric shocks.
Indicates an item requiring care to avoid combustion (fire).
Indicates an item prohibiting disassembly to avoid electric shocks or problems.
Indicates an item requiring disconnection of the power plug from the electric outlet.
Indicates an item intended to provide notes assisting the understanding of the topic in question.
Memo
Indicates an item of reference assisting the understanding of the topic in question.

REF.
Provides a description of a service mode.
Provides a description of the nature of an error indication.

Introduction
The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:

1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the relationship between electrical and mechanical systems with refer-
ence to the timing of operation.
In the diagrams, represents the path of mechanical drive; where a signal name accompanies the symbol , the arrow indicates the
direction of the electric signal.
The expression "turn on the power" means flipping on the power switch, closing the front door, and closing the delivery unit door, which results in
supplying the machine with power.
2. In the digital circuits, '1'is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is "High", while '0' is used to indicate "Low".(The voltage value, how-
ever, differs from circuit to circuit.) In addition, the asterisk (*) as in "DRMD*" indicates that the DRMD signal goes on when '0'.
In practically all cases, the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be checked in the field. Therefore, the operations of the microprocessors
used in the machines are not discussed: they are explained in terms of from sensors to the input of the DC controller PCB and from the output of the
DC controller PCB to the loads.
The descriptions in this Service Manual are subject to change without notice for product improvement or other purposes, and major changes will be com-
municated in the form of Service Information bulletins.
All service persons are expected to have a good understanding of the contents of this Service Manual and all relevant Service Information bulletins and be
able to identify and isolate faults in the machine."
Contents
Contents
Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

1.1 Product Overview .......................................................................................................................................1- 1
1.1.1 Product Overview .................................................................................................................................................... 1- 1
1.2 Features .....................................................................................................................................................1- 2
1.2.1 Features .................................................................................................................................................................. 1- 2
1.2.2 Printhead ................................................................................................................................................................. 1- 2
1.2.3 Ink Tank................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 2
1.2.4 Cutter....................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 2
1.2.5 Roll Feed Unit.......................................................................................................................................................... 1- 2
1.2.6 Stand ....................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 4
1.2.7 IEEE1394 (FireWire) Board..................................................................................................................................... 1- 5
1.2.8 Consumables........................................................................................................................................................... 1- 6
1.3 Product Specifications ................................................................................................................................1- 7
1.3.1 Product Specifications ............................................................................................................................................. 1- 7
1.4 Detailed Specifications ...............................................................................................................................1- 9
1.4.1 Print Speed and Direction........................................................................................................................................ 1- 9
1.4.2 Interface Specifications ......................................................................................................................................... 1- 13
1.5 Names and Functions of Components .....................................................................................................1- 14
1.5.1 Front ...................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 14
1.5.2 Rear....................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 15
1.5.3 Top Cover (Inside)................................................................................................................................................. 1- 15
1.5.4 Manual Loading Area ............................................................................................................................................ 1- 16
1.5.5 Roll Feed Unit Cover (Inside) ................................................................................................................................ 1- 17
1.5.6 Carriage................................................................................................................................................................. 1- 17
1.5.7 Inside ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 18
1.6 Basic Operation ........................................................................................................................................1- 19
1.6.1 Operation Panel..................................................................................................................................................... 1- 19
1.6.2 Main Menu............................................................................................................................................................. 1- 20
1.7 Safety and Precautions ............................................................................................................................1- 36
1.7.1 Safety Precautions ................................................................................................................................................ 1- 36
1.7.1.1 Moving Parts .......................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 36
1.7.1.2 Adhesion of Ink ...................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 36
1.7.1.3 Electric Parts.......................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 38
1.7.2 Other Precautions.................................................................................................................................................. 1- 38
1.7.2.1 Printhead................................................................................................................................................................................ 1- 38
1.7.2.2 Ink Tank ................................................................................................................................................................................. 1- 40
1.7.2.3 Handling the Printer ............................................................................................................................................................... 1- 40
1.7.3 Precautions When Servicing Printer...................................................................................................................... 1- 43
1.7.3.1 Notes on the Data Stored in the Printer ................................................................................................................................. 1- 43
1.7.3.2 Confirming the Firmware Version .......................................................................................................................................... 1- 43
1.7.3.3 Precautions against Static Electricity ..................................................................................................................................... 1- 43
1.7.3.4 Precautions for Disassembly/Reassembly............................................................................................................................. 1- 43
1.7.3.5 Self-diagnostic Feature .......................................................................................................................................................... 1- 43
1.7.3.6 Disposing of the Lithium Battery ............................................................................................................................................ 1- 44
Chapter 2 TECHNICAL REFERENCE

2.1 Basic Operation Outline..............................................................................................................................2- 1
2.1.1 Printer Diagram ....................................................................................................................................................... 2- 1
2.1.2 Print Signal Sequence ............................................................................................................................................. 2- 2
2.1.3 Print Driving ............................................................................................................................................................. 2- 3
Contents
2.2 Firmware .................................................................................................................................................... 2- 5

2.2.1 Operation Sequence at Power-on............................................................................................................................2- 5
2.2.2 Operation Sequence at Power-off............................................................................................................................2- 6
2.2.3 Print Control .............................................................................................................................................................2- 7
2.2.4 Print Position Adjustment Function ........................................................................................................................2- 12
2.2.5 Head Management ................................................................................................................................................2- 12
2.2.6 Printhead Overheating Protection Control .............................................................................................................2- 12
2.2.7 Pause between Pages ...........................................................................................................................................2- 12
2.2.8 White Raster Skip ..................................................................................................................................................2- 12
2.2.9 Sleep Mode............................................................................................................................................................2- 12
2.3 Printer Mechanical System....................................................................................................................... 2- 13
2.3.1 Outline....................................................................................................................................................................2- 13
2.3.1.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 13
2.3.2 Ink Passage ...........................................................................................................................................................2- 14
2.3.2.1 Ink Passage ........................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 14
2.3.2.2 Ink Tank Unit.......................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 15
2.3.2.3 Carriage Unit.......................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 17
2.3.2.4 Printhead................................................................................................................................................................................ 2- 20
2.3.2.5 Purge Unit .............................................................................................................................................................................. 2- 21
2.3.2.6 Maintenance Cartridge........................................................................................................................................................... 2- 25
2.3.2.7 Air Flow .................................................................................................................................................................................. 2- 26
2.3.3 Paper Path .............................................................................................................................................................2- 27
2.3.3.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 27
2.3.3.2 Paper Path ............................................................................................................................................................................. 2- 28
2.3.3.3 Cutter Unit.............................................................................................................................................................................. 2- 35
2.4 Printer Electrical System .......................................................................................................................... 2- 36
2.4.1 Outline....................................................................................................................................................................2- 36
2.4.1.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................ 2- 36
2.4.2 Main Controller.......................................................................................................................................................2- 38
2.4.2.1 Main controller PCB components .......................................................................................................................................... 2- 38
2.4.3 Carriage Relay PCB...............................................................................................................................................2- 39
2.4.3.1 Carriage PCB components .................................................................................................................................................... 2- 39
2.4.4 Motor Driver ...........................................................................................................................................................2- 40
2.4.4.1 Roll feed unit PCB components ............................................................................................................................................. 2- 40
2.4.5 Maintenance Cartridge Relay PCB ........................................................................................................................2- 40
2.4.5.1 Maintenance cartridge relay PCB components...................................................................................................................... 2- 40
2.4.6 Power Supply.........................................................................................................................................................2- 40
2.4.6.1 Power supply block diagram .................................................................................................................................................. 2- 40
2.5 Detection Functions with Sensors ............................................................................................................ 2- 41
2.5.1 Covers....................................................................................................................................................................2- 41
2.5.2 Ink passage system ...............................................................................................................................................2- 42
2.5.3 Carriage system.....................................................................................................................................................2- 44
2.5.4 Paper path system .................................................................................................................................................2- 45
2.5.5 Others ....................................................................................................................................................................2- 47
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION
3.1 Installation .................................................................................................................................................. 3- 1
3.1.1 Making Pre-Checks..................................................................................................................................................3- 1
3.1.1.1 Making Pre-Checks.................................................................................................................................................................. 3- 1
3.1.2 Unpacking and Installation.......................................................................................................................................3- 1
3.1.2.1 Unpacking and Installation....................................................................................................................................................... 3- 1
3.1.2.2 Installing the Stand .................................................................................................................................................................. 3- 9
3.1.3 Checking the Images/Operations...........................................................................................................................3- 18
3.1.3.1 Checking the Image and Operation ....................................................................................................................................... 3- 18
3.2 Transporting the Printer............................................................................................................................ 3- 19
3.2.1 Transporting the Printer .........................................................................................................................................3- 19
3.2.1.1 Transporting the Printer ......................................................................................................................................................... 3- 19
Contents
3.2.2 Reinstalling the Printer .......................................................................................................................................... 3- 21

3.2.2.1 Reinstalling the Printer........................................................................................................................................................... 3- 21
Chapter 4 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY
4.1 Service Parts ..............................................................................................................................................4- 1
4.1.1 Service Parts ........................................................................................................................................................... 4- 1
4.2 Disassembly/Reassembly...........................................................................................................................4- 2
4.2.1 Disassembly/Reassembly ....................................................................................................................................... 4- 2
4.3 Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly .......................................................................................4- 2
4.3.1 Note: Items that should never be disassembled...................................................................................................... 4- 2
4.3.2 Moving the carriage manually.................................................................................................................................. 4- 2
4.3.3 Units requiring draining of ink .................................................................................................................................. 4- 2
4.3.4 External Covers ....................................................................................................................................................... 4- 3
4.3.5 Drive Unit............................................................................................................................................................... 4- 17
4.3.6 Cutter..................................................................................................................................................................... 4- 18
4.3.7 Carriage Unit ......................................................................................................................................................... 4- 21
4.3.8 Feeder Unit............................................................................................................................................................ 4- 29
4.3.9 Roll Feed Unit........................................................................................................................................................ 4- 32
4.3.10 Purge Unit............................................................................................................................................................ 4- 35
4.3.11 Waste Ink Collection Unit..................................................................................................................................... 4- 38
4.3.12 Ink Tank Unit........................................................................................................................................................ 4- 42
4.3.13 Head Management Sensor.................................................................................................................................. 4- 45
4.3.14 Multi Sensor......................................................................................................................................................... 4- 46
4.3.15 PCBs.................................................................................................................................................................... 4- 47
4.3.16 Opening the Cap/Moving the Wiper Unit ............................................................................................................. 4- 51
4.3.17 Opening/Closing the Ink Supply Valve ................................................................................................................ 4- 53
4.3.18 Draining the Ink.................................................................................................................................................... 4- 54
4.4 Applying the Grease .................................................................................................................................4- 55
4.4.1 Applying the Grease .............................................................................................................................................. 4- 55
4.5 Adjustment and Setup Items ....................................................................................................................4- 59
4.5.1 Adjustment Item List .............................................................................................................................................. 4- 59
4.5.2 Procedure after Replacing the Carriage Unit or Multi Sensor ............................................................................... 4- 59
4.5.3 Procedure after Replacing the Head Management Sensor................................................................................... 4- 62
Chapter 5 MAINTENANCE
5.1 Periodic Replacement Parts .......................................................................................................................5- 1
5.1.1 Periodic Replacement Parts .................................................................................................................................... 5- 1
5.2 Consumable Parts ......................................................................................................................................5- 1
5.2.1 Consumable Parts ................................................................................................................................................... 5- 1
5.3 Periodic Maintenance .................................................................................................................................5- 2
5.3.1 Periodic Maintenance .............................................................................................................................................. 5- 2
Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING
6.1 Troubleshooting ..........................................................................................................................................6- 1
6.1.1 Outline ..................................................................................................................................................................... 6- 1
6.1.1.1 Outline of Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................................... 6- 1
6.2 Location of Connectors and Pin Arrangement............................................................................................6- 2
6.2.1 Main controller PCB................................................................................................................................................. 6- 2
6.2.2 Carriage PCB ........................................................................................................................................................ 6- 10
6.2.3 Power supply ......................................................................................................................................................... 6- 15
6.2.4 Roll feed unit PCB ................................................................................................................................................. 6- 16
6.3 Version Up ................................................................................................................................................6- 17
6.3.1 Firmware Update Tool ........................................................................................................................................... 6- 17
Contents
6.4 Service Tools............................................................................................................................................ 6- 22

6.4.1 Tool List .................................................................................................................................................................6- 22
Chapter 7 SERVICE MODE

7.1 Service Mode ............................................................................................................................................. 7- 1
7.1.1 Service Mode Operation ..........................................................................................................................................7- 1
7.1.2 Map of the Service Mode .........................................................................................................................................7- 2
7.1.3 Details of Service Mode ...........................................................................................................................................7- 7
7.1.4 Sample Printout .....................................................................................................................................................7- 15
7.2 Special Mode............................................................................................................................................ 7- 20
7.2.1 Special Modes for Servicing ..................................................................................................................................7- 20
Chapter 8 ERROR CODE

8.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................................ 8- 1
8.1.1 Outline......................................................................................................................................................................8- 1
8.2 Warning/Error/Service Call Error ................................................................................................................ 8- 2
8.2.1 Code Table ..............................................................................................................................................................8- 2
Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Contents
Contents
1.1 Product Overview ..........................................................................................................................................................1-1

1.1.1 Product Overview ........................................................................................................................................................................ 1-1
1.2 Features ..........................................................................................................................................................................1-2
1.2.1 Features ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-2
1.2.2 Printhead ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.2.3 Ink Tank ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.2.4 Cutter............................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-2
1.2.5 Roll Feed Unit.............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-2
1.2.6 Stand ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-4
1.2.7 IEEE1394 (FireWire) Board ........................................................................................................................................................ 1-5
1.2.8 Consumables ................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-6
1.3 Product Specifications....................................................................................................................................................1-7
1.3.1 Product Specifications ................................................................................................................................................................. 1-7
1.4 Detailed Specifications ..................................................................................................................................................1-9
1.4.1 Print Speed and Direction ............................................................................................................................................................ 1-9
1.4.2 Interface Specifications.............................................................................................................................................................. 1-13
1.5 Names and Functions of Components .........................................................................................................................1-14
1.5.1 Front ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-14
1.5.2 Rear ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-15
1.5.3 Top Cover (Inside) ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1-15
1.5.4 Manual Loading Area ................................................................................................................................................................ 1-16
1.5.5 Roll Feed Unit Cover (Inside).................................................................................................................................................... 1-17
1.5.6 Carriage...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-17
1.5.7 Inside.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-18
1.6 Basic Operation............................................................................................................................................................1-19
1.6.1 Operation Panel.......................................................................................................................................................................... 1-19
1.6.2 Main Menu................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-20
1.7 Safety and Precautions .................................................................................................................................................1-36
1.7.1 Safety Precautions...................................................................................................................................................................... 1-36
1.7.1.1 Moving Parts .................................................................................................................................................................................................1-36
1.7.1.2 Adhesion of Ink.............................................................................................................................................................................................1-36
1.7.1.3 Electric Parts .................................................................................................................................................................................................1-38
1.7.2 Other Precautions....................................................................................................................................................................... 1-38
1.7.2.1 Printhead .......................................................................................................................................................................................................1-38
1.7.2.2 Ink Tank ........................................................................................................................................................................................................1-40
1.7.2.3 Handling the Printer ......................................................................................................................................................................................1-40
1.7.3 Precautions When Servicing Printer .......................................................................................................................................... 1-43
1.7.3.1 Notes on the Data Stored in the Printer.........................................................................................................................................................1-43
1.7.3.2 Confirming the Firmware Version ................................................................................................................................................................1-43
1.7.3.3 Precautions against Static Electricity ............................................................................................................................................................1-43
1.7.3.4 Precautions for Disassembly/Reassembly.....................................................................................................................................................1-43
1.7.3.5 Self-diagnostic Feature..................................................................................................................................................................................1-43
1.7.3.6 Disposing of the Lithium Battery..................................................................................................................................................................1-44
Chapter 1
1.1 Product Overview
1.1.1 Product Overview

0019-6060
This printer is capable of printing on A4- to A1-size cut sheets and its maximum print width is 24 inches. This printer is a desktop large-format printer five-colors
(dye- and pigment-based colors) printer that can be used to print office documents as well as handy POP and posters. An roll feed unit is equipped for printing on
roll media.
[13] [12]
[1]
[11]
[2]
[10]
[9]
[3]
[8]
[4]
[5]
[6] [7]
F-1-1
[18]
[17]
[16] [18]
[15]
[14]
F-1-2
T-1-1
[1] Top Cover [10] Operation Panel

[2] Ink Tank Cover [11] Roll Feed Unit
[3] Cutter [12] Roll Feed Unit Cover
[4] Front Manual Feed Guide [13] Manual Feed Cover
[5] Peper Eject Slot [14] Power Connector
[6] Paper Alignment Line [15] Ethernet Connector
[7] Basket [16] USB Port
[8] Stand [17] Expansion Board Slot
[9] Output Guide [18] Carrying Handle
1-1
Chapter 1
1.2 Features
1.2.1 Features
0019-6061
- Black ink suitable for the selected media type is automatically selected from two types of black ink, "black ink" for vivid and glossy printing and "matte black
ink" for matte and high-quality printing.
- One-inch wide printhead having 2,560 nozzles per color, which are as many as the those of the existing models. High-density printhead technology "FINE" that
can satisfy both of beautiful and fast printing requirements of a high order is employed for accurate ejection of ultrasmall 4-pl drops of ink to the target positions.
Prints with 2400 x 1200 dpi resolution can be made at a high speed.
- Imaging processor "L-COA" incorporated for high-speed image data processing. High-speed processing of 5-color, 12-bit large-size images and printer control
for high-accuracy operation of high-density head can be performed with a single chip.
- Support for roll media, manual feed from front, and manual feed from top (3-way paper supply). A maximum of 1.5 mm thick of paper(POP board) can be manually
fed from the front.
- Borderless printing on and auto cutting of roll media.
- Standard support for 10Base-T/100Base-TX. Standard support for USB 2.0 Hi-Speed. Optional support for IEEE1394.
- Data scanned using CanoScan can be easily printed on large-size paper just like a dedicated copier. Just pressing the Start button allows you to blow up an original
of up to A3 size in collaboration with Canon Image RUNNER.
- Support for remote notification utility which is used to send an E-mail when an alarm or error occurs.
- A 160-by-128-dot-large LCD
Functional enhancements new to this model include:

The cassette feature has been removed in the interest of users who do not require a cassette capability, resulting in a downsized printer geometry and better roll
media accessibility.
1.2.2 Printhead
0012-6187
The printhead that mounts on the carriage is an integrated six-color disposable printhead.
It has 2,560 nozzles for each color, comprising two rows of 1,280 nozzles each arranged in a staggerd pattern.
If print quality does not improve despite carrying out the specified cleaning, the printhead must be replaced with a new one.
F-1-3
1.2.3 Ink Tank

0012-6188
The ink tank is disposable.

There are four dye-based ink colors (black, cyan, magenta, and yellow) and one pigment-based ink color (matte black).
This printer features a mechanism by which only the correct color ink tank will fit in the given slot.
When the message that ink tank is empty is displayed, replace the ink tank with a new one.
F-1-4
1.2.4 Cutter
0013-3524
A round-blade cuter comes with the cutter unit.
F-1-5
1-2
Chapter 1
1.2.5 Roll Feed Unit

0013-2512
Roll Feed Unit

The roll feed unit is optionally available to use roll media with this printer.
F-1-6
Roll Holder Set
This set consists of roll holder, holder stopper, 3-inch paper tube attachment, and borderless printing spacer (commonly used for 2-inch paper tube and 3-inch paper
tube).
[Roll holder]
F-1-7
[Holder stopper](for 2-inch paper tube and 3-inch paper tube)
F-1-8
[3-inch paper tube attachment]
F-1-9
[Borderless printing spacer]
F-1-10
MEMO:
A borderless printing spacer is used to perform borderless printing on A1-size (594 mm) and A2-size (420 mm) roll media. This printer is furnished with a number
of borderless printing ink receiving channels on the platen to address multi-sized borderless printing needs. Borderless printing on A1 or A2-size roll media is made
possible by using a spacer, without needing to produce a new borderless printing ink receiving channel.
1-3
Chapter 1
1.2.6 Stand
0016-8107
Stand (Option)
The stand is equipped with casters so that the printer can be easily moved. The output stacker included with stand can use by the two ways of the regular position
or extended position.
F-1-11
MEMO:
- Use the output stacker in the regular position [A]. However, for the specified media, it can also be used in the extended position [B]. The media can be removed
more easily when the output stacker is in the extended position.
- The output stacker can accommodate one sheet. Remove each sheet before printing if you are printing a series of documents.
[A] [B]
F-1-12
1-4
Chapter 1
1.2.7 IEEE1394 (FireWire) Board

0016-8123
IEEE1394 (FireWire) expansion board (option)

An interface board that provides an additional IEEE1394 (FireWire) port.
F-1-13
1-5
Chapter 1
1.2.8 Consumables
0016-8109
Printhead
The consumable printhead is the same as that supplied with the printer.
F-1-14
Ink Tanks
The consumable ink tanks are available in five colors (matte black, black, cyan, magenta, and yellow). They are the same as those supplied with the printer.
The ink tank that can be used with this printer is labeled "A".
F-1-15
Maintenance cartridge
The consumable maintenance cartridge is the same as that supplied with the printer.
F-1-16
1-6
Chapter 1
1.3 Product Specifications
1.3.1 Product Specifications

0019-6063
Type Bubble jet large-sized paper printer

Feeding system Automatic feeding of one roll media/One cut sheet (manual feed from
front)/One cut sheet (manual feed from top)
Feeding capacity - Roll media
One roll at the back/Outer diameter of roll: 150 mm or less/Inner
diameter of paper tube: 2 or 3 inches
- Cut sheet
1 sheet
Delivery method Delivers the media with its printed side up in the forward direction.
Sheet delivery capability Using the stand (option) basket:
- Roll media
1 sheet
- Cut sheet
1 sheet
Cutter Automatically cuts paper laterally. Cartridge-type (with round blade)
Type of media - Roll media
Plain Paper, Plain Paper (High Quality), Plain Paper (High Grade),
Recycled Coated Paper, Coated Paper, Heavyweight Coated Paper,
Extra Heavyweight Coated Paper, Premium Matte Paper, Glossy Photo
Paper, Semi-Glossy Photo Paper, Heavyweight Glossy Photo Paper 2,
Heavywght SemiGlos Photo Paper 2, Poster Semi-Glossy Photo Paper 2,
Synthetic Paper, Adhesive Synthetic Paper, Proofing Paper, Colored
Coated Paper, CAD Tracing Paper, CAD Translucent Matte Film,
Premium Glossy Paper 200/280, Premium Semi-Glossy Paper 200/280,
Newsprint for Proofing1, Newsprint for Proofing2
- Cut sheet (manual feed from top)

Plain Paper, Plain Paper (High Quality), Plain Paper (High Grade),
Recycled Coated Paper, Coated Paper, Heavyweight Coated Paper,
Extra Heavyweight Coated Paper, Premium Matte Paper, Glossy Photo
Paper, Semi-Glossy Photo Paper, Heavyweight Glossy Photo Paper 2,
Heavywght SemiGlos Photo Paper 2, Poster Semi-Glossy Photo Paper 2,
Synthetic Paper, Adhesive Synthetic Paper, Proofing Paper, Colored
Coated Paper, CAD Tracing Paper, CAD Translucent Matte Film,
Premium Glossy Paper 200, Newsprint for Proofing1, Newsprint for
Proofing2, High Resolution Paper, Matte Photo Paper , Photo Paper Plus,
Photo Paper Plus Semi-Gloss, Glossy Paper, Photo Paper Pro
- Cut sheet (manual feed from front)

POP Board
Supported thickness Roll media: 0.07 to 0.8 mm
Manual feed from top: 0.07 to 0.8 mm
Manual feed from front: 0.5 to 1.5 mm
Media size (Roll media) Width:203mm X 610mm(24inch)
Lengh:203mm X 18m
Maximum outside diameter:150 mm
Media size (Cut sheet) - Manual feed from top
Width:203mm(8inch) X 610mm(24inch)
Lengh:279mm X 1600mm
- Manual feed from front
Width:203mm(8inch) X 610mm(24inch)
Lengh:520mm X 914mm
Printable area (Roll media) Area excluding 3mm from the leading edge, 3 mm from the trailing edge,
and 3 mm from the left and right edges.
Borderless printing: 0 mm from the leading edge, trailing edge, and left
and right edges.
Width of media allowing borderless printing:

10"(254mm), B4(257mm), A3+(329mm), 14"(356mm), 16"(407mm),
A2/A3(420mm), A2+/17"(432mm), B2(515mm), A1(594mm),
24"(610mm)
Media type allowing borderless printing:

Heavyweight Coated Paper, Extra Heavyweight Coated Paper, Premium
Matte Paper, Glossy Photo Paper, Semi-Glossy Photo Paper,
Heavyweight Glossy Photo Paper 2, Heavywght SemiGlos Photo Paper
2, Satin Photographic Paper 190gsm
Printable area (Cut sheet) Area excluding 3 mm from the leading edge, 3 mm from the trailing edge
(23 mm when supplied from manual feed from top or selected the fine
art), and 3 mm from the left and right edges.
Printing recommendation area Area excluding 20 mm from leading edge, 5 mm from the trailing edge
(Roll media) and 5 mm from the left and right edges (standard size).
Printing recommendation area Area excluding 20 mm from the leading edge, 27 mm from the trailing
(Cut sheet) edge, and 5 mm from the left and right edges (standard size).
Memory 256MB
Increase of memory: none
1-7
Chapter 1
Firmware Flash ROM (update from USB or Ethernet, IEEE1394)

- Printer description language
GARO (Graphic Arts language with Raster Operation), HP-GL/2, HP
RTL
Interface USB2.0, Ethernet, IEEE1394 (option)
Operation panel LCD (160 X 128 dots), 12 keys, 5 LEDs
- Panel language
English
- Message language
English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Chinese, Korean, Russianand
and Japanese
Printhead/Ink Tank type Printhead and separate ink tanks
Printhead [PF-03] Number nozzles: 2560 nozzles per color
Ink tank [PFI-102]MBK,BK,C, M, Y
Capacity: 130 ml per color (Ink tanks supplied with the printer contain
90 ml of each color.)
Detection functions (Cover Detects opening/closing of the top cover and ink tank cover.
system)
Detection functions (Ink passage Detects presence/absence of ink tank, ink level (dot count and electrode),
system) presence/absence of the maintenance cartridge, waste ink full level,
presence/absence of the printhead, and opening/closing of the supply
valve.
Detection functions (Carriage Detects the ambient temperature, head temperature, presence/absence of
system) the head, and no ink ejection.
Detection functions (Paper path Detects presence/absence of paper, cutter position, leading/trailing edge
system) of paper, paper width, and skew.
Operating noise During printing: Approx. 49 dB (A) or less
During standby: Approx. 35 dB (A) or less
Operating environment Temperature: 15 to 30 degrees centigrade
Humidity: 10% to 80% without dew condensation
Print quality guaranteed Temperature: 15 to 30 degrees centigrade
environment Humidity: 10% to 80%RH
Power supply 100-120 VAC (50/60 Hz), 220-240 VAC (50/60 Hz)
Power consumption (Maximum) During printing: Max. 100 W
Power consumption In power save (sleep) mode: 5W or less(220-240 VAC: 6W or less)
(When IEEE1394 board installed, 10W or less[220-240 VAC: 11W or
less])
During standby: 1 W or less
Printer unit dimensions 997 x 670 x 344 mm
(WxDxH) With stand (option): 997 x 870 x 993 mm
Weight Approx. 45 kg
1-8
Chapter 1
1.4 Detailed Specifications
1.4.1 Print Speed and Direction

0019-6076
Media Type Print Priority Print Quality Print-Pass Printing Direction Print Resolution (dpi) Used BK ink
Plain Paper/ Plain Paper Office Document Standard 1 or 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Recycled Paper Line Document/ Draft 1 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Text Standard 1 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 2 Single-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Image Draft 1 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Standard 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
High 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Plain Paper (High Office Document Standard 1 or 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Quality) Line Document/ Draft 1 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Plain Paper (High Office Document Standard 1 or 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Grade) Line Document/ Draft 1 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
All Plain Office Document Standard 1 or 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Paper_Conserve Line Document/ Draft 1 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
MBK Text Standard 1 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Economy Bond Paper Office Document Standard 1 or 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Line Document/ Draft 1 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Universal Bond Paper Office Document Standard 1 or 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Line Document/ Draft 1 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Standard Paper 1569B Office Document Standard 1 or 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
80g Line Document/ Draft 1 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Standard Paper 1570B Office Document Standard 1 or 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
90g Line Document/ Draft 1 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
1-9
Chapter 1
Coated Paper Coated Paper Line Document/ Draft 1 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
Text Standard 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
High 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
Image Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
Highest 12 Bi-directional 2400x1200 BK
Heavyweight Coated Line Document/ Draft 1 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
Paper Text Standard 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
Extra Heavyweight Line Document/ Draft 1 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
Coated Paper Text Standard 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
Recycled Coated Line Document/ Draft 1 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
High Resolution Line Document/ Draft 1 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
Premium Matte Paper Line Document/ Draft 1 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
Matte Photo Paper Line Document/ Draft 1 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
Colored Coated Paper Image Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
1-10
Chapter 1
Photo Paper Premium Coated Line Document/ Draft 1 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
LightWeight Coated Line Document/ Draft 1 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
Paper J80270 90g Text Standard 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
High Resolution Line Document/ Draft 1 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
Barrier Paper 180g Text Standard 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
Matt Coated Paper Line Document/ Draft 1 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
9171 120g Text Standard 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
Extra Matt Coated Line Document/ Draft 1 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
Paper 7215 180g Text Standard 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
Opaque Paper White Line Document/ Draft 1 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
120g Text Standard 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
Matt Coated Paper Line Document/ Draft 1 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
Photo Realistic Paper Line Document/ Draft 1 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
LightWeight Coated Line Document/ Draft 1 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
Paper J80270 90g Text Standard 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
Glossy Photo Paper Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
Semi-Glossy Photo Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
Paper High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 BK
Photo Paper Plus Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
Semi-Gloss High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 BK
Photo Paper Pro Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
1-11
Chapter 1
Proofing Paper Proofing Paper Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
Professional Proof Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
and Photo Glossy High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 BK
195g
and Photo Semiglossy High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 BK
195g
and Photo Semigloss High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 BK
255g
Synthetic Synthetic Paper Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
Adhesive Synthetic Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
Board POP Board Image Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Adhesive Matt High Resolution Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
Paper Graphic Paper Self High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 BK
ADH
CAD CAD Tracing Paper Line Document/ Draft 1 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
CAD Translucent Line Document/ Draft 1 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Matte Film Text Standard 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Special Special 1 Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
Special 2 Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
1-12
Chapter 1
1.4.2 Interface Specifications

0012-6200
a. USB (standard)
(1) Interface type
USB 2.0 Hi-Speed (Full speed (12 Mbits/sec), High speed (480 Mbits/sec))
(2) Data transfer system
Control transfer
Bulk transfer
(3) Signal level
Compliant with the USB standard.
(4) Interface cable
Twisted-pair shielded cable, 5.0 m max.
Compliant with the USB standard.
Wire materials: AWG No.28, data wire pair (AWF: American Wire Gauge)
AWG No.20 to No.28, power distribution wire pair
(5) Interface connector
Printer side: Series B receptacle compliant with USB standard
Cable side: Series B plug compliant with USB standard
b. Network (standard)
(1) Interface type
Interface compliant with IEEE802.3
10Base-T/100Base-TX
(3) Signal level
Input: Threshold
10Base-T: Max. +585 mV, Min. +300 mV
100Base-TX: Turn-on +1000 mV diff pk-pk, Turn-off +200 mV diff pk-pk
Output:
10Base-T: +2.2 V to +2.8 V
100Base-TX: +0.95 to +1.05 V
(4) Interface cable
Category 5 (UTP or FTP) cable, 100 m or shorter
Compliant with ANSI/EIA/TIA-568A or ANSI/EIA/TIA-568B
Printer side: Compliant with IEEE802.3, ANSI X3.263, ISO/IEC60603-7
c. IEEE1394 (option)
(1) Interface type
Interface compliant with IEEE1394-1995, P1394a (Version 2.0)
Asynchronous transfer
(3) Signal level
Input:
Differential input voltage:
During S100 settlement: +173 mV to +260 mV
During data reception: +142 mV to +260 mV
Output:
Differential output voltage: +172 mV to +265 mV
(4) Interface cable
Twisted-pair shielded cable, 4.5 m max.
Compliant with IEEE1394-1995 standard or P1394a (Version 2.0) standard
Printer side: 6-pin connector (socket) compliant with IEEE1394 standard
Cable side: 6-pin connector (plug) compliant with IEEE1394 standard
Cable side: RJ-45 type compliant with ANSI/EIA/TIA-568A or ANSI/EIA/TIA-568B
1-13
Chapter 1
1.5 Names and Functions of Components
1.5.1 Front
0016-8143
[13] [12]
[1]
[11]
[2]
[10]
[9]
[3]
[8]
[4]
[5]
[6] [7]
F-1-17
[1] Top cover
Open this cover when installing the printhead or remove the media jammed inside the printer.
[2] Ink tank cover
Open this cover when replacing ink tanks.
[3] Cutter
A round-blade cutter cuts roll media automatically.
[4] Front manual feed guides
Erect all these guides to print on thick paper. Place thick paper along the guides and insert it up to the alignment lines while pressing the paper to the
right side.
[5] Paper eject slot (paper tray front loading port)
All printed matter is ejected from this port. In loading thick paper, insert it into this port.
[6] Paper alignment line
Load thick paper in a paper tray to stay parallel with this line.
[7] Basket
Receives printed matter as it is ejected. Only one sheet can be housed in the basket.
[8] Stand
The base on which the printer is mounted. The stand equipped with casters is easy to move.
[9] Output guide
Holds ejected paper from lifting.
[10] Operation panel
Contains the power button, online button display and so on.
[11] Roll feed unit
Load roll media on this unit.
[12] Roll feed unit cover
Load roll media with this cover open.
[13] Paper tray cover
Load cut sheet at the paper tray top loading port with this cover open. This cover is opened, and the cut sheet is set at top manual feed slot.
1-14
Chapter 1
1.5.2 Rear
0016-8147
[5]
[1]
[2] [5]
[3]
[4]
F-1-18
[1] Expansion board slot
Insert the IEEE1394 (FireWire) expansion board (option) in this slot.
[2] USB port
Connect the USB cable to this port.
[3] Ethernet connector
Connect the Ethernet cable to this connector.
[4] Power connector
Connect the power cord to this connector.
[5] Carrying handle (5)
The printer is carried with this handles of a right and left bottom.
1.5.3 Top Cover (Inside)

0017-4563
[6]
[1]
[2]
[3] [4] [5]
F-1-19
[1] Carriage shaft
The carriage travels in this area.
[2] Carriage
Moves the printheads.
[3] Borderless printing ink receiving channel
Receives inks overflowing the edges of the paper during borderless printing.
[4] Platen
Paper and the printheads travel over the platen to execute printing. Suction holes on the surface prevent the paper from lifting.
[5] Pinch roller
A vital part needed to feed paper.
[6] Cleaner brush
Use this brush to wipe off paper dust from the platen when cleaning the inside of the top cover.
1-15
Chapter 1
1.5.4 Manual Loading Area

0016-8152
[2]
[3]
[1]
[5]
[4]
F-1-20
[1] Paper tray cover
In loading paper in a paper tray, open this cover.
[2] Paper support
In loading paper in a paper tray, open the paper tray cover and then this tray.
[3] Width guides
In loading cut sheet, move the guide to adjust to the paper size.
[4] Paper tray front loading port (Paper eject slot)
In loading thick paper, insert it into this port. All printed matter is ejected from this port.
[5] Paper tray top loading port
In loading cut sheet, insert them into this port.
1-16
Chapter 1
1.5.5 Roll Feed Unit Cover (Inside)

0016-8154
[3]
[3]
[2] [1]
F-1-21
[1] Roller holder
Set roll media on this holder.
[2] Holder stopper
Use to secure roll media to the roller holder.
[3] Roller holder slot
Set the roller holder in this guide groove.
1.5.6 Carriage
0012-6338
[2] [1]
[4]
[3]
F-1-22
[1] Printhead lock cover
This cover is used to lock the printhead. Open this cover when installing the printhead.
[2] Printhead
The printhead incorporated nozzles. It is an important part for printing.
[3] Printhead lock lever
This lever is used to lock the printhead. Open this lever when installing the printhead.
[4] Ink tube guide
This stay is used as an ink tube guide.
1-17
Chapter 1
1.5.7 Inside
0016-8159
[1]
F-1-23
[1] Maintenance cartridge
Absorbs excess ink
1-18
Chapter 1
1.6 Basic Operation
1.6.1 Operation Panel

0013-0043
This section explains the functions of the buttons and the meanings of the LEDs on the operation panel.
[1] [18] [17]
[2]
[4] [3] [16]
[15]
[5]
[6] [14]
[7]
[13]
[8]
[9] [10] [11] [12]
F-1-24
[1] Data lamp
Blinking: Indicates that a print job is being received or processed if the printer is printing, or that a print job has paused or firmware data is being if the printer is
not printing.
Off: No print job is available.
[2] Message lamp
On: Indicates that a warning message is on display.
Blinking: Indicates that an error message is on display.
Off: The printer is normal or is turned off.
[3] Cut sheet lamp (green)
On: Either the paper tray or paper tray front loading port is selected as a paper source.
Off: Roll media are selected as a paper source.
[4] Roll media lamp (green)
On: Roll media are selected as a paper source.
Off: Either the paper tray or paper tray front loading port is selected as a paper source.
[5] Online button
Toggles the printer mode between online and offline.
On: Online mode.
Blinking: Emerging from sleep mode.
Off: Offline mode.
[6] Paper source button
Selects a paper source. Each time this button is pressed, the paper source toggles between roll media (roll media source) and cut sheet (paper tray or paper tray
front loading port), with the paper source selector lamp illuminating.
[7] Menu button
Displays the printer main menu.
[8] Information button
Displays the printer submenu. Each time this button is pressed, information about the inks and paper is displayed.
Hold this button depressed for 3 seconds to execute printhead cleaning ([Head Cleaning A]).
[9] button
Press this button when the printer is in menu mode to view the menu at the upper level.
The button is also used from one position to the next when entering a numeric value.
If [<-- STOP] is on display, the guidance screen can be paused.
If [<-- BACK] on display, the guidance screen can be moved backward.
[10] button
Press this button when the printer is in offline mode to manually feed roll media.
Press this button when the printer is in menu mode to view the next item or setting.
[11] OK button
Press to set or set or execute a menu choice when the printer is in menu mode.
Press this button in any other situation to transition to the next screen as directed by a message appearing in the display.
[12] button
Press this button when the printer is in menu mode to view the menu at the lower level.
If [NEXT -->] on display, the guidance screen can be moved forward.
[13] Stop button
Press for longer than 1 second to cancel the job or ink drying process in progress.
If cut sheet loading guidance or the like is on display, hold this button for longer than 1 second to stop the guidance.
[14] Load/Eject button
Guidance offers a visual clue to loading (replacing)/removing paper. Press this button when no paper is loaded to view instructions on how to load (replace) paper
in the display; press the button when paper is loaded to view instructions on how to remove the paper.
[15] Power button
Turns the printer on and off.
[16] button
Press this button when the printer is in offline mode to manually feed roll media in the direction opposite to that of ejection.
Press this button when the printer is in menu mode to view the last item or setting.
[17] Color labels
Represent ink tank colors in association with the remaining ink levels shown in the display.
[18] Display
Displays the printer menu, status or messages.
1-19
Chapter 1
1.6.2 Main Menu

0019-6077
The printer has a Main menu which includes a menu related to maintenance such as adjustment of ink ejection position of each nozzle and head cleaning, a menu
related to printing settings such as auto cutting and ink drying time, and a menu related to parameters such as a message language.
1. Main menu operations

a) How to enter the Main menu
To enter the Main menu, press the [Menu] button on the operation panel.
b) How to exit the Main menu

To exit the Main menu, press the [Online] button.
c) Buttons used with the Main menu

- Selecting menus and parameters: [ ] or [ ] button
- Going to the next lower-level menu: [ ] button
- Going to the next higher-level menu: [ ] button
- Determining a selected menu or parameter: [OK] button
1-20
Chapter 1
2. Main Menu
The structure of the main menu is as follows. Values at right indicated by an asterisk "*" are the defaults.
T-1-2
First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level
[Paper Cut] [No]*
[Yes]
[Rep. Ink Tank] [No]*
[Yes]
[Head Cleaning] [Head Cleaning A]
[Head Cleaning B]
[Media Menu] [Manual Paper Type] [Plain Paper](*5)
[Plain Paper HQ](*5)
[Plain Paper HG](*5)
[All Plain Paper Conserve
MBK](*5)
[Recycled Coated](*5)
[High Resolution](*5)
[Coated Paper](*5)
[HW Coated](*5)
[Ex HW Coated](*5)
[Premium MatteP](*5)
[Matte Photo](*5)
[Glossy Photo](*5)
[Semi-Gl Photo](*5)
[HW Glossy Photo2](*5)
[HW SemiGl Photo2](*5)
[SatinPhoto 190](*5)
[Glossy Paper](*5)
[Photo Paper Pro](*5)
[Photo PaperPlus](*5)
[PhotoPlusSemiGl](*5)
[Syn. Paper](*5)
[Adh. Syn. Paper](*5)
[Proofing Paper](*5)
[News Proof 1](*5)
[News Proof 2](*5)
[Colored Coated](*5)
[CAD Trace Paper](*5)
[POP Board](*5)
[CAD Clear Film](*5)
Special # Here, the number is 1
to 5(*5)
[Manual Paper Size] [ISO A4]
[ISO B2]
[ISO B3]
[ISO B4]
[JIS B2]
[JIS B3]
[JIS B4]
[22"X34"(ANSI D)]
[17"X22"(ANSI C)]
[13"X19"(Super B)]
[11"X17"(Ledger)]
[Letter (8.5"X11")]
1-21
Chapter 1
T-1-3
[Media Menu] [Manual Paper Size] [Legal (8.5"X14")]
[24"X36"(ARCH D)]
[18"X24"(ARCH C)]
[12"X18"(ARCH B)]
[9"X12"(ARCH A)]
[DIN C2]
[DIN C3]
[DIN C4]
[20"x24"]
[18"x22"]
[14"x17"]
[12"x16"]
[10"X12"]
[10"X15"]
[16"x20"]
[20"X30"]
[13"X22"]
[300X900mm]
[ISO A1]
[ISO A2+]
[ISO A2]
[ISO A3+]
[ISO A3]
1-22
Chapter 1
T-1-4
[Media Menu] [Roll Media Type](*1) [Plain Paper](*5)
[Plain Paper HQ](*5)
[Plain Paper HG](*5)
[All Plain Paper Conserve
MBK](*5)
[Recycled Coated](*5)
[Coated Paper](*5)
[HW Coated](*5)
[Ex HW Coated](*5)
[Premium MatteP](*5)
[Glossy Photo](*5)
[Semi-Gl Photo](*5)
[HW Glossy Photo2](*5)
[HW SemiGl Photo2](*5)
[SatinPhoto 190](*5)
[Syn. Paper](*5)
[Adh. Syn. Paper](*5)
[Proofing Paper](*5)
[News Proof 1](*5)
[News Proof 2](*5)
[Colored Coated](*5)
[CAD Trace Paper](*5)
[CAD Matte Film](*5)
[CAD Clear Film](*5)
Special # Here, the number is 1
to 5 (*5)
[Chk Remain.Roll] [Of]*
[On]
[Roll Length Set](*1, *2) [### m]
[### feet](*9)
[Paper Details] (The paper type is displayed [Roll DryingTime] [Off]
here.) (*5) [30 sec.]
[1 min.]
[3min.]
[5min.]
[10min.]
[30min.]
[60min.]
[Scan Wait Time] [Off]
[1 sec.]
[3sec.]
[5sec.]
[7sec.]
[9sec.]
1-23
Chapter 1
T-1-5
[Paper Details] (The paper type is displayed [Feed Priority] [Automatic]*
here.) (*5) [Band Joint]
[Print Length]
[Adjust Length] -0.70 to 0.70
[Head Height] [Automatic]*
[Highest]
[High]
[Standard]
[LowLow]
[Lowest]
[Skew Check Lv.] [High Accuracy]
[Standard]*
[Loose]
[Off]
[VacuumStrngth] [Automatic]*
[Strongest]
[Strong]
[Standard]
[Weak]
[Weakest]
[NearEnd RollMrgn] [3mm]
[20mm]
[Cut Speed] [Fast]
[Standard]
[Slow]
[Trim Edge First] [Automatic]
[Off]
[On]
[Cutting Mode] [Automatic]
[Eject]
[Manual]
[Bordless Margin] [Automatic]
[Fixed]
[CutDustReduct.] [Off]
[On]
[NearEnd Sht Mrgn] [3mm]
[20mm]
[Manual Feed] [Front]
[Top]
[Return Defaults] [No]
[Yes]
[GL2 Settings] [GL2 Replot] [No]
[Yes]
[GL2 BufferClear] [No]
[Yes]
[Color Mode] [Color Mode]*
[Monochrome]
1-24
Chapter 1
T-1-6
[GL2 Settings] [Print Quality] [Draft]
[Standard]*
[High]
[Input Resolution] [600dpi]*
[300dpi]
[Media Source] [Automatic]*
[Roll Paper]
[Manual]
[Conserve Paper] [Off]
[On]*
[End Point Shape] [Software]*
[Rounded]
[Smoothing] [Software]*
[Smooth]
[Line Width] [1dot]
[2dot]
[3dot]
[4dot]*
[5dot]
[6dot]
[7dot]
[ThickenFineLines] [Off]*
[On]
[AdjustFaintLines] [Off]
[On]*
[Adjust Printer] [Auto Head Adj.] [Standard Adj.] [No]
[Yes]
[Advanced Adj.] [No]
[Yes]
[Auto Print] [Off]
[On]*
[Manual Head Adj] [No]
[Yes]
[Auto Band Adj.] [Standard Adj.] [No]
[Yes]
[Advanced Adj.] [No]
[Yes]
[Manual Band Adj] [No]
[Yes]
[Adj Far Ed Feed] [No]
[Yes]
[Adjust Length](*3) [No]
[Yes]
[Return Defaults] [No]
[Yes]
1-25
Chapter 1
T-1-7
[Interface Setup] [EOP Timer] [10 sec.]
[30 sec.]
[1 min.]
[2 min.]
[5 min.]
[10 min.]*
[30 min.]
[60 min.]
[TCP/IP] [IP Mode] [Automatic]
[Manual]*
[Protocol](*4) [DHCP] [On]
[Off]*
[BOOTP] [On]
[Off]*
[RARP] [On]
[Off]*
[IP Setting] [IP Address] 0.0.0.0* to 255.255.255.255
[Subnet Mask] 0.0.0.0* to 255.255.255.255
[Default G/W] 0.0.0.0* to 255.255.255.255
[NetWare] [NetWare] [On]
[Off]*
[Frame Type](*6) [Auto Detect]
[Ethernet 2]
[Ethernet 802.2]*
[Ethernet 802.3]
[Ethernet SNAP]
[Print Service](*6) [BinderyPServer]
[RPrinter]
[NDSPServer]*
[NPrinter]
[AppleTalk] [On]
[Off]*
[Ethernet Driver] [Auto Detect] [On*
[Off]
[Comm.Mode](*7) [Half Duplex]*
[Full Duplex]
[Ethernet Type](*7) [10 Base-T]*
[100 Base-TX]
[Spanning Tree] [Not Use]*
[Use]
[MAC Address]
[Ext.Interface] [No]
[IEEE1394]
[Init. Settings] [No]
[Yes]
1-26
Chapter 1
T-1-8
[Maintenance] [Repl. maint. cart.] [No]
[Yes]
[Replace P.head] [No]
[Yes]
[Move Printer] [No]
[Yes]
[Clean Platen] [No]
[Yes]
[System Setup] [Warning] [Buzzer] [Off]
[On]*
[Detect Mismatch] [Pause]
[Warning]
[None]*
[Keep Media Size] [Off]*
[On]
[Paper Size Basis] [Sht Selection] [ISO A3+]*
[13"x19"(Super B)]
[Roll Selection 1] [IS0 A3 (297mm)]*
[300mm Roll]
[Roll Selection 2] [10INCH (254mm)]
[JIS B4 (257mm)]*
[TrimEdge Reload] [Automatic]
[Off]*
[On]
[Noz. Check Freq.] [Off]
[1 page]
[10 pages]
[Automatic]*
[Sleep Timer] [5 min.]*
[10 min.]
[15 min.]
[20 min.]
[30 min.]
[40 min.]
[50 min.]
[60 min.]
[210 min.]
[Shut Down Timer] [Off]
[5 min.]
[10 min.]
[30 min.]
[1 hour]
[4 hours]
[8 hours]*
[12 hours]
[Length Unit] [meter]*
[feet/inch]
1-27
Chapter 1
T-1-9
[System Setup] [Time Zone] [0: London (GMT)]
[+1: Paris, Rome]
[+2: Athens, Cairo]
[+3: Moscow]
[+4: Eerenan, Baku]
[+5: Islamabad]
[+6: Dacca]
[+7: Bangkok]
[+8: Hong Kong]
[+9: Tokyo, Seoul]
[+10: Canberra]
[+11: NewCaledonia]
[+12: Wellington]
[-12: Eniwetok]
[-11: Midway is]
[-10: Hawaii (AHST)]
[-9: Alaska (AKST)]
[-8: Oregon (PST)]
[-7: Arizona (MST)]
[-6: Texas (CST)]
[-5: NewYork (EST)]
[-4: Santiago]
[-3: Buenos Aires]
[-2: ]
[-1: Cape Verde]
[Date Format] [yyyy/mm/dd]*
[dd/mm/yyyy]
[mm/dd/yyyy]
[Date & Time] [Date] [yyyy/mm/dd] (*8)
[Time] [hh: mm]
[Language] [Japanese]
[Francais]
[Italiano]
[Deutsch]
[Espanol]
[Pyccknn]
[Chinese]
[Korea]
[English]
[Contrast Adj.] -4 to 4
[Reset PaprSetngs] [No]
[Yes]
1-28
Chapter 1
T-1-10
[Test Print] [Status Print] [No]
[Yes]
[Media Details] [No]
[Yes]
[Print Job Log] [No]
[Yes]
[Menu Map] [No]
[Yes]
[Nozzle Check] [No]
[Yes]
[Information] [System Info]
[Error Log] [########-####]
[Job Log] (Choose from information [Document Name]
about the latest three print [User Name]
jobs.)
[Page Count]
[Job Status]
[Print Start Time]
[Print End Time]
[Print Time]
[Print Size]
[Media Type]
[Interface]
[Ink Consumed]
*1: Displayed if a roll is loaded.

*2: Displayed if Chk Remain.Roll is On.
*3: Displayed if IP Mode is Automatic.
*4: Displayed if IP Mode is Automatic.
*5: For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Media Guide. The media type setting in the printer driver and related software (as well
as on the Control Panel is updated when you install Media Configuration Tool from the User Software CD-ROM or if you change paper information by using Media
Configuration Tool.
*6: Available only if NetWare is On.
*7: Available only if Auto Detect is Off.
*8: Follows the setting in Date Format.
*9: Not displayed if a roll or a sheet has been fed.
1-29
Chapter 1
3. Main menu during printing

The structure of the main menu during printing is as follows.
T-1-11
[Menu Durng Prtng] [Head Cleaning] [Head Cleaning A]
[Head Cleaning B]
[Fine Band Adj.] -5 to 5
[Information] [System Info]
[Error Log] [########-####]
[Job Log] (Choose from information [Document Name]
about the latest three print [User Name]
jobs.)
[Page Count]
[Job Status]
[Print Start Time]
[Print End Time]
[Print Time]
[Print Size]
[Media Type]
[Interface]
[Ink Consumed]
1-30
Chapter 1
4. Main Menu Settings

Main menu items are described in the following tables.
T-1-12
Setting Item Description, Instructions

[Paper Cut] Displayed if a roll is loaded.
Choose Yes to cut the roll at the current position. The paper will be fed, if necessary, so that the sheet is at
least 10 cm (39.4 in.)long after the cut. The paper will not be cut if there is not enough paper left to feed the
paper this much.
[Rep. Ink Tank] When exchanging the ink tank, choose Yes and follow the instructions on the screen.
[Head Cleaning] Specify Printhead cleaning options.
Choose Head Cleaning A if printing is faint, oddly colored, or contains foreign substances.
Choose Head Cleaning B if no ink is printed at all, or if printing is not improved by Head Cleaning A .
[Paper Settings] Specify the type and size of paper.
[Paper Details] Specify detailed paper-related settings, including the ink drying time and borderless printing options.
[GL2 Settings] Make settings for making prints using HP-GL2.
[Adjust Printer] Adjust the Printhead alignment or amount of feed by printing a test pattern.
[Interface Setup] Configure the network settings.
[Maintenance] Replace the Printhead , prepare to transfer the printer, and clean the Pick Up Roller .
[System Setup] Specify the printer system settings, including the date format and display language.
[Test Print] Choose Status Print to print information about the printer.
Choose Media Details to print the paper settings as specified in Med.Detail Set. .
Choose Print Job Log to print a record of print jobs, including the paper type and size, amount of ink used,
and so on.
Choose Menu Map to print a list of the main menu options.
Choose Nozzle Check to print a test pattern for checking the nozzles.
If you have selected a leading edge margin of 20 mm in Nr End Sht Mrgn in the printer menu, the test print
sheet may not be printed completely.
[Information] Displays the information about the printer and history of print jobs.
[Paper Settings]
T-1-13

[Manual PaperType] Choose the type of manual feed paper.
[Manual PaperSize] Choose the size of manual feed paper.
[Roll Media Type] Choose the type of roll.
[Chk Remain.Roll] Choose On to print a barcode at the end of a roll before you remove it. The printed barcode can be used in
managing the amount of roll paper left. Choose Off if you prefer not to print the barcode.
[Roll Length Set] Displayed if Chk Remain.Roll is On .
If a barcode is not printed on rolls, specify the roll length. The roll length is displayed in meters (1.0 - 91.0
m) or feet (1 - 300 ft.), depending on the setting in Length Unit .
1-31
Chapter 1
[Paper Details]
T-1-14

(The paper type is displayed here.) [Roll DryingTime] Specify the time to wait for the ink to dry for each sheet.
[Scan Wait Time] Specify the time to wait for the ink to dry between each scan in bidirectional printing,
in consideration of how quickly the paper absorbs ink. Note that printing will take
longer if you specify a wait time.
[Feed Priority] Specify exact paper feeding, if desired. Normally, select Automatic . Choose Print
Length if you prefer to feed the paper an exact amount. However, note that choosing
Print Length may result in slight banding in the direction of Carriage scanning.
[Adjust Length] Displayed if Feed Priority is Print Length .
Adjustment relative to the amount of stretching or shrinkage of the current paper.
For paper that tends to stretch, increase the feed amount by setting the adjustment
value toward +. For paper that tends to shrink, decrease the feed amount by setting
the adjustment value toward -.
The setting for the amount of paper stretching or shrinkage is relative. If you access
it again later, it will be displayed as 0.00 %.
[Head Height] Adjust the Printhead height.
[Skew Check Lv.] If you print on Japanese Paper Washi or other handmade paper that has an irregular
width, choose Loose for a higher skew detection threshold, or choose Off to disable
skew detection. However, if paper is loaded askew when detection is Off , note that
paper jams or Platen soiling may occur.
If strict skew detection is required, choose High Accuracy.
[VacuumStrngth] Specify the level of suction that holds paper against the Platen .
[NearEnd RollMrgn] Specify a margin at the leading edge of roll paper to ensure better printing quality at
the leading edge.
Note that if you choose 3 mm , it may lower the printing quality at the leading edge
and affect feeding accuracy. The printed surface may be scratched, and ink may
adhere to the the leading edge.
[Cut Speed] Choose the cutting speed. For media such as film that are more likely to generate
debris when cut, choose Fast to reduce the amount of debris.
[Trim Edge First] If a roll is loaded, the end of the paper will be cut.
Choose Forced to have 40 mm (1.6 in) cut off the leading edge of the roll, ensuring
a straight edge, after you load the roll. Scraps are then removed.
When Automatic is selected, if the left and right side of the leading edge of the roll
are uneven (by 3 mm [0.12 in] or more), the edge is cut an amount relative to the
slant to ensure a straight edge after you load the roll. Scraps are then removed.
If the unevenness is less than 3 mm or if No Cutting is selected, the edge is not cut
and scraps are not removed.
[Cutting Mode] Specify if the Cutter Unit is used for cutting.
Choose Automatic to have roll paper cut automatically after printing. If you choose
Eject , the paper will not be cut after printing. Instead, a line will be printed at the
cut position.
[Bordless Margin] Adjust the margin during borderless printing.
[CutDustReduct.] Choose On to reduce the amount of debris generated when cutting film and similar
media by printing a line at the cut position. This option reduces the amount of debris
given off after cutting.
[Manual Feed] Choose how the paper is supplied, Top for printing from the Tray or Front for
printing from the Front Paper Feed Slot .
[NearEnd Sht Mrgn] Specify a margin at the leading edge of sheets to ensure better printing quality at the
leading edge.
Note that if you choose 3 mm , it may lower the printing quality at the leading edge
and affect feeding accuracy. The printed surface may be scratched, and ink may
adhere to the the leading edge.
If you have selected 20 mm , the test print sheet may not be printed completely.
[Return Defaults] Choose Yes to restore Med.Detail Set. to the factory default values.
[GL2 Settings]
T-1-15

[GL2 Replot] Reprint the last printed page stored in the printer.
[GL2 BufferClear] Delete the last printed page stored in the printer.
[Color Mode] Choose the color mode.
[Print Quality] Choose the print quality.
[Input Resolution] Select [600dpi] or [300dpi] as the print resolution.
[Media Source] Select the method of feeding paper when using the HP-GL/2 for printing.
[Conserve Paper] Print using paper sparingly.
[End Point Shape] Select [Software] or [Round] as the shape of the line end.
[Smoothing] Select whether to print an arc with a smooth curve or polygon.
[Line Width] Select the printing line width for the data for which a line width is not specified.
[ThickenFineLines] Choose On to print the thin line clearly.
[AdjustFaintLines] Choose On if the colored of thin line is printed different from other figure. However, it is a possibility to the
thin lines become interrupted lines according to the some colors.
1-32
Chapter 1
[Adjust Printer]
T-1-16

[Auto Head Adj.] [Standard Adj.] Choose Yes to have the printer print and read a test pattern for the automatic
adjustment of Printhead alignment relative to the printing direction.
[Advanced Adj.] Choose Yes to have the printer print and read a test pattern for the automatic
adjustment of Printhead alignment relative to the nozzle, ink tank, and printing
direction.
Three sheets are required when printing on sheets.
[Auto Print] Choose On to have the printer automatically execute the Advanced Adj. operations
after you replace the Printhead .
[Manual Head Adj] Choose Yes to print a test pattern for adjustment of Printhead alignment relative to
the printing direction. Enter the adjustment value manually based on the resulting
pattern.
[Auto Band Adj.] [Standard Adj.] Choose Yes to have the printer print and read a test pattern for band adjustment,
based on which the printer automatically adjusts the feed amount.
[Advanced Adj.] Choose this option when using paper other than genuine Canon paper, or paper for
purposes other than checking output.
Choose Yes to have the printer print and read a test pattern for band adjustment,
based on which the printer automatically adjusts the feed amount. Note that this
function takes more time and requires more ink than Standard Adj.
Two sheets are required when printing on sheets.
[Manual Band Adj] Choose Yes to print a test pattern for adjusting the feed amount based on the paper
type.
Two sheets are required when printing on sheets.
[Adj Far Ed Feed] [Choose Yes to print a test pattern for adjusting the feed amount of the trailing edge
of paper based on the paper type.
[Adjust Length] Choose Yes to print a test pattern for adjustment relative to paper stretching or
shrinkage, after which you can enter the amount of adjustment.
[Interface Setup]
T-1-17

[EOP Timer] Specify the timeout period for print jobs.
[TCP/IP] [IP Mode] Choose whether the printer IP address is configured automatically or a static IP
address is entered manually.
[Protocol] [DHCP] Specify the protocol used to configure the IP address automatically.
[BOOTP]
[RARP]
[IP Setting] [IP Address] Specify the printer network information when using a static IP address.
[Subnet Mask] Enter the IP address assigned to the printer, as well as the network subnet mask
and default gateway.
[Default G/W]
[NetWare] [NetWare] Specify the NetWare protocol. To apply your changes, choose Store Setting .
[Frame Type] Specify the frame type to use.
[Print Service] Choose the print service.
[AppleTalk] Specify whether to use the AppleTalk protocol. To apply your changes, choose
Store Setting .
[Ethernet Driver] [Auto Detect] Specify the communication method. To apply your changes, choose Store
Setting .
Choose On for automatic configuration of the LAN communication protocol.
Choose Off to use settings values of Comm.Mode and Ethernet Type .
[Comm.Mode] Choose the LAN communication method.
[Ethernet Type] Choose the LAN transfer rate.
[Spanning Tree] Choose whether spanning-tree packets are supported over the LAN.
[MAC Address] Displays the MAC address.
[Ext.Interface] When installing the expansion interface board, choose whether the expansion
interface board is used.
[Init. Settings]
A confirmation message is displayed if you press the button. Choose [OK]
to restore the network settings to the default values.
[Maintenance]
T-1-18

[Repl. maint. cart.] When exchanging the maintenance cartridge, choose Yes and follow the instructions on the screen.
[Replace P.head] Not displayed during a warning message that the remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity is low.
When replacing the Printhead , choose Yes and follow the instructions on the screen.
[Move Printer] Not displayed during a warning message that the remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity is low.
When transferring the printer to another location, choose Yes and follow the instructions on the screen.
[Clean Platen] Use this function to clean inside the Top Cover . After you select Yes , the Carriage is moved in preparation
for Platen cleaning.
1-33
Chapter 1
[System Setup]
T-1-19

[Warning] [Buzzer] Set the buzzer. Choose On for the buzzer to sound in case of errors.
[Detect Mismatch] Choose Warning for notification (display of a warning message) during printing if
the paper type specified in the printer menu does not match the paper type in the
printer driver. Choose None to continue print without notification. Choose Pause to
have printing paused under these circumstances. In this case, you can continue
printing by pressing the Online button.
[Keep Media Size] Choose On to use the paper size setting as the basis for printing instead of other
settings. The margin setting of the printer menu will be used instead of the margin
setting of the printer driver if the latter is smaller, which may prevent text or images
in the margin from being printed. Choose Off to use the printer driver settings
instead. Even if the margin setting of the printer driver is smaller than that of the
printer driver, text or images will not be cut off. However, this requires longer paper
because the actual margin will be equal to the margin setting of the printer driver
plus the margin setting of the printer menu.
[Paper Size Basis] [Sht Selection] If sheet size detection is activated, choose whether ISO A3+ or ANSI B Super is
applied when an inbetween size is detected.
[Roll Selection 1] If roll size detection is activated, choose whether ISO A3 (297 mm) and 300 mm
Roll is applied when an inbetween size is detected.
[Roll Selection 2] If roll size detection is activated, choose whether 10in. (254 mm) or JIS B4 (257
mm) is applied when an inbetween size is detected.
[TrimEdge Reload] Keeping a roll in the printer for a long time without printing on it may leave a
depression on the leading edge.
When printing quality is most important, we recommend setting this option to On so
that the paper edge is automatically cut before printing.
[Noz. Check Freq.] Specify the timing for automatic checks of nozzle clogging. Choose Off to disable
checking. Choose 1 page to check after each page is printed. Choose 10 pages to
check once after every ten pages are printed.
[Sleep Timer] Specify the period before the printer enters sleep mode.
[Shut Down Timer] Specify the period before the printer shuts down.
[Length Unit] Choose the unit of measurement when roll length is displayed. You can switch the
unit displayed for Roll Length Set and the remaining paper amount displayed in the
submenu.
[Time Zone] Specify the time zone. Time zone options indicate a main city in this time zone and
the difference from Greenwich Mean Time.
[Date Format] Specify the date format.
[Date & Time] [Date] Set the current date.
[Time] Set the current time.
[Language] Specify the language used on the Display Screen.
[Contrast Adj.] Adjust the contrast of the Display Screen.
[Reset PaprSetngs] Restores settings that you have changed with Media Configuration Tool to the
factory default values.
[Information]
T-1-20

[System Info] [Version] [Firmware] Displays the version of the printer and firmware.
[Boot] Displays the Boot ROM version of the printer.
[MIT] Displays the DB format version of the MIT.
[s/n:] Displays the printer serial number.
[MAC] Displays the MAC address of the printer.
[IP:] Displays the printer IP address.
[Error Log] [########-####] Displays the most recent error messages (up to two).
[Job Log] (Choose from information [Document Name] Displays the document name in the last print job.
about the latest three print [User Name] Displays the name of the user who sent the print job.
jobs.)
[Page Count] Displays the number of pages in the print job.
[Job Status] Displays the results of the print job processed.
[Print Start Time] Displays the time when the print job was started.
[Print End Time] Displays the time when the print job was finished.
[Print Time] Displays the time required to print the job.
[Print Size] Displays the paper size in the print job.
[Media Type] Displays the paper type in the print job.
[Interface] Displays the interface used for the print job.
[Ink Consumed] Displays the ink density of each color in the print job.
1-34
Chapter 1
5. Main Menu Settings (During Printing)

Main menu items during printing are described in the following tables.
T-1-21

[Head Cleaning] Specify Printhead cleaning options.
Choose Head Cleaning A if printing is faint, oddly colored, or contains foreign substances.
Choose Head Cleaning B if no ink is printed at all, or if printing is not improved by Head Cleaning A .
[Fine Band Adj.] Displayed during print jobs. Fine-tune the feed amount manually.
[Information] Displays the information about the printer and history of print jobs.
[Information]
T-1-22

[System Info] [Version] [Firmware] Displays the version of the printer and firmware.
[Boot] Displays the Boot ROM version of the printer.
[MIT] Displays the DB format version of the MIT.
[Ext.Interface] Identifies boards in the expansion slot.
[s/n: ] Displays the printer serial number.
[MAC] Displays the MAC address of the printer.
[IP:] Displays the printer IP address.
[Error Log] [########-####] Displays the most recent error messages (up to two).
[Job Log] (Choose from information [Document Name] Displays the document name in the last print job.
about the latest three print [User Name] Displays the name of the user who sent the print job.
jobs.)
[Page Count] Displays the number of pages in the print job.
[Job Status] Displays the results of the print job processed.
[Print Start Time] Displays the time when the print job was started.
[Print End Time] Displays the time when the print job was finished.
[Print Time] Displays the time required to print the job.
[Print Size] Displays the paper size in the print job.
[Media Type] Displays the paper type in the print job.
[Interface] Displays the interface used for the print job.
[Ink Consumed] Displays the ink density of each color in the print job.
1-35
Chapter 1
1.7 Safety and Precautions
1.7.1 Safety Precautions
1.7.1.1 Moving Parts

0013-5092
Moving parts of the printer include the carriage unit driven by the carriage motor, the carriage belt, the ink tube, the flexible cable, the feed roller driven by the feed
motor, the pinch roller, and the purge unit driven by the purge motor.
To prevent accidents, the top cover of the printer is locked during printing. If the top cover is opened in the online/offline mode, the carriage motor, feed motor,
and other driving power supplies are turned off.
Carriage motor
Flexible cable
Carriage unit
Pinch roller
Feed roller
Feed motor
Ink tube
Purge unit
F-1-25
1.7.1.2 Adhesion of Ink

0013-5093
(1) Ink passages

Be careful not to touch the ink passages of the printer to prevent the printer, workbench, ands, and clothes from being stained with ink.
The ink flows through the ink tank unit, carriage unit, purge unit, maintenance jet tray, maintenance cartridge, and the ink tubes that relay ink to individual units.
Carriage unit
Ink tank unit
Platen
maintenance cartridge
maintenance-jet tray
Purge unit
F-1-26
1-36
Chapter 1
- Although the ink is not harmful to the human body, it contains organic solvents.
Ink may contaminate the surrounding parts. Carry out the work with due caution. If your hands are stained with ink, wash them with a plenty of water.
Be careful not to allow the ink to get into your mouth or eyes.
If the ink gets into your eyes, flush them with water well and see a doctor.
In case of accidental ingestion of a large quantity of ink, see a doctor immediately.
- It is also effective to use gloves to prevent ink from adhering when working.
- Since this ink contains pigment, stains will not come out of clothing.
(2) Ink Mist

Since the printhead prints by squirting ink onto the media, a minute amount of ink mist is generated in the printing unit during printing. The generated ink mist is
collected in the printer by the airflow. However, uncollected ink mist may stain the platen, carriage unit, exterior, and purge unit.
These stains may soil the print media or hands and clothes when servicing the printer. Wipe them off carefully with a soft, well-wrung cloth.
Platen/carriage unit
Top Cover
Purge unit
F-1-27
1-37
Chapter 1
1.7.1.3 Electric Parts

0019-6084
The electric parts of the printer are activated when the printer is connected to the AC power supply.
At the left rear of the printer are the main controller, power supply, and interface connector. The carriage PCB is incorporated in the carriage unit, and the operation
panel is on the upper right top cover.
When serving the printer with the cover removed, be extremely careful to avoid electric shock and shorting electrical devices.
Carriage PCB
Operation panel
Main controller
Interface connector
Power supply Power connector

F-1-28
1.7.2 Other Precautions
1.7.2.1 Printhead
0013-1929
1. How to Handle the Printhead

Do not open the printhead package until you are ready to install the head.
When installing the printhead in the printer, hold the knob and then remove the protective cap 1 and protective cap 2 in that order.
Do not reattach the protective cap to the printhead because the cap may damage the nozzles.
To prevent the nozzles from getting clogged with foreign matter or dried ink, install the printhead immediately after you remove the protective caps.
Also make sure to press down the locking lever of the printhead until you feel a click.
In addition, to prevent clogging of the nozzles with foreign matter and improper supply of ink, never touch the nozzles or ink port, or wipe it with tissue paper or
anything else.
Do not touch Electrical contact.
Also, never attempt to disassemble/reassemble the printhead or wash it with water.
MEMO:
If the nozzles are clogged or an ink suction problem occurs, white lines can appear on the printout a constant frequency or color dulling can occur. If this problem
is not resolved by cleaning operations, replace the printhead with a new one.
1-38
Chapter 1
[6]
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[5]
F-1-29
[1] Knob [4] Nozzles

[2] Protective cap 1 [5] Electrical contact
[3] Protective cap 2 [6] Ink port
2. Capping
The printer will perform the capping operation when printing has ended or during standby due to an error, in order to protect the printhead and avoid ink leakage.
If the power cord is accidentally unplugged, turn off the Power button, reconnect the power cord, and then turn on the Power button. Confirm that the printer starts
up properly and enters to the "Online" or "Offline" status, and then power off the printer using the Power button.
Improper "capping operation" may cause clogged nozzles due to dried ink or ink leakage from the printhead.
3. When the printer is not used for a long time

Keep the printhead installed in the printer even when it is not used for an extended period of time.
If the printhead is left uninstalled, a printing failure may arise from closed nozzles due to depositing of foreign matter or dried ink when it is reinstalled.
Even if the head remains installed, the nozzle may dry out and cause a printing failure if the ink is drained for transport.
4. Conductivity of Ink
The ink used in this printer is electrically conductive. If ink leaks to into the mechanical unit, wipe clean with a soft, well-wrung damp cloth. If ink leaks onto
electrical units, wipe them completely using tissue paper. If you cannot remove ink completely, replace the electrical units with new ones.
If electrical units are powered with ink leaked onto them, the units may damage.
Never connect the power cord when ink has leaded onto the electrical units.
1-39
Chapter 1
1.7.2.2 Ink Tank

0013-1886
1. Unpacking the Ink Tank

Do not unpack the ink tank until you are ready to install it.
When installing the ink tank, be sure to shake it slowly 7 to 8 times before unpacking it. Otherwise, the ink ingredients may precipitate and degrade the print quality.
To prevent foreign matter from entering the ink port, install the unpacked ink tank in the printer immediately.
2. Handling the Ink Tank

To prevent foreign matter from entering the ink flow path and causing ink suction and printing problems, never touch the ink port and contacts of the ink tank.
When you press down the ink tank lock lever, the needle enters the ink port, allowing ink to flow between the printer and ink tank.
Do not raise or lower the ink tank lock lever except when replacing the ink tank.
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
F-1-30
[1] Ink tank
[2] Ink tank lock lever
[3] Contacts
[4] Ink port
1.7.2.3 Handling the Printer

0019-6086
1. Precautions against Static Electricity

Certain clothing may generate static electricity, causing an electrical charge to build up on your body. Such a charge can damage electrical devices or change their
electrical characteristics.
In particular, never touch the printhead contact.
[2]
[1]
F-1-31
[1] Carriage unit

[2] Printhead contact
1-40
Chapter 1
2. Fixing the Carriage

After completion of printing, the carriage is mechanically locked by the lock arm in the purge unit at the same moment the printhead is capped.
Before transporting the printer, secure the carriage at its home position using belt stopper[1] so that the carriage does not become separated from the lock arm and
damage or ink does not leak.
[1]
F-1-32
3. Vent Holes
This printer has four vent holes, [1] to [4]. Do not block the vent holes when the printer is in operation.
[1]
[2]
[4] [3]
F-1-33
1-41
Chapter 1
4. Contact of Linear Scale/Carriage Shaft

Do not touch the linear scale and carriage shaft when the upper cover is opened, for maintenance.
Touching the linear scale and carriage shaft might cause abnormal movement of the carriage and produce defective prints.
[2] [1]
F-1-34
[1] Linear Scale

[2] Carriage Shaft
Don't apply the grease to the linear scale and carriage shaft. It may cause abnormal operations and defective prints.
5. Handling the Maintenance Cartridge

When removing the maintenance cartridge from the printer, use caution so that waste ink does not spatter.
6. Refilling the Printer with Ink

After draining the ink from inside the printer using the automatic or manual ink draining procedure for disassemble/reassemble or transport the printer, refill the
printer with ink as soon as possible upon completion of the work.
Dried remaining ink on the surface of some components, may cause damage or abnormal operations.
1-42
Chapter 1
1.7.3 Precautions When Servicing Printer
1.7.3.1 Notes on the Data Stored in the Printer

0013-3742
This printer counts the print length, number of ink tank replacements, number of cleaning operations, number of cutter operations, and so on and stores them in the
main controller's EEPROM as a service mode counter.
This counter provides important information about the printer usage status.
You can check this information by printing it in the service mode or displaying it on the display.
Follow the precautions below when servicing the printer.
(1) Repairing/replacing the PCB

When replacing the main controller, follow the specified replacement procedure.
For the main controller replacement procedure, see "DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY" > "Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly" > "PCBs".
(2) After replacing the purge unit

The information about the number of cleanings resides in the purge unit. After replacing the purge unit, select [INITIALIZE] > [PURGE] in the service mode to
initialize (clear) the information about the number of cleanings.
(3) On replacement of supplies

After supplies have been replaced, execute [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS xx] in service mode to initialize (clear) the parts counter information.
For the consumable parts, see "MAINTENANCE" > "Periodic Replacement Parts".
You cannot check the counter information once it is initialized (cleared). Be careful not to initialize the counter information before checking it.
You cannot modify the counter information from the operation panel.
1.7.3.2 Confirming the Firmware Version

0012-6235
Firmware has been downloaded to the main controller.

When you have replaced the main controller, check that the firmware is the latest version. If not, update it to the latest version.
Reference:
For instruction on how to update the main controller, refer to "TROUBLESHOOTING" > "Version Up".
1.7.3.3 Precautions against Static Electricity

0012-6236
Certain clothing may generate static electricity, causing an electrical charge to build up on your body. Such a charge can damage electrical devices or change their
electrical characteristics.
Before disassembling the printer for servicing, discharge any static buildup by touching a grounded metal fitting or the like.
1.7.3.4 Precautions for Disassembly/Reassembly

0012-6238
The precautions for disassembly/reassembly are described in "DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY".
1.7.3.5 Self-diagnostic Feature

0012-6239
The printer has a self-diagnostic feature to analyze hardware problems.

The self-diagnosis result is shown on the display and indicated by lamps.
For detailed information, see "ERROR CODE".
1-43
Chapter 1
1.7.3.6 Disposing of the Lithium Battery

0012-6240
The main controller PCB of this printer is equipped with a lithium battery to back up various data.
Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type.

Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions.
"For CA, USA Only

Included battery contains Perchlorate Material-special handling may apply. See
http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/ for detail."
1-44
Chapter 2 TECHNICAL REFERENCE
Contents
Contents
2.1 Basic Operation Outline.................................................................................................................................................2-1

2.1.1 Printer Diagram............................................................................................................................................................................ 2-1
2.1.2 Print Signal Sequence .................................................................................................................................................................. 2-2
2.1.3 Print Driving ................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-3
2.2 Firmware ........................................................................................................................................................................2-5
2.2.1 Operation Sequence at Power-on................................................................................................................................................. 2-5
2.2.2 Operation Sequence at Power-off ................................................................................................................................................ 2-6
2.2.3 Print Control................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-7
2.2.4 Print Position Adjustment Function........................................................................................................................................... 2-12
2.2.5 Head Management ..................................................................................................................................................................... 2-12
2.2.6 Printhead Overheating Protection Control................................................................................................................................. 2-12
2.2.7 Pause between Pages.................................................................................................................................................................. 2-12
2.2.8 White Raster Skip ...................................................................................................................................................................... 2-12
2.2.9 Sleep Mode ................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-12
2.3 Printer Mechanical System ..........................................................................................................................................2-13
2.3.1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-13
2.3.1.1 Outline...........................................................................................................................................................................................................2-13
2.3.2 Ink Passage................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-14
2.3.2.1 Ink Passage....................................................................................................................................................................................................2-14
2.3.2.1.1 Overview of Ink Passage.......................................................................................................................................................................2-14
2.3.2.2 Ink Tank Unit ................................................................................................................................................................................................2-15
2.3.2.2.1 Structure of Ink Tank Unit ....................................................................................................................................................................2-15
2.3.2.3 Carriage Unit .................................................................................................................................................................................................2-17
2.3.2.3.1 Functions of Carriage Unit....................................................................................................................................................................2-17
2.3.2.3.2 Structure of Carriage Unit .....................................................................................................................................................................2-18
2.3.2.4 Printhead .......................................................................................................................................................................................................2-20
2.3.2.4.1 Structure of Printhead............................................................................................................................................................................2-20
2.3.2.5 Purge Unit .....................................................................................................................................................................................................2-21
2.3.2.5.1 Functions of Purge Unit ........................................................................................................................................................................2-21
2.3.2.5.2 Structure of Purge Unit .........................................................................................................................................................................2-23
2.3.2.6 Maintenance Cartridge ..................................................................................................................................................................................2-25
2.3.2.6.1 Maintenance Cartridge ..........................................................................................................................................................................2-25
2.3.2.7 Air Flow ........................................................................................................................................................................................................2-26
2.3.2.7.1 Air flow .................................................................................................................................................................................................2-26
2.3.3 Paper Path .................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-27
2.3.3.1 Outline...........................................................................................................................................................................................................2-27
2.3.3.1.1 Overview of Paper Path.........................................................................................................................................................................2-27
2.3.3.2 Paper Path......................................................................................................................................................................................................2-28
2.3.3.2.1 Structure of Roll Media Pick-up Unit ...................................................................................................................................................2-28
2.3.3.2.2 Structure of Manual Feed Unit..............................................................................................................................................................2-29
2.3.3.2.3 Manual Feed (from Front) Sequence ....................................................................................................................................................2-31
2.3.3.2.4 Manual Feed (from Rear) Sequence......................................................................................................................................................2-31
2.3.3.2.5 Structure of Feed Roller Unit ................................................................................................................................................................2-32
2.3.3.2.6 Feed Roller Eccentricity Detection Function ........................................................................................................................................2-33
2.3.3.2.7 Structure of Ejection Spur .....................................................................................................................................................................2-34
2.3.3.3 Cutter Unit.....................................................................................................................................................................................................2-35
2.3.3.3.1 Structure of Cutter unit..........................................................................................................................................................................2-35
2.4 Printer Electrical System..............................................................................................................................................2-36
2.4.1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-36
2.4.1.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................................................................................2-36
2.4.2 Main Controller.......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-38
2.4.2.1 Main controller PCB components.................................................................................................................................................................2-38
2.4.3 Carriage Relay PCB................................................................................................................................................................... 2-39
Contents
2.4.3.1 Carriage PCB components............................................................................................................................................................................ 2-39

2.4.4 Motor Driver .............................................................................................................................................................................. 2-40
2.4.4.1 Roll feed unit PCB components.................................................................................................................................................................... 2-40
2.4.5 Maintenance Cartridge Relay PCB............................................................................................................................................ 2-40
2.4.5.1 Maintenance cartridge relay PCB components............................................................................................................................................. 2-40
2.4.6 Power Supply ............................................................................................................................................................................. 2-40
2.4.6.1 Power supply block diagram......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-40
2.5 Detection Functions with Sensors ............................................................................................................................... 2-41
2.5.1 Covers ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-41
2.5.2 Ink passage system..................................................................................................................................................................... 2-42
2.5.3 Carriage system.......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-44
2.5.4 Paper path system ...................................................................................................................................................................... 2-45
2.5.5 Others......................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-47
Chapter 2
2.1 Basic Operation Outline
2.1.1 Printer Diagram

0019-6087
Shown below is a printer diagram.
Main controller PCB

IC601/IC602
IC603/IC604
IC301/IC302
SDRAM
CN2 J1801 IC802 IC701

Power supply PCB
EEPROM FLASH ROM
J101
IC803 IC1 Operation panel PCB
RTC ASIC
BAT 801
relay PCB
Lithium battery
USB
IEEE1394 Board ROM PCB
IC1201
LAN LAN Controller
Carriage PCB
Linear J3 Ink tank
encoder
Ink tank
Head IC1 J2601
J21/J22 ROM PCB
J23 IC2
ASIC
J2512 Sensor
J3402 Roll cam sensor

Multi
J5 J3701/J3801 Roll media sensor
sensor IC6/IC7 J3202
Motor
J2511/J2512 Roll motor

J3011J3202
J3211/J3301 J2/J3 J3
J3411/J3911
Sensor /Switch
J2703 J1 IC1
Valve open /closed detection sensor Motor driver
Feed roller HP sensor
Feed roller encoder sensor Roll feed unit PCB
Lift cam sensor J2511/
Paper detection sensor J2512
Cutter right position sensor Fan
Spur cam sensor
Pump cam sensor Suction fan
Pump encoder sensor Mist fan
J2511/J2801
Ink detection sensor J3011/J3101
Temperature/humidity sensor IC2801/IC2901
J3211
Head management sensor IC3001/IC3101 Motor
Top cover sensor Motor driver
Cutter HP sensor Carriage motor
Ink tank cover switch Feed motor
Lift motor
Purge motor
Valve motor
Cutter motor
F-2-1
2-1
Chapter 2
2.1.2 Print Signal Sequence

0017-4696
The signal sequence from when the printer receives the print signals until printing starts is shown in the following figure.
: Image data
Host computer : Mask pattern data
: Heat pulse
Printer driver : Command data
: PCI bus
a a
: Data bus
: Universal sirial bus
Interface unit
Expansion USB LAN
b b
b
i
ASIC (IC1/L-COA)
EEPROM
Image processing Printhead
c g
DDR-SDRAM unit EEPROM
d
SDR-SDRAM
f Carriage PCB
e
FLASH ROM f Latch IC
e,h
e
i e
Ink tank
h
EEPROM
ASIC (IC2)
i
Operation panel
i
Sensor and drive unit
Main controller
F-2-2
a) The printer driver on the host computer transmits print data, including command data, to the printer after compressing the image data, without resolution, color
and 12-color binarization conversion.
To achieve high-quality image output, the image processing table data used for image data color conversion and binarization conversion are generated as command
data to meet the Media Type and other specifications of the printer driver.
b) This printer receives print data from the individual interfaces on the main controller, transmitting the received print data to ASIC (IC1).
c) The main controller decompresses the print data transmitted to the ASIC and gets it through resolution, color and 5-color binarization conversion while loading
the data into DDR-SDRAM from time to time.
It also converts the print data to 5-color binary equivalents of image and command data.
d) The ASIC (IC1) generates image data synthesized with mask data within the ASIC in sync with the discharge time while loading the data into DDR-SDRAM
from time to time.
e) The ASIC (IC2) collects printhead information from EEPROM mounted on the printheads and the printer temperature from the latch IC on the carriage board
and transmit them to the ASIC (IC1).
The ASIC (IC1) also receives mask pattern data from the firmware installed in flash ROM.
f) The ASIC (IC1) converts the image data synthesized with the mask pattern to data associated with the printhead information and the printer temperature, trans-
mitting the data to the printheads as a print signal. It transmits heat pulses to the printheads at the same time to optimize head driving.
g) The printheads convert the received print signal from a serial signal to a parallel signal for each row of nozzles and then the signal is composed with the heat
pulses to perform the printing.
h) The ASIC (IC1) controls the general aspects of image processing and print drive control by detecting the status of the individual printer components with refer-
ence to the adjustment values stored in EEPROM. SDR-SDRAM is used as work memory.
i) The ASIC (IC2) controls the general aspects of drive control by controlling button actuations and message displays on the basis of the firmware installed in flash
ROM.
2-2
Chapter 2
2.1.3 Print Driving

0012-6491
Print and control signals are transferred via the carriage PCB to the printheads to discharge inks from the nozzle assembly at printing.
Each printhead has 12 trains of nozzles arranged in a zigzag pattern.
This printer uses one printhead.
(In installed state, from left to right, C, M, Y, MBK, MBK, BK)
Print signals directed at each nozzle train are even-numbered nozzle data (Hx-x-DATA-x-EV) and odd-numbered nozzle data (Hx-x-DATA-x-OD). These are
transferred in timing with a data transfer clock (Hx-CLK) and data latch pulses (Hx-LT).
The Heat Enable (Hx-x-HE-x) drive control signal enables inks to be discharged from the nozzles.
1. Pint drive control

Each train of nozzles in a printhead has 2,560 nozzles.
Ink discharge nozzles are selected split in 40-, 20- or 10-nozzle blocks according to the Block Enable information in the even-numbered nozzle data and odd-num-
bered nozzle data.
Each selected block of nozzles is impressed with a Heat Enable signal generated with variable pulse widths according to the head rank, head temperature and printer
temperature for optimized ink discharges. The nozzles are driven by heater boards in the nozzles to discharge inks. Optimal nozzle blocks are selected according
to the print path.
The diagram below illustrates the relationship between a 40-block nozzle and nozzles driven.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1213 1415 1617 1819 2021 2223 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 Block No.
0
Printhead nozzle No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
2559
The pattern is repeated until 2560 nozzles is reached.
F-2-3
2-3
Chapter 2
2. Print drive timing

Each printhead houses 12 trains of nozzles, which share the same data transfer clock (Hx-CLK) and data latch pulses (Hx-LT).
Even-numbered nozzle data (Hx-x-DATA-x-EV), odd-numbered nozzle data (Hx-x-DATA-x-OD) and the Heat Enable (Hx-x-HE-x) signal are generated for each
nozzle train and controlled individually.
Printing is carried out in two ways through reciprocating motion of the carriage.
An encoder sensor mounted on the carriage generates a 150-dpi-pitched linear scale detection signal (ENCODER_A) and a signal (ENCODER_B) shifted 120 de-
grees in phase. The direction of carriage motion is detected from the status of the ENCODER_B signal relative to the leading edge of the ENCODER_A signal.
The printhead is driven using a 2400-dpi timing signal (internal signal), which is generated by dividing the ENCODER_A signal detected at the 150 dpi timing into
16 equal sections.
Printing in the forward direction is triggered at the leading edge of the detection signal (ENCODER_A).
Printing in the backward direction is carried out the same way as printing in the forward direction but at the trailing edge of the detection signal (ENCODER_A),
when the order of heated nozzles is reversed depending on the sequence of transfer of even-numbered nozzle data and odd-numbered nozzle data.
150dpi
Linear scale
ENCODER_A
ENCODER_B
2400dpi
Internal signal
2400dpi
H0_CLK
H0_A_DATA_0_EV Data of block 0 Data of block 2 Data of block 4 Data of block 22
H0_A_DATA_1_EV Data of block 0 Data of block 2 Data of block 4 Data of block 22
H0_A_DATA_0_OD Data of block 0 Data of block 2 Data of block 4 Data of block 22
H0_A_DATA_1_OD Data of block 0 Data of block 2 Data of block 4 Data of block 22
H0_LT
H0_A_HE_1
Low active
F-2-4
2-4
Chapter 2
2.2 Firmware
2.2.1 Operation Sequence at Power-on

0012-6493
Shown below is the flowchart of the initialization sequence from the moment the power is turned on to the moment the printer enters the online state. The time
required for initialization is less than 1 minute*.
* This time does not include the time required for supplying ink and cleaning which takes place after the printer has been left unused for an extended period of time.
Power Button ON
- Initialization of software
Device/resource - Initialization of various devices
initialization
- Engine startup status check

Engine status check
- Previous power-off status check,etc.
- Printhead installation status check

Printhead/ - Ink tank installation status check
ink tank check - EEPROM check
- Cassette pick-up unit initialization

Media feed system - Roll feed unit initialization
initialization - Roll feed unit initialization
- Sensor check
- Recovery system return to origin

Recovery system - Sensor check
initialization
- Carriage motor return to origin

Carriage position
initialization
Remaining ink level detection/

Waste ink level detection
Power-on
automatic recovery operation
Capping
Waiting for print operation

F-2-5
2-5
Chapter 2
2.2.2 Operation Sequence at Power-off

0012-6494
Turning off the power cuts off the voltage to all drive systems. At this time, the firmware starts the power-off sequence as shown below.
This printer immediately suspends all operations in progress and stops whenever the power cord is unplugged or a cover such as the top cover is opened. In this
case, the printer may stop without capping the print head. If the power was turned on by unplugging the power cord, plug the power cord into the outlet, turn on the
power again so that the printer enters the online or offline state, and then press the Power button to turn off the power.
Hold down for at least once second

Power button OFF
If media remains,it is ejected even

Media ejection
when printing is in progress.
Power-off automatic recovery
Capping
Sensor system power OFF
Writing to EEPROM
Backup of various data
Power-off
F-2-6
2-6
Chapter 2
2.2.3 Print Control

0019-6089
1. Print mode
This printer is capable of fast, high-quality printing without blur and non-uniform density by changing the carriage operation, media feeding, other printing methods
according to the selected media type, print quality, print data and so on.
Printing is performed for each color using a maximum of 16 paths in each print mode according to the selected print quality.
This reduces density irregularities caused by the variation in the amounts of ink discharged from individual nozzles. In addition, it shifts the printing timing so that
the current ink layer is nearly fixed before the next ink layer is applied, thus minimizing bleeding.
Even in the same mode, the printer operates in a different way depending on the media setting made using the printer driver.
a) Draft mode
In the draft mode, image data is thinned out and a single band (equivalent to the width of a nozzle array) is printed using one or two paths.
To use this mode, select "Draft" under "Print Quality" in the printer driver.
b) Standard mode
In the standard mode, a single band (equivalent to the width of a nozzle array) is printed using 4-8 (4, 6, or 8) paths.
To use this mode, select "Standard" under "Print Quality" in the printer driver.
c) High quality mode
In the high quality mode, a single band is printed using 8 or 12 paths.
To use this mode, select "High" under "Print Quality" in the printer driver.
d) Highest quality mode

In the high quality mode, a single band is printed using 12 or 16 paths.
To use this mode, select "Highest" under "Print Quality" in the printer driver.
2-7
Chapter 2
Printing Modes
2-8
Chapter 2
2-9
Chapter 2
Plain Paper/ Plain Paper Office Standard 1 or 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Recycled Paper Document
Line Draft 1 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Document/ Standard 1 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Text
Plain Paper (High Office Standard 1 or 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Quality) Document
Text
Plain Paper (High Grade) Office Standard 1 or 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Document
Text
All Plain Paper_Conserve Office Standard 1 or 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
MBK Document
Text
Economy Bond Paper Office Standard 1 or 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Document
Text
Universal Bond Paper Office Standard 1 or 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Document
Text
Standard Paper 1569B Office Standard 1 or 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
80g Document
Text
Standard Paper 1570B Office Standard 1 or 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
90g Document
Text
2-10
Chapter 2
Coated Paper Coated Paper Line Draft 1 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
Document/ Standard 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
Text
Heavyweight Coated Line Draft 1 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
Paper Document/ Standard 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
Text
Extra Heavyweight Line Draft 1 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
Coated Paper Document/ Standard 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
Text
Recycled Coated Paper Line Draft 1 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
Text
High Resolution Paper Line Draft 1 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
Text
Premium Matte Paper Line Draft 1 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
Text
Matte Photo Paper Line Draft 1 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
Text
Colored Coated Paper Image Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
2-11
Chapter 2
Photo Paper Premium Coated Paper Line Draft 1 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
Text
LightWeight Coated Line Draft 1 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
Paper J80270 90g Document/ Standard 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
Text
High Resolution Barrier Line Draft 1 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
Paper 180g Document/ Standard 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
Text
Matt Coated Paper 9171 Line Draft 1 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
120g Document/ Standard 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
Text
Extra Matt Coated Paper Line Draft 1 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
7215 180g Document/ Standard 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
Text
Opaque Paper White Line Draft 1 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
Text
Matt Coated Paper 140g Line Draft 1 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
Text
Photo Realistic Paper Line Draft 1 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
Text
LightWeight Coated Line Draft 1 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
Paper J80270 90g Document/ Standard 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
Text
Glossy Photo Paper Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
Semi-Glossy Photo Paper Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
Photo Paper Plus Semi- Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
Gloss High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 BK
Photo Paper Pro Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
2-12
Chapter 2
Proofing Paper Proofing Paper Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
Professional Proof and Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
Photo Glossy 195g High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 BK
Photo Semiglossy 195g High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 BK
Photo Semigloss 255g High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 BK
Synthetic Synthetic Paper Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
Adhesive Synthetic Paper Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
Board POP Board Image Standard 4 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Adhesive Matt High Resolution Graphic Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
Paper Paper Self ADH High 8 Bi-directional 2400x1200 BK
CAD CAD Tracing Paper Line Draft 1 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Text
CAD Translucent Matte Line Draft 1 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Film Document/ Standard 2 Bi-directional 1200x1200 MBK
Text
Special Special 1 Image Standard 6 Bi-directional 1200x1200 BK
2-13
Chapter 2
2.2.4 Print Position Adjustment Function

0012-6313
This printer supports a print position adjustment for the vertical and horizontal print positions, the bidirectional print position of the printhead mounted on the car-
riage, and the feedrate.
There are two adjustment modes for the print: automatic adjustment, in which print position adjustment patterns printed are detected by the multi sensor attached
to the lower left part of the carriage, and manual adjustment, in which print position adjustment patterns that are slightly modified from one another are printed, so
that visually verified adjustment values can be set from the operation panel.
To execute the print position adjustments, 10-inches size or larger roll media or two sheets of A4/LTR-size or larger cut sheet are needed. However, in case of A2-
size or larger cut sheet, one sheet is needed.
The print position adjustment function is executed by the following menu.
[Set./Adj. Menu]
[Adjust Printer] [Head Posi. Adj.] [Auto(Standard)]
[Auto(Advanced)]
[Manual]*4
[Head Inc. Adj.]
[Feed Priority] [Adj. Priority] [Automatic]*
[Print Quality]
[Print Length]
[Adj. Quality]*5 [Auto(GenuinePpr)]
[Auto(OtherPaper)]
[Manual]
[Adjust Length]*6 [AdjustmentPrint] [A:High]
[B:Standard/Draft]
[Change Settings] [A:High]
[B:Standard/Draft]
2.2.5 Head Management

0012-6499
This printer has a nozzle check function to detect any non-discharging nozzle. When a non-discharging nozzle is detected, the printer performs the print head clean-
ing operation. If the problem persists after completion of the print head cleaning operation, the non-discharged nozzles are automatically backed up by other nozzles.
2.2.6 Printhead Overheating Protection Control

0012-6501
This printer performs printhead overheating protection control when an abnormally high temperature is detected in the printhead.
The printhead can overheat, for instance, when the print operation continues for some time with no ink supplied to the nozzles.
The overheating protection control function prevents a printhead nozzle from becoming clogged or damaged due to excessive heat.
Overheating protection control is performed based on the temperatures detected by the head temperature sensors in the nozzle arrays. If overheating is detected in
a single nozzle array, overheating protection control is performed at either of the following levels according to the temperature.
Protection level 1:
If the printhead temperature sensor detects a temperature above the limit, the carriage stops at the scan end position printer in the direction of travel according to
the carriage's scan status.
Then, wait control is performed to allow the printhead to cool naturally. When the printhead temperature drops below the prescribed value or 30 seconds have lapsed
since detection of the abnormal temperature, printing resumes.
Protection level 2:
When the head temperature sensor detects an abnormally high temperature, printing stops immediately, the carriage is moved to the home position, and the printhead
is capped. In this case, an error code is shown on the display.
2.2.7 Pause between Pages

0012-6502
To prevent ink blots form forming, this printer has a "pause between pages" function to hang down the printed paper from the platen to dry it and delivers it after
lapse of the specified wait time.
The user can set the wait time using the printer drive. This function is particularly useful for printing on film-type sheets that requires extra long time to dry.
For borderless printing, 30 seconds of drying time is automatically set.
2.2.8 White Raster Skip

0012-6504
To improve the printing throughput, this printer has a white raster skip function to skip the carriage scan operation for continuous blank segments in print data.
2.2.9 Sleep Mode

0012-6505
This printer has a Sleep mode to reduce the standby power.

The printer automatically enters the Sleep mode (Power Save mode) when neither user operation nor data reception occurs for a preset period of time in the online
or offline mode.
The printer wakes from the Sleep mode when the user presses any button on the operation panel or data is received from the host computer.
The time until the printer enters the Sleep mode can be changed from the operation panel. (Default: 5 minutes)
2-14
Chapter 2
2.3 Printer Mechanical System
2.3.1 Outline
2.3.1.1 Outline
0019-6095
The printer mechanism can be broadly divided into two major components: the ink passage and paper path.
The ink passage consists of the ink tank, the carriage unit having the printhead, the purge unit. and the maintenance cartridge unit which are used to supply, circulate,
and suck ink.
The paper path consists of the roll feed unit, paper feed unit to support three types of media feeding, transport, and ejection.
This section provides an overview of these mechanical components.
Printhead
Carriage unit
Ink tank unit

Pinch roller
Feed roller
Ink tube
Purge unit
F-2-7
2-15
Chapter 2
2.3.2 Ink Passage

2.3.2.1 Ink Passage
2.3.2.1.1 Overview of Ink Passage
0017-4721
The ink passage consists of ink tanks, printhead, cap, waste ink collection unit, ink tubes for connecting the mechanical components, and an ink suction pump which
is operated to suck ink. These components are used to supply, circulate, and suck ink.
A schematic diagram of the ink passage (for one color) and the ink flow are shown below.
Mechanical Drive Unit

Carriage unit
Ink flow
Joint
Ink tank
Agitation plate Printhead
Needle
Needle (ink supply)
(air passage) Suction pump
Ink supply
valve
Cap
Air passage Sub buffer

Waste glycerin
Absorbent material
under the ink tank unit
Absorbent material under the purge unit
Waste ink from cap for suction and capping
F-2-8
a) Ink supply from ink tank to ink supply valve
The ink tank contains ink to be supplied to the printhead.
Ink flow from the ink tank to the ink tank supply valve due to the fluid level difference.
b) Ink flow from ink tank to sub-buffer

Ink flows from the ink tank to the sub-buffer due to the fluid level difference, and air enters the ink tank through the air passage of the sub-buffer, maintaining the
pressure inside the ink tank constant.
If the ink in the sub-buffer exceeds the predetermined level, the excessive ink flows to the absorbent material under the ink tank.
c) Ink supply from ink supply valve to printhead

Ink is supplied from the ink tank to the printhead by opening the ink supply valve, capping the head, and operating the suction pump.
The ink sucked from the caps flows to the maintenance cartridge.
d) Ink supply during printing

During printing, the ink supply valve is held open to allow ink to flow from the ink tank to the printhead constantly due to the negative pressure generated by dis-
charging of ink.
The waste ink used for printhead cleaning and borderless printing flows to the waste ink absorbent materials under the maintenance cartridge in addition to the waste
ink box.
If all of ink passages are opened (no ink tank is installed, the ink supply valve is opened, and the printhead fixer lever is opened) when the ink tube is filled with
ink, the ink in the ink tube may reverse-flow due to the fluid level difference and ink may leak from the hollow needle of the ink tank.
Do not open all of the ink passages at the same time when the ink tube is filled with ink.
e) Agitation of ink in the ink tank

Ink in the ink tank is agitated to prevent precipitation of pigment-based ink in the ink tank.
This function is implemented by reverse-flowing ink to the ink tank by opening and closing the supply valve in succession. Inside the ink tank is provided with an
agitation plate to assist agitation of ink. (The agitation plate is also provided in the dye ink tank.)
- Operation timing: When a new ink tank is installed or when 168 hours have lapsed since the previous agitation (the agitation is performed irrespective of the
condition whether the printer is printing or cleaning its printhead.)
- Ink supply valve opening/closing count: 30 times (every 30 seconds)
If 336 or more hours have lapsed, the ink valve opening/closing count and the time until the next agitation are changed according to the length of the tame lapsed.
2-16
Chapter 2
2.3.2.2 Ink Tank Unit

2.3.2.2.1 Structure of Ink Tank Unit
0013-5200
a) Ink tank
Each ink tank contains 130 ml of ink (the starter ink tank supplied with the printer contains 90 ml of ink) for each color. The amount of ink is memorized in the
EEPROM mounted to the ink tank.
The amount of the ink remaining in the ink tank is detected as a dot count according to the data memorized in the EEPROM.
When the electrodes mounted to the hollow needle detect a con-conductive state, a message appears on the display to indicate that the ink is nearly empty. If the
dot count reaches the prescribed value, the ink tank is considered to be empty.
b) Ink port
When the ink tank lock lever is pressed down, the hollow needle enters the ink port (covered with a rubber plug), establishing an ink passage between the printer
and ink tank.
c) Air passage
When the ink tank lever of the printer is pressed down, the hollow needle enters the air passage (covered with a rubber plug) and thus the internal pressure of the
ink tank is released, maintaining the internal pressure constant.
d) Notches for preventing incorrect insertion

The ink tanks have notches for preventing insertion. Wrong ink tanks cannot be installed in place due to these notches.
The ink tank lock lever can lowered to start ink supply only when the ink tank has been installed in place.
e) Agitation plate
The agitation plate assists the ink agitation which is performed to prevent precipitation of ink.
Notches for preventing

Notches for preventing incorrect installation
incorrect installation
Ink port Air passage
EEPROM Agitation plate
Notches for preventing

incorrect installation
Ink tank
F-2-9
2-17
Chapter 2
f) Ink supply valve

The ink supply valve is located between the ink tank and ink tube to prevent ink leakage from occurring when the ink tube on the ink tank side is opened during
replacement of the ink tank.
The ink supply valve is opened and closed by the valve open/close mechanism which is driven by the valve motor.
The ink tank unit consists of two tank bases each of which contains ink tanks for three colors and the ink tubes for six colors.
The ink supply valve for each color is driven by the valve cam though a link. Ink supply valves for all colors are opened and closed at the same time.
Valve cam
Valve motor
Linkage Valve open/closed detection sensor
Linkage
Ink supply valve

F-2-10
2-18
Chapter 2
2.3.2.3 Carriage Unit

2.3.2.3.1 Functions of Carriage Unit
0013-4834
a) Printhead mounting function

The carriage mechanically locks the printhead and is connected to the printhead via the terminals on the carriage PCB.
b) Control function
The carriage incorporates a carriage PCB that relays the signal from the main controller, a linear encoder that generates a print timing signal based on the detected
carriage position, and a multi sensor that detects the media width and skewing to adjust the registration and height.
The carriage PCB and main controller PCB are connected with a flexible cable.
c) Carriage drive function

The carriage motor moves the carriage back and forth on the platen via the carriage belt.
d) Printhead maintenance function

The printer performs the printhead cleaning operation such as printhead wiping and suction at the home position of the carriage.
e) Nozzle check function

The printer detects a non-discharging nozzle using the head management sensor attached to the maintenance jet tray by discharging ink with the carriage stopped
at the maintenance jet tray.
f) Media thickness adjustment function

If the gap between the printhead face and the media increases due to the difference in media thickness, cockling, curling, and so on, more ink mist is generated. In
reverse, if the gap decreases, the head can touch the media surface more frequently.
To maintain the proper gap, the remote lifter is driven to adjust the head height automatically according to the selected media type, media supply method, printing
conditions (borderless/priority print type), environmental conditions (temperature/humidity), and the result of measurement by the multi sensor.
The relationship between media types and head heights (from the platen) is summarized in the table below. Note that the head height is adjusted with priority given
to the media gap measured by the multi sensor.
T-2-1
Head height (mm) Media type (Value in parentheses:mm)
1.4 Glossy paper(0.2),plain paper(line drawing)(0.1)
1.8 Plain paper(0.1)
2 Coated paper(0.5)
2.2 Semi-glossy canvas(0.5)
3.2 Board paper(1.5)
g) Paper leading edge detection function/paper width detection function/skewing detection function
The leading edge, width, and skewing of the paper fed to the platen is detected by the multi sensor mounted at the lower left of the carriage.
h) Auto printing position adjustment function

The adjustment pattern printed on paper is read by the multi sensor mounted at the lower left of the carriage, thus adjusting the printing timings of each printhead
automatically.
i) Remaining roll media detection function

The amount of the remaining roll paper can be detected using the multi sensor mounted at the lower left of the carriage by printing a barcode at delivery of the roll
media.
j) Internal temperature detection function

The internal temperature around the printhead is detected using the thermistor mounted on the carriage PCB.
2-19
Chapter 2
2.3.2.3.2 Structure of Carriage Unit

0013-4891
a) Printhead mounting unit

The printhead is secured to the carriage by the printhead fixer lever.
When the printhead is secured to the carriage, the signal contact of the carriage PCB touches the signal contact point of the printhead, allowing print signals to be
transmitted.
The ink passage from the ink tank is connected to the printhead through the ink tube and joint.
Printhead fixer cover

Printhead fixer lever
Joint for ink supply

Terminal
Carriage motor
Carriage
Ink tube
F-2-11
b) Ink port
Ink is supplied to the printhead through the ink tubes.
Ink tube run through the ink tube guide mounted on the carriage and move in conjunction with the carriage.
c) Control unit
The carriage PCB is connected to the main controller PCB with a flexible cable. The flexible cable moves in conjunction with the carriage.
A photo-coupler-type encoder is mounted at the top of the rear of the carriage to detect the slit on the linear scale during carriage movement, thus controlling the
print timing.
d) Carriage drive unit

Mechanical misalignment of the printhead in the vertical and horizontal direction and in bidirectional printing can be corrected by changing the print timing using
the "Adjust Printer" option in the Main menu.
The carriage motor (DC motor) moves the carriage back and forth on the platen via the carriage belt.
The carriage home position is the capping position to which the carriage is slowly moved when the power is turned on.
When the position read on the linear scale is set as the home position for position control, the carriage motor moves based on control signal output from the main
controller.
2-20
Chapter 2
Carriage PCB
Linear encoder
Shaft cleaner
Multi sensor
Multi sensor reference plate Shaft cleaner
Linear scale
Carriage height changing cam
Head management sensor unit
Lift cam sensor
Lift motor
F-2-12
e) Printhead maintenance unit
The printer performs the printhead cleaning operation at the home position of the carriage.
The purge motor is used for wiping. When the carriage is stationary at the home position, the printhead installed in the carriage is wiped with the wiper blade. The
wiper blade is pressed against the absorbent material soaked with glycerin so that the wiper blade is moistened with glycerin, thus improving the wiping perform-
ance.
Idle ejection of ink is performed on the cap, the borderless ink tray of the platen, and paper.
The suction operation is performed by rotating the pump motor after completion of capping.
f) Media thickness adjustment unit

The gap between the printhead face and media is changed with the rotation of the carriage height changing cam driven by the lift motor.
The height of the printhead is detected by the multi sensor mounted at the lower left of the carriage.
g) Multi sensor unit

The multi sensor mounted at the lower left of the carriage is composed of four LEDs (red, blue, green, infrared) and two light-sensitive elements which are used to
detect the leading edge, width, and skewing of paper and adjust the registration and head height.
The multi sensor reference plate is provided with a white plate. By measuring the quantity of the reflected light from the white plate, the reference value for gap
measurement is computed.
(Service mode: SERVICE MODE>ADJUST>GAP CALIB)
h) Shaft cleaner units

The shaft cleaners mounted at the left and right of the carriage are used to clean the carriage and apply oil to the shaft.
i) Internal temperature detection

A themistor for measuring the internal temperature is mounted on the carriage PCB on the rear of the head holder.
2-21
Chapter 2
2.3.2.4 Printhead
2.3.2.4.1 Structure of Printhead
0013-4821
A printhead incorporates six nozzle arrays. Each nozzle can be controlled individually so that a six-color discharge action can be performed by a single printhead.
a) Nozzle arrays
A total of 2560 nozzles are arranged in a two-column staggered pattern.
In each column, 1280 nozzles are arranged in a staggered pattern at intervals of 600 dpi, forming a 2560-nozzle arranged at intervals of 1200 dpi.
1
1/1200inch
0
2
1278
1279 2559
F-2-13
b) Nozzle structure
Ink supplied from the ink tank is filtered by a mesh ink filter, and the supplied to the nozzles.
Ink is supplied from the shared ink chamber to the nozzles. When the head driving current is applied to the nozzle heater, ink boils and form bubbles so that ink
droplets are discharged from the nozzles.
Resin
Sillicon plate
Heater Heater
Shared ink chamber
F-2-14
2-22
Chapter 2
2.3.2.5 Purge Unit

2.3.2.5.1 Functions of Purge Unit
0013-5334
To maintain high print quality, the purge unit performs maintenance of the nozzles of the printhead.
The purge unit supports a capping function, cleaning function, and ink supply function.
a) Capping function
The capping function presses the cap of the purge unit against the face plate on the nozzle section of the printhead to prevent nozzle drying and dust adhesion.
Capping is performed when printing is complete, at the start of the suction operation, and when switching to the standby state due to an error.
The capping function also establishes the ink passage between the printhead and purge unit.
b) Cleaning function
The cleaning function restores the printhead to the state where ink can be easily discharged from nozzles. This function includes the following three types of oper-
ations.
- Wiping operation
This operation is performed to remove paper fibers and dried ink from the face plate.
- Pumping operation
This operation is performed to remove ink from the nozzles and fill the nozzles with fresh ink.
- Maintenance jet operation

This operation is performed to spray ink from the nozzles to the cap, the borderless ink jet tray, and on paper to remove bubbles in the nozzles and dust and other
foreign particles.
c) Ink supply function

The suction pump of the purge unit operates together with the ink supply valve to supply ink to the printhead during the initial filling and ink level adjustment.
Details of the cleaning function are shown in the table below.
Name of Service mode or

Cleaning mode PRINT INF Operation Description of cleaning
(Name of Main Menu)
Cleaning 1 CLN-A-1/CLN-M-1 Normal cleaning Removes dried ink from nozzles, thick ink accumulated on the
(Head Cleaning A) face, and paper particles.
Cleaning 2 CLN-A-2 Ink level adjustment and cleaning Adjust the ink level in the head by suction, and then performs
normal cleaning.
Cleaning 3 CLN-A-3 Initial filling ink Fills the empty tube (during initial installation) with ink, and
then performs normal cleaning.
Cleaning 4 CLN-M-4 Ink drainage for head replacement Drains ink to replace the head (drains only the ink in the head).
(Replace P.head)
Cleaning 5 CLN-M-5 Ink drainage for secondary transport Drains ink from the head and tube for secondary transport.
(Move Printer)
Cleaning 6 CLN-A-6/CLN-M-6 Normal (strong) cleaning Performs suction stronger than when adjusting the ink filling
(Head Cleaning B) amount in the head or normal cleaning to unclog nozzles.
Cleaning 7 CLN-A-7 Aging Performs idle ejection after replacement of the head.
Cleaning 10 CLN-A-10 Ink filling after secondary transport Fills the empty tube (during installation after secondary
(Move Printer) transport) with ink, and performs normal cleaning.
Cleaning 11 CLN-A-11 Ink filling after head replacement Performs normal cleaning after head replacement and ink
filling.
Cleaning 15 CLN-A-15 Dot count suction Performs suction to remove ink adhered to dried nozzles and
thick ink accumulated on the face when the dot count reaches
the prescribed value.
Cleaning 16 CLN-A-16 Precipitated ink agitation Performs the agitation (ink supply valve open/close) operation
to prevent the ink ingredient from precipitating.
Cleaning 17 CLN-A-17 Cleaning (weak) Performs cleaning weaker than normal cleaning to unclog
nozzles.
2-23
Chapter 2
Cleaning operation timings are as follows.
Ink consumption
Printer status Cleaning operation
(typ.)*1
Standby At least 960 to 2880 hours elapsed since the last session of Cleaning 2, 3, 6 or 10 (360 hours after Cleaning 6 (Normal 5g
initial installation) (strong) Cleaning)
At initial installation and 96 hours elapsed since the last session of Cleaning 16 Cleaning 16 -
(Precipitated ink
agitation)
1 hour elapsed capped with a specified number of dots discharged per chip completed after last Wiping + Idle ejection 0.013g
wiping
Power-on At initial installation Cleaning 3 (initial filling 15g
ink)
Both heads and inks The print operation has completed. 168 to 720 hours elapsed capped Cleaning 1 (Normal 1g
available Cleaning)
At least 960 to 2880 hours elapsed Cleaning 6 (Normal 5g
since the last session of Cleaning 2, (strong) Cleaning)
3, 6 or 10 (360 hours after initial
installation)
At least 96 hours elapsed since the Cleaning 16 -
last session of Cleaning 16 (Precipitated ink
agitation)
At least 1 hour elapsed capped with Wiping + Idle ejection 0.013g
a specified number of dots
discharged per chip completed after
last wiping
Print operation aborted (uncapped) Up to 72 hours elapsed after an Cleaning 1 (Normal 1g
and CR error occurring abort Cleaning)
Over 72 hours elapsed after an abort Cleaning 6 (Normal 5g
(strong) Cleaning)
Print operation aborted (uncapped) and no CR error occurring Cleaning 11 (ink filling 10g
after head replacement)
No heads are available Cleaning 10 (ink filling 15g
on secondary transport)
Power off Specified number of dots discharged per chip completed since the last session of wiping Wiping + Idle ejection 0.013g
Before the Less than 168 hours elapsed capped Idle ejection 0.013g
start of Before printing in the wake of an error occurrence Cleaning 1 (Normal 1g
printing Cleaning)
Printing Before scanning while printing Idle ejection (+Wiping) - (0.013g)
After the end A specified number of dots (color) discharged per chip since the last session of Cleaning 2, 3, 6 or 1 Cleaning 6 (Normal 5g
of printing (strong) Cleaning)
A specified number of dots discharged per chip after the last session of wiping Wiping + Idle ejection 0.013g
3 minutes elapsed since the last session of capping Wiping + Idle ejection 0.013g
Total 2 hours elapsed uncapped since the last session of Cleaning 1, 2, 3, 6 or 10 Cleaning 1 (Normal 1g
Cleaning)
When the Manual Cleaning (Head Cleaning A) Cleaning 1 (Normal 1g
Head Cleaning)
Cleaning Manual cleaning (Head cleaning B) Cleaning 6 (Normal 5g
menu choice (strong) Cleaning)
is executed
When the After head replacement Cleaning 4 (ink drainage 20g
Replace Print for head replacement) +
Head menu Cleaning 11 (ink filling
choice is after head replacement)
executed
When the After the Move Printer menu choice is executed Cleaning 5 (ink drainage 10g
Move Printer for secondary transport)
menu choice After power-on at secondary installation After power-on at 25g
is executed secondary installation
*1: Quantities of ink consumption by nozzle train
2-24
Chapter 2
2.3.2.5.2 Structure of Purge Unit

0013-4307
Purge unit
F-2-15
a) Cap unit
The cap unit is used to cap the print head nozzles during capping and cleaning. The portion that touches the face plate is made from rubber. Two caps are arranged
for the printhead (six arrays of nozzles) installed in the carriage.
During cleaning, the caps used for both suction and capping are used to suck ink from the printhead using the suction pump.
During capping, the caps are raised by the cap cams operated by the purge motor to cover the arrays when the carriage has moved to the home position, thus pro-
tecting the nozzles.
Carriage lockpin
Cap
Pump cam sensor

Glycerin tank
Purge motor
Pump encoder sensor
F-2-16
2-25
Chapter 2
b) Wiper unit
The wiper unit operated by the purge motor wipes the print head face.
The printer is provided with a pair of wiper blades for better wiping performance.
The wiping operation is performed by a "slide wipe" method by which the purge motor rotates (in the normal direction) to slide the wiper blade via the wiper cam.
It is performed by a constant-speed movement toward the front of the printer as viewed from the printer front.
The wiper blade, which is positioned at right angles to the print head, wipes the entire printhead face, and then the narrow blade is used to wipe the nozzle arrays.
After wiping, the wipe blades are cleaned before they are set at the wiping position so that the maximum wiping performance is obtained.
During the wiper blade cleaning, the ink removed form the head is rubbed off by the in scraper.
Absorbent material soaked with glycerin is pressed against the wiper blades to enhance the wiping performance. The amount of glycerin used (tank capacity: 50
ml) is managed by counting the number of times the wiper blade is pressed against the absorbent material. When this count reaches to the specified values, either
a replacement warning (continued print available) or replacement required indication (service call error) is issued.
Ink scraper
Glycerin absorbent material Printhead
Glycerin tank Wiper blade
Blade holder
Wiper cam
Cap
F-2-17
c) Pump unit
This printer uses tube pumps (suction pumps) that press on the ink tubes using rollers to produce negative pressure, thus sucking ink.
Two rollers are used to press on a single tube one after another to control the amount of ink sucked.
The roller rotation timing is detected by the pump cam sensor, and the amount of rotation is controlled by the driving of the purge motor.
Cap
Suction pump Pump unit Pump cam sensor
Cap
Push rollers Ink tubes
Purge motor
Pump encoder sensor
To maintenance cartridge.
F-2-18
2-26
Chapter 2
2.3.2.6 Maintenance Cartridge

2.3.2.6.1 Maintenance Cartridge
0013-4160
a) Maintenance cartridge
The maintenance cartridge can store waste ink.
b) Detection of waste ink in maintenance cartridge

The quantity of waste ink in the maintenance cartridge is measured by counting dots.
When the quantity of waste ink collected in the maintenance cartridge reaches 80% of the cartridge capacity, a warning message "MTCart Full Soon" appears to
indicate that the maintenance cartridge is nearly full.
If printing is continued, an error message "Maint Cartridge Replace Cart" appears to indicate that the maintenance cartridge is full.
When this error occurs, the printer judges the maintenance cartridge as being full of waste ink and stops printing immediately. The printer stops even if printing is
in progress, and it will not operate until the maintenance cartridge is replaced with a new one.
MEMO:
The maintenance cartridge houses EEPROM, so that main controller PCB can control the status of the maintenance cartridge by writing to and reading from the
EEPROM content.
There is no need to initialize the counter information, therefore, when the maintenance cartridge is replaced.
Maintenance Cartridge
F-2-19
2-27
Chapter 2
2.3.2.7 Air Flow

2.3.2.7.1 Air flow
0013-4162
This printer has two fans, a mist fan used to collect mist and a suction fan used to suck media onto the platen.
Ink mist that floats inside the printer and ink splashes from the media are collected in the filter through the front duct and the air flow path inside the printer by the
driving of the mist fan, thus preventing mist from discharged outside the printer.
Fan filter
Mist fan
F-2-20
During operation of the suction fan, suspended substances are collected in the filter through the airflow path inside the printer, preventing them from being emitted
to outside of the printer.
Fan filter
Suction fan
F-2-21
2-28
Chapter 2
2.3.3 Paper Path

2.3.3.1 Outline
2.3.3.1.1 Overview of Paper Path
0016-8200
The paper path consist of roll feed unit, feed roller unit, pinch roller drive unit that applies/releases pressure to/from the pinch roller, spur drive unit that moves the
spur up/down, and various sensors that detect the media feed status, allowing media to be fed in three ways, fed, and ejected.
Paper detection sensor

Multi sensor
Manually fed cut sheet (top)
Pinch roller
Spur unit
Roll media
Cutter
Manually fed cut

sheet (front)
Roll media
sensor
Eject roller Platen Feed roller

F-2-22
2-29
Chapter 2
2.3.3.2 Paper Path

2.3.3.2.1 Structure of Roll Media Pick-up Unit
0016-8203
When the roll media sensor detects media loaded with the printer powered, the roll media pick-up roller touches the media to rotate the roll media feed roller, thus
feeding the roll media onto the platen. Roll media feeding is controlled by the roll motor and roll feed unit PCB.
The roll media pick-up roller is moved up and down by the cam, and the cam movement is detected by the roll media cam sensor.
When the printer is turned on with roll media loaded, the roll media pick-up operation starts automatically.
Roll cam sensor

Roll feed unit PCB
Roll motor
F-2-23
If the roll media sensor detects that there is no roll during roll media pick-up operation, the roll media is ejected.
Roll Feed Unit
Roll media sensor

F-2-24
2-30
Chapter 2
2.3.3.2.2 Structure of Manual Feed Unit

0019-6101
a) Manual feed (from front)

The cut sheet fed from the front (ejection unit) of the printer is fed to the rear of the printer [1], and then fed onto to platen [2] for printing.
[2]
[1]
F-2-25
This method of feeding paper can be used only when an accept media type is selected from the Manual Feed menu in the use mode. If you select the Manual Feed
menu, the pinch roller unit moves up to allow you to feed paper from the front of the printer according to the message shown on the operation panel.
The pinch roller unit is moved up and down by the lift motor. The cam which is also operated by the lift motor via gears moves up and down the pinch roller.
Lift cam sensor
Lift motor
Cam
Pinch roller unit
F-2-26
2-31
Chapter 2
The pick-up timing of the paper fed to the rear of the printer is controlled by the paper detection sensor.

F-2-27
b) Manual feed (from rear)
The paper loaded in the paper tray provided at the rear of the printer is fed onto the platen for printing.
This method of feeding paper can be used only when an acceptable media type is selected from the Manual Feed menu in the user mode. The pick-up timing of the
paper loaded in the rear paper tray according to the message shown on the operation panel is controlled by the paper detection sensor.

F-2-28
2-32
Chapter 2
2.3.3.2.3 Manual Feed (from Front) Sequence

0013-4174
This sequence can be performed according to the messages shown on the operation panel only when a specific type of media is selected after selecting the manual
feed mode from the menu shown on the operation panel. When a cut sheet is loaded according to the message shown on the operation panel, the printer performs
various adjustments and detection using the multi sensor and then feeds the cut sheet to the rear of the printer. At this time, the multi sensor detects skewed feeding
and leading edge of the cut sheet, thus completing the paper pick-up operation.
During printing, the cut sheet is fed by controlling the rotation of the feed roller according to the selected print mode.
Cut sheet loading

(manual)
Light intensity/
Head hight adjustment
Detection of paper width
Back feed
Detection of skewed movement of paper
End of cut sheet pick-up operation
Printing
F-2-29
2.3.3.2.4 Manual Feed (from Rear) Sequence

0013-4176
This sequence can be performed according to the messages shown on the operation panel only when a specific type of media is selected after selecting the manual
feed mode from the menu shown on the operation panel. When the cut sheet loaded at the back of the printer is detected by the sensor, the printer starts feeding the
cut sheet. After this, the printer performs various adjustments and detection using the multi sensor, thus completing the paper pick-up operation.
During printing, the cut sheet is fed by controlling the rotation of the feed roller according to the selected print mode.
Cut sheet loading

(manual)
Detection of cut sheet *1
Light intensity/
Head hight adjustment
Detection of paper width
Detection of skewed movement of paper
End of cut sheet pick-up operation
Printing
*1
The auto roll feed unit starts feeding the cut sheet when the roll media detection sensor detects the media.
When the auto roll feed unit is not mounted, the printer starts feeding the media when the paper detection
sensor detects the media.
F-2-30
2-33
Chapter 2
2.3.3.2.5 Structure of Feed Roller Unit

0013-4178
The feed roller unit consists of media feeding mechanisms such as feed rollers driven by the feed motor and the pinch roller unit operating in conjunction with the
feed rollers.
While being held flat on the platen, media is fed horizontally under the printhead.
The feed roller unit has a sensor that detects the media feed status and a sensor that detects the status of the mechanisms that constitute the paper path.
feed roller
feed roller encoder sensor
pinch roller
feed motor
feed roller HP sensor
F-2-31
2-34
Chapter 2
2.3.3.2.6 Feed Roller Eccentricity Detection Function

0013-4206
Media are fed by the feed roller at regular intervals.

Irregular feeding of media due to the feed roller eccentricity problem, irregular printing can occur in the media feeding direction periodically.
To prevent this, the feed error encoder and feed roller HP sensor detect the presence and amount of feed roller eccentricity every rotation of the feed roller.
This function is called the feed roller eccentricity detection function. If eccentricity is detected, the media feed mount is compensated for according to the amount
of eccentricity.
feed roller encoder
feed roller HP sensor

F-2-32
Media
Feed roller
Not decentered Decentered
Feed amount
Feed roller Feed roller

once once
F-2-33
2-35
Chapter 2
2.3.3.2.7 Structure of Ejection Spur

0013-4208
a) Outline
The ejection spur unit consists of a spur, a spur motor that moves the spur, a spur cam sensor, and an eject roller.
b) Spur lift mechanism

The spur must be moved up and down according to the selected media type and feed mode. The spur motor and spur cam sensor are used to control the spur stop
position.
- In case of manual feed from front
When the above mode is selected in the user mode, the spur moves to the upper limit position and then stops.
- Stop position depending on media type
To prevent the spur from damaging the media, the spur stops at a proper position according to the media type selected in the user mode.
c) Eject roller drive

The drive power of the eject roller is transmitted from the feed roller via the drive belt.
Feed roller Eject roller
Drive belt
Spur cam sensor
Spur unit Spur motor

F-2-34
2-36
Chapter 2
2.3.3.3 Cutter Unit

2.3.3.3.1 Structure of Cutter unit
0019-6102
If roll media are used, the cutter unit attached on the front of the spur unit cuts the leading end of the media on loading and cuts the media on ejection. Whether to
perform cutting or not is determined by the choice of the main menu and the specifications of the printer driver.
The cutter in the cutter unit stands by at the cutter home position, except when it cuts roll media. Power from the cutter drive motor is imparted to the circular belt
to move the cutter from left to right for cutting roll media.
cutter
cutter right
position sensor cutter motor
Cutter HP sensor
F-2-35
2-37
Chapter 2
2.4 Printer Electrical System
2.4.1 Outline
2.4.1.1 Overview
0019-6103
The printer electrical system consists of the main controller PCB and power supply PCB which are mounted on the left side of the printer, the carriage PCB and
print head which are mounted in the carriage, and other electrical components such as the operation panel, sensors, and motors.
The main controller PCB manages the image data processing and the entire electrical system, and controls relay PCBs and driver functions.
Power supply
Main controller PCB
Maintenance cartridge relay PCB
Roll feed unit PCB
Carriage PCB Operation panel PCB

F-2-36
2-38
Chapter 2
Power supply Main controller PCB
AC inlet +26V generation function IC1501/IC1701

IC1601-IC1603
+21.5V generation function Power supply control function
IC601/IC602
IC603/IC604
BAT801
IC301/IC302
Lithium battery
SDRAM
IC803 IC802
RTC EEPROM
IC1
Host computer
Interface
IC1201 control function
LAN Controller
Carriage PCB
Linear encoder Linear encoder detection function
Head Heat pulse control function

IC1
Image data control function
DI sensor reading
EEPROM
control function
Temperature reading IC701 FLASH ROM

control function
Thermistor IC2
Operation panel control function Operation panel
Multi sensor
IC6/IC7
EEPROM PWM control function Fans
Multi sensor
control function
Remaining ink level
detection function Ink tank ROM PCB
LED control function Maintenance cartridge

relay PCB
EEPROM control function IC1 EEPROM
Sensor detection function Sensors
Roll feed unit PCB

Motor control function
IC1
Motor driver
IC2801/IC2901
IC3001/IC3101 Motors
Motor driver
F-2-37
2-39
Chapter 2
2.4.2 Main Controller
2.4.2.1 Main controller PCB components

0019-6104
IC802 IC803
BAT801
IC302 IC301
IC3101
IC701
IC601
IC602
IC2
IC1
IC603
IC604 IC2801
IC1201
IC2901
IC3001
F-2-38
a) ASIC (IC1/IC2)
The ASIC with a 16-bit internal bus is driven in sync with the 66 MHz external clock. It supports the following functions:
Image processing unit

This unit converts the RGB multi-value image data or CMYK multi-value data received from the host computer through the interface connector to the binary image
data for the ink colors used.
DMA controller
This controller control DMA transfer of the data transferred through the input interfaces such as the USB and expansion card slot as well as DMA transfer of the
data stored in the DIMM.
Image data generation/output function

This function generates image data for color printing from the received image data and the mask pattern (corresponding to print mode) stored in the FLASH ROM,
and stored the generated image data in DIMM. It also outputs the generated image data to the carriage PCB.
Interrupt controller
This controller receives and processes internal interrupts and external interrupts from the USB, image processing unit, and expansion card slot.
Timer function
Even when the printer is turned off, the timer function is held on using the RTC(IC803) and lithium battery(BAT801) to assist the cleaning function.
When the power cord is plugged to the outlet, power is supplied to the RTC and therefore the lithium battery power is not consumed.
Heat Enable signal control function

This function uses the pulse width to perform variable control of the time of application of the Heat Enable signal to the nozzle heater board for each printhead
nozzle array.
Linear scale count function

This function reads the linear scale when the carriage moves, thus generating the ink discharge timing. It also counts the linear scale timing cycle using the reference
clock to measure the carriage moving speed.
Dot count function

This function controls the discharge dots used as the information for Heat Enable signal control, maintenance jet control, cleaning control, and remaining ink level
for each nozzle array.
Operation panel control function
This function controls serial communication with the operation panel.
PWM control function

This function controls driving of the suction fan and mist fan as well as the temperature of the printhead.
Remaining ink level detection function
This function detects the remaining level of each color of ink based on the signal received from the hollow needle mounted in the ink tank unit.
LED control function

This function controls the LEDs on the ink tank unit.
I/O port function

This function controls input signals from sensors.
Power ON/OFF control function

This function controls turning on/off of the drive power (26 V and 21.5 V) supplied from the power supply PCB.
Head DI sensor read control function
2-40
Chapter 2
This function controls read operation by the head DI sensor.
Multi sensor control function

This function controls the LED, adjusts the gain, and controls obtainment of the reading for the multi sensor.
EEPROM control function

This function controls the EEPROMs of individual ink tanks, the maintenance cartridge EEPROM, the EEPROM on the maintenance cartridge relay PCB, and the
head EEPROM in addition to the on-board EEPROM.
Motor control function

This function controls the carriage motor, feed motor, valve motor, spur motor, purge motor, lift motor and cutter motor based on the input signals from sensors.
b) Driver IC (IC3101)
This IC generates a carriage motor control signal based on the control signal from the ASIC.
c) Driver IC (IC2801)
This IC generates feed motor and valve motor control signals based on the control signal from the ASIC.
d) Driver IC (IC2901)
This IC generates purge motor, cutter motor and spur motor control signals based on the control signal from the ASIC.
e) Driver IC (IC3001)
This IC generates a lift motor control signal based on the control signal from the ASIC.
f) DIMMs (IC301,IC302,IC601,IC602,IC603,IC604)
The DIMM comprising a 128-MB DDR-SDRAM and a 128-MB SDR-SDRAM is connected to the 32-bit data bus to be used as a work area.
During print data reception, it is also used as an image buffer.
It cannot be expanded.
g) FLASH ROM (IC701)

A 16-MB flash ROM is connected to the 8-bit data bus to store the printer control program.
h) EEPROM (IC802)
The 128-KB EEPROM stores various setting values, adjustment values, log data, counter values related to the user/servicing.
MEMO:
After replacement of the main controller PCB, the printer must be started up in the service mode to copy over the setting and adjustment values to the new PCB
properly (the service mode will be switched to the PCB replacement mode automatically).
2.4.3 Carriage Relay PCB
2.4.3.1 Carriage PCB components

0013-5072
IC 7 IC 6
IC 1
F-2-39
a) Latch ICs (IC1)
DI sensor reading control function

This function obtains the DI sensor value in the printhead and head rank for each color and sends it to the main controller PCB based on the control signals from
the main controller.
Environmental temperature reading control

This function sends the environmental temperature detected by the thermistor on the board based t the main controller PCB based on the control signals from the
main controller PCB.
Image data relay function

This function relays the image data from the main controller PCB to the printhead.
The function for processing image data is not supported.
b) Multi sensor control ICs (IC6 and IC7)

These ICs are used to generate the multi sensor LED control signal and adjust the gain.
2-41
Chapter 2
2.4.4 Motor Driver
2.4.4.1 Roll feed unit PCB components

0013-4323
IC 1
F-2-40
a) Driver IC (IC1)
Roll motor drive function

This function controls the roll motor based on the control signals from the main controller.
Sensor relay function
This function relays the input signals from the roll cam sensor and roll media sensor to the main controller PCB.
2.4.5 Maintenance Cartridge Relay PCB
2.4.5.1 Maintenance cartridge relay PCB components

0013-5143
IC 1
F-2-41
a) EEPROM (IC1)
The 2KB EEPROM stores all information written to the EEPROM on the main controller PCB.
2.4.6 Power Supply
2.4.6.1 Power supply block diagram

0013-4333
AC inlet
100V to 240V
Operation panel Main controller PCB Power supply
DC power supply +26V

POWER ON Noize filter circuit
control circuit generation circuit
Transformer
+5V/+3.3V +21.5V
generation circuit Rectifying circuit
generation circuit
F-2-42
The power supply converts AC voltages ranging from 100 V to 240 V from the AC inlet to DC voltages for driving the ICs, motor, and others.
The voltage generator circuits include the +26 V generation circuit for driving motors, fans, and sensors and a +21.5 V generator circuit for driving sensors, heads,
logic circuits, and others.
When the power is turned off, +26 V and +21.5 V are reduced to about 12 V and 9 V respectively (power save mode).
Power ON/OFF operation is controlled by the main controller PCB.
2-42
Chapter 2
2.5 Detection Functions with Sensors
2.5.1 Covers
0013-5203
Top cover sensor

Ink tank cover switch
F-2-43
Top cover sensor
The photo-interrupter-type top cover sensors detect opening and closing of the top cover.
When the top cover is closed, the sensor light is shielded by the sensor arm, thus notifying the sensor of closing the cover.
Ink tank cover switch
The micro-switch-type ink tank cover switch detects opening and closing of the ink tank cover.
When the ink tank cover is closed, the protrusion on the ink tank cover presses the switch, thus detecting closing of the ink tank cover.
2-43
Chapter 2
2.5.2 Ink passage system

0013-5204
Purge unit Pump cam sensor
Valve open/closed detection sensor
Pump encoder sensor
Head management sensor
F-2-44
Pump cam sensor
The photo-interrupter-type pump cam sensor detects that the sensor light is shielded or unshielded by the rotary cam. The sensor detects the purge unit capping and
wiping states with the combination of the state detected by the pump cam and the state of pump motor rotation control performed by the pump encoder.
Rotary flag Sensor
- Carriage lock - Capping - Air passage valve open - Printing

- Suction - Idle suction - Suction during printing
- Wiping - Carriage lock - Carriage move - Idle ejection

- Air passage - Idle suction
F-2-45
2-44
Chapter 2
Pump encoder sensor

The pump encoder is a photo-interruptive type sensor. It reads the slits on the pump motor's encoder film to control the amount of pump motor rotation.
Slits
Sensor
F-2-46
Valve open/closed detection sensor
The photo-interrupter-type valve open/closed detection sensor detects the valve cam state.
When the link that operates in conjunction with the valve cam shields light, this sensor detects that the ink supply valve has been opened.
Ink detection sensor

Presence of absence of ink in the ink tank is detected according to whether the two hollow needles are electrically connected.
When the ink level in the ink tank lowers below the wall around the hollow needle at the air passage, this hollow needle is electrically disconnected form the hollow
needle located on the ink supply side, thus detecting that the printer has run out of ink.
Ink tank
Wall
Rubber plug
Needle (ink supply) Needle(air passage)

F-2-47
Head management sensor
The photo-transmission-type sensor detects that the printhead is discharging ink.
The carriage moves to and stops at the detection positions for individual nozzle arrays. When the carriage is at a stop, nozzles discharge ink on after another.
The sensor detects each nozzle due to the voltage change caused when ink discharged from the nozzle blocks the sensor light.
Non-discharging nozzle detection is carried out at the following timings:

- After the execution of Cleaning 1, Cleaning 2, Cleaning 3, Cleaning 6 or Cleaning 10
- After the number of copies that has been set by the user menu choice Nozzle Check Frequency have been printed
If more than a specified number of non-discharging nozzles have been located in one session of non-discharging nozzle detection, the normal cleaning sequence is
launched before a second session of non-discharging nozzle detection is conducted. If more than a specified number of non-discharging nozzles are located in the
second session of non-discharging nozzle detection, the normal (High) cleaning session is launched before a third session of non-discharging nozzle detection is
conducted.
If 30 or more non-discharging nozzles and less than 100 non-discharging nozzles per train are located as a result of the third session of non-discharging nozzle
detection, the print operation can resume after the message display as needed. If 100 or more non-discharging nozzles are located, a head replacement prompt
message is displayed.
Printhead
Nozzle unit
Head management
sensor unit
F-2-48
2-45
Chapter 2
2.5.3 Carriage system

0013-5205
Linear encoder sensor
Multi sensor
Lift cam sensor
F-2-49
Multi sensor
The photo-reflection-type multi sensor is composed of four LEDs (red, blue, green and infrared) and two light-sensitive sensors. It detects the leading edge, skewing,
and width of media and is used for adjustment of the registration, and head height.
During head adjustment, the light reflected by the infrared LED and green LED is detected by two light-sensitive sensors to calculate the head height from the
difference between the measurements.
LED(blue) LED(green) LED(red)
Infrared sensor Infrared LED
Media
Platen
F-2-50
Service mode: After SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > GAP CALIB. has been carried out, pass paper to make sure that it is detected properly.
Linear encoder sensor

When the carriage moves, the linear encoder located at the rear of the carriage reads the slits on the linear encoder to detect the carriage position.
Lift cam sensor

This is a photo-interrupter-type sensor. The lift motor is driven by a predetermined number of pulses received after blocking of the sensor light by the flag, thus
controlling the heights of the head and platen.
Environmental temperature sensor

The environmental temperature sensor installed on the carriage PCB detects the temperature around the carriage.
The resistance of the thermistor that changes with the temperature inside the printer is reported to the main controller via the carriage PCB.
The environmental temperature is used to calibrate the head sensor and to detect abnormal head temperatures.
Head temperature sensor

The diode-type head temperature sensors installed at the top and bottom of the printhead nozzle unit are used to detect the head temperature.
2-46
Chapter 2
The diode voltage that changes with the nozzle unit temperature is reported to the main controller via the carriage PCB.
The detected head temperature is used to control the head operation and to detect abnormal head temperatures.
Printhead contact detection

The printhead contact status is detected by testing the electrical conductivity.
It is detected according to the voltage changes at the two terminals of the contact faces, power supply terminals, and GND terminal.
2.5.4 Paper path system

0019-6112
Spur cam sensor
Cutter HP sensor
Cutter right position

sensor
F-2-51
This is a photo-interrupter-type sensor. When paper is supplied from the paper tray, or roll feed unit, the sensor light is blocked by the sensor arm, thus detecting
paper.
Spur cam sensor

This is a photo-interrupter-type sensor.
When the sensor light is shielded by the rotation of the spur motor, the printer detects that the spur unit is at the upper-limit position.
When the sensor light is unshielded by the rotation of the spur motor, the printer detects that the spur unit is at the bottom position.
The spur height is controlled by driving the spur motor with a predetermined number of pulses.
Cutter HP sensor
This is a photo-interrupter-type sensor. This sensor detects that the cutter is at the home position (left end).
2-47
Cutter right position sensor
This is a photo-interrupter-type sensor. This sensor detects that the cutter is at the right end.
Feed roller encoder sensor

F-2-52
The feed roller HP sensor detects the change from the white portion (unshielded sensor light) to black portion (shielded sensor light) of the encoder film
on the feed roller, thus setting the home position for feed roller eccentricity compensation.
Feed roller encoder sensor

The feed roller encoder sensor detects the slits on the encoder film of the feed roller during feed motor rotation, thus detecting the amount of rotation of
the feed roller (media feed amount).
Roll cam sensor
Roll media sensor
F-2-53
Roll media sensor
This is a photo-interrupter-type sensor. When media is loaded, the sensor arm blocks the sensor light, thus detecting the media.
Roll cam sensor
This is a photo-interrupter-type sensor. When the roll cam blocks the sensor light, lowering of the transport roller (contact with the roller) is detected.
2.5.5 Others
0013-5249
Temperature/humidity sensor
F-2-54
Temperature/humidity sensor
This sensor detects the temperature and humidity around the printer so that the measured values are used for head height adjustment, idle discharge control,
waste ink evaporation amount calculation, and suction fan control.
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION
Contents
Contents
3.1 Installation......................................................................................................................................................................3-1
3.1.1 Making Pre-Checks...................................................................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1.1 Making Pre-Checks.........................................................................................................................................................................................3-1
3.1.2 Unpacking and Installation .......................................................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2.1 Unpacking and Installation .............................................................................................................................................................................3-1
3.1.2.2 Installing the Stand..........................................................................................................................................................................................3-9
3.1.3 Checking the Images/Operations ............................................................................................................................................... 3-18
3.1.3.1 Checking the Image and Operation...............................................................................................................................................................3-18
3.2 Transporting the Printer ...............................................................................................................................................3-19
3.2.1 Transporting the Printer ............................................................................................................................................................. 3-19
3.2.1.1 Transporting the Printer ................................................................................................................................................................................3-19
3.2.2 Reinstalling the Printer .............................................................................................................................................................. 3-21
3.2.2.1 Reinstalling the Printer..................................................................................................................................................................................3-21
Chapter 3
3.1 Installation
3.1.1 Making Pre-Checks
3.1.1.1 Making Pre-Checks

0019-6113
Package dimensions and weight are as follows.

Main body (with a palette): 1140 (W) mm x 914 (D) mm x 645 (H) mm, Approx. 69 kg
+300mm
+300mm
+150mm
+800mm
+150mm
F-3-1
Installation space
Main body only: 1297 (W) mm x 1770 (D) mm x 644 (H) mm
Main body with stand: 1297 (W) mm x 1993 (D) mm x 1293 (H) mm
When printing from the Front Paper Feed Slot, leave at least 1,300 mm (51.2 in) of unobstructed space in front of the printer and 700 mm (27.6 in) behind it.
3.1.2 Unpacking and Installation
3.1.2.1 Unpacking and Installation

0019-6167
The printer must be moved with it held by three or more persons on both sides. Be careful not to get your lower back and other regions hurt.
F-3-2
When moving the printer, grasp the carrying handles [1] on the left and right side of the bottom.
Holding other portions can drop the printer and you may be injured.
[1] [1]
F-3-3
3-1
Chapter 3
(1) Check to see that none of the accessories is missing.
[1] [2] [3] [4]
[5]
[6] [7] [8] [9]
F-3-4
[1] Printer
[2] Power Cord
[3] Printhead
[4] Sample paper
[5] Roll Holder Set
[6] Starter ink tanks
[7] Cleaning brush
[8] Reference Guides
[9] CD-ROM
3-2
Chapter 3
(2) Unpack the printer and remove the packaging material.
F-3-5
(3) Grasaping the carrying handles [1] on the left and right side of the bottom, place the printer on a level place such as a table.
[1] [1]
F-3-6
(4) The Roll Feed Unit [1] is preinstalled on the printer. Peel away the tape and remove the Roll Holder [2] and protective material from the Roll Feed Unit. Also
remove the tape on the two Holder Stoppers attached to the Roll Holder, and then remove the Holder Stoppers from the Roll Holder.
[2]
[1]
F-3-7
(5) Remove the tape and other packaging material used to secure the printer and accessories. Remove the tape and protective material on the Top Cover [1] and
Ejection Guide [2]. After removing the tape and protective material on the Ejection Guide, reinstall it.
[1]
[2]
F-3-8
3-3
Chapter 3
(6) Lift the Belt Stopper [2] of the Carriage Shaft [1] and pull it forward to remove it.
[2] [1] [3]
F-3-9
MEMO:
- You will need the Belt Stopper if you move the printer to another location. Do not discard the Belt Stopper you have removed.
- When you open the Top Cover, you will find a Cleaning Brush [3] on the right side. Use this brush to clean inside the Top Cover.
(7) Plug the power cord into the Power Socket on the back of the printer.
F-3-10
(8) Plug the power cord into the outlet.
F-3-11
(9) Set the printhead.
Press the Power botton to power on the printer.
OK
F-3-12
(10) When Open Top Cover is displayed on the Display Screen, open the Top Cover.
F-3-13
3-4
Chapter 3
(11) Pull the Printhead Fixer Lever forward to open it completely.
F-3-14
(12) Pull up the Printhead Fixer Cover to open it completely.
F-3-15
(13) Holding the Printhead by the grips [1], remove it from the pouch.
[1]
[1]
F-3-16
- When handling the Printhead, always hold it by the grips [1].

- Never touch the printhead nozzles [2] or the metal contacts [3]. The printhead can damage or a printing failure can occur.
[2]
[3] [1]
F-3-17
(14) Remove the orange Safety Cap 1 [1]. While pushing the grip [3] of Safety Cap 2 [2], pull the cap down to remove it.
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
F-3-18
3-5
Chapter 3
- Never touch the ink supply section [4]. This may cause printing problems.
- The Printhead is filled with ink. When removing Safety Cap 1 [1] and Satety Cap 2 [2], be careful not to spill it.
- Do not reattach the protective material after removing it. Dispose of these materials according to local regulations.
(15) With the nozzles facing down and the metal contacts toward the back, insert the Printhead into the Carriage. Carefully push the Printhead firmly into the Car-
riage, ensuring that the nozzles and metal contacts do not touch the Carriage.
F-3-19
(16) Pull the Printhead Fixer Cover down toward the front to lock the Printhead in place.
F-3-20
(17) Push the Printhead Fixer Lever toward the back of the printer until it clicks.
F-3-21
(18) Close the Top Cover.
F-3-22
(19) Open the ink tank cover according to the message shown on the display.
F-3-23
3-6
Chapter 3
(20) Press the tip of the Ink Tank Lock Lever of the color for installation and open the Ink Tank Lock Lever.
F-3-24
(21) Before removing the Ink Tank from the pouch, shake it gently seven or eight times. Agitate the ink in the Ink Tank by rotating your wrist to turn the Ink Tank
upside-down and right side up repeatedly.
F-3-25
(22) Open the pouch and remove the Ink Tank.
F-3-26
- Never touch the ink port [1] and contacts [2]. The peripheral parts may be stained, the ink tank may be broken, or a printing failure may occur.
[1]
[2]
F-3-27
- Becareful not to drop the ink tank once it is unpacked. The leaked ink may stain the peripheral area.
- Do not remove and shake the ink once it is installed. Ink may spatter.
(23) Insert the Ink Tank into the holder facing as shown, with the ink holes down.
F-3-28
3-7
Chapter 3
(24) Close the Ink Tank Lock Lever until it clicks. Make sure the Ink Lamp is lit in red.
F-3-29
(25) Repeat steps (20)-(24) to install all Ink Tanks.
(26) Close the Ink Tank Cover.
F-3-30
(27) After all Printheads and Ink Tanks are installed, Keep Cover Closed is shown on the Display Screen. The system now automatically fills with ink. This process
takes about 8 minutes.
MEMO:
- Initial ink filling performed at printer installation consumes ink beween the ink tanks and printhead.
- The ink level indicators may drop to 80% immediately, but this does not indicate a problem with the printer.
3-8
Chapter 3
3.1.2.2 Installing the Stand

0016-8538
Stand assembly requires two or more people.
a. Package Contents
[1] [2] [3]
L R
[4]
[5]
[6] [7] [8] [9]
[10] [11] [12] [13] [14]
[15] [16] [17] [18] [19]
F-3-31
[1] Stand L
[2] Stand R
[3] Stand Stay
[4] Output Stacker
[5] Stand Board
[6] Basket Bolts (2pcs.)
[7] Basket Decorative Nuts (2pcs.)
[8] Basket Rod #1 (2pcs.)
[9] Basket Rod #2
[10] Basket Rod #3
[11] Support Rod
[12] Basket Arm (2pcs.)
[13] Basket Rod Caps (2pcs.)
[14] Main Unit Securing Bolts (long, 4pcs.)
[15] Table Bolts (short, 4pcs.)
[16] Allen Wrench
[17] Wrench
[18] Accessory Box
[19] Velcro Tape
3-9
Chapter 3
b. Assembling the Stand
(1) Position the Stand L [1] and Stand R [2] so that the Basket Fasteners are on the front, facing out.
L
R
[1]
[2]
F-3-32
(2) Hold the Stand Stay [1] with the surface marked "R" facing back. Insert it fully into the grooves of the Stand L [2] and Stand R [3] until it stops.
[2]
[1]
[3]
F-3-33
Be careful not to put your fingers between the Stand Stay fixtures and the groove of Stand.
F-3-34
3-10
Chapter 3
(3) To secure the Stand Stay [2], use the M10 side of the Wrench [1] to tighten hex nuts in four positions on the top and bottom of both sides.
[2]
[1]
F-3-35
(4) Put the Stand Board [1] on the Stand, aligning the right side of the Stand Board [2] with the right side of the Stand [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-3-36
Be careful not to pinch your fingers between the Stand Board and Stand.
(5) To secure the Stand Board [3] to the Stand, use the Allen Wrench [1] to tighten the four short Table Bolts [2] in the order shown.
[1]
[2] [3]
4 2
3 1
[2]
F-3-37
3-11
Chapter 3
c. Assembling the Output Stacker
(1) Insert Basket Rod #1 [1] in the Basket Fastener so that the hole [2] of Basket Rod #1 and the hole [3] of the Basket Fastener on the right are aligned and the
Support Rod Holder [4] faces up.
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-3-38
(2) Insert Basket Bolts [2] into the hole of Basket Fastener, fitting the head of Basket Bolts [3] in the hole of Basket Fastener [1].
[3]
[1]
[2]
F-3-39
(3) Use Basket Decorative Nuts [2] to secure the Basket Bolts [1].
[1]
[2]
F-3-40
3-12
Chapter 3
(4) As in steps 1 to 3, insert Basket Rod #1 [1] in the Basket Fastener on the left so that the Support Rod Holder faces up. Secure it with Basket Bolts [2] and Basket
Decorative Nuts [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-3-41
(5) Hang the hooks of the top of the Basket Arms [1] over the grooves [3] on the top of the Stand Stay [2], and hang the hooks of the bottom of the Basket Arms
on the bottom of the Stand Stay.
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-3-42
(6) Spread out the Output Stacker [2] so that the white tag [1] is face-down in the front right corner. Insert Basket Rod #2 [4] in the front hole [3] of the Output
Stacker and Basket Rod #3 [6] in the hole [5] in the middle of the Output Stacker on the bottom surface.
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-3-43
3-13
Chapter 3
(7) Insert Basket Rod Caps [1] on both ends of Basket Rod #2 [2] until they cover the lines [3].
[1] [3] [2]

[2] [1]
[3]
F-3-44
(8) Insert Basket Rod Caps [2] on both ends of Basket Rod #1 [1] until they cover the lines [3].
[2]
[1]
[3]
F-3-45
(9) Insert Basket Rod #3 [1] in the holder groove [3] on the bottom of the Basket Arm [2].
[2]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[1] [3]
F-3-46
3-14
Chapter 3
(10) Hang the holes [2] in the back of the Output Stacker [1] on both sides over the hooks [4] on the top of the Basket Arms [3], and then hang the loops [5] in the
middle of the Output Stacker on both sides over the hooks [6] in the middle of the Basket Arms.
[2] [4]
[1]
[3]
[3]
[5]
[6]
[1]
F-3-47
(11) Insert the Support Rod [1] in the insertion slot [2] of the Support Rod Holder. Passing it through the bottom of the Output Stacker, insert it in the Support Rod
Holder on the opposite side. Normally, use the stacker in this position.
[2]
[1]
F-3-48
3-15
Chapter 3
d. Installing the Printer
- Moving the printer requires at least three people. Be careful to avoid back strain and other injuries.
F-3-49
- When moving the printer, grasp the carrying handles [1] on the left and right side of the bottom.
Holding other portions can drop the printer and you may be injured.
[1] [1]
F-3-50
(1) Move the Stand into position and make sure the front casters are locked.
F-3-51
(2) With three people holding the printer carrying handles, align the symbol on the back of the printer with the symbol on the back of the Stand Board [1]
as you set the printer down on the Stand.
[1]
F-3-52
3-16
Chapter 3
(3) To secure the printer to the stand, use the provided Allen Wrench [2] to tighten the two long Main Unit Securing Bolts [1] firmly on either side from under the
printer.
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-3-53
(4) Assemble the Accessory Box [1] and use the Velcro Tape [2] to attach it to the Stand.
[2]
[1]
F-3-54
3-17
Chapter 3
3.1.3 Checking the Images/Operations
3.1.3.1 Checking the Image and Operation

0013-4090
Do the paper set and the driver installation, and do the test print.
3-18
Chapter 3
3.2 Transporting the Printer
3.2.1 Transporting the Printer
3.2.1.1 Transporting the Printer

0016-8588
This subsection describes how to transport the printer.

When moving the printer to another place on the same floor of the building, move it slowly so that it does not receive any shocks. Follow the steps shown in "1.
Moving the printer on the same floor having no step or storing at customer's warehouse for a short period of time as temporary storage".
When moving it elsewhere, follow the steps shown in "2. Moving the printer on the floor having the steps, or moving the printer by using stairs or elevator, or
transporting by plane or ship or others, or transporting when the atmospheric pressure or temperature change".
When transporting the printer, the printhead must be capped and stay in the carriage.
In spite of this precaution, shocks incurred during transportation can damage the printhead.
Print the nozzle check pattern before making preparations for transporting the printer, pint the nozzle check pattern again after installing the printer at the new lo-
cation, and then compare the two printouts.
If any problem such as nozzle clogging cannot be resolved by printhead cleaning, replace the printhead with a new one.
1. Moving the printer on the same floor having no step or storing at customer's warehouse for a short period of time as temporary storage
Item Description
[Move Printer] on the Main menu This need not be performed.
Allowed tilting angle -15 to +15 degrees for all directions
Procedure
(1) Turn off the Power button on the printer and check that the head is capped.
(2) Open the top cover and mount the belt stopper.
When mounting the belt stopper, be careful not to move the carriage by applying too much pressure to the carriage. If the carriage moves with the head capped, the
rubber part of the cap may touch the nozzles on the head and damage the printhead.
(3) Close the upper cover.

(4) Remove the roll holder from the roll holder slot.
(5) Remove the interface cable, power cord from the printer.
(6) Hold the carrying handles at the bottom, and then slowly move the printer.
If the printer is subjected to strong vibrations when it is moved, it can cause ink leakage and damage to the printhead. Be sure to move the printer slowly and care-
fully.
2. Moving the printer on the floor having the steps, or moving the printer by using stairs or elevator, or transporting by plane or ship or others, or trans-
porting when the atmospheric pressure or temperature change
Item Description
[Move Printer] on the Main menu This need be performed.
Allowed tilting angle -15 to +15 degrees for all directions
Procedure
(1) Turn on the Power button on the printer.
(2) Remove the media.
(4) Enter the Main menu, and then select "Maintenance" > "Move Printer". Remove all ink tanks following the displayed messages.
Put the removed ink tanks in the plastic bag with the ink port up and close the opening. It takes about 4 minutes to complete the "Move Printer" operation.
- "Move Printer" cannot be selected when "MT Cartridge Full Soon" is displayed. In this case, replace the maintenance cartridge first.
- If the consumable parts counter is checked and a message to replace consumable parts appear, check the consumable parts counter from service mode and replace
the necessary consumable parts. After replacing the consumable parts and resetting the counter of service mode, perform the steps again. Refer to "SERVICE
MODE" > "Details of Service Mode" > "PARTS CNT." and "MAINTENANCE" > "Consumable Parts" > "Consumable Parts".
- Never disconnect the power cord or open any cover while the "Move Printer" operation is in progress since this can cancel the operation. If the "Move Printer"
operation is canceled while in progress, the printer will remain in the offline mode and will not return to the online mode. The "Ink Filling" operation is performed
when the power is turned back on after canceling, so repeat the "Move Printer" operation from the beginning.
- The "Move Printer" operation will drain about 38 g of ink per color from the printer to the maintenance cartridge.
(5) When the "Move Printer" operation is completed, turn off the Power button.
(6) Open the top cover to check that the head is capped, and then secure the carriage with the belt stopper.
(7) Close the top cover.
(8) Disconnect the interface cable and power cord from the printer.
(9) Attach the cushioning materials and tape.
(10) If the printer is mounted on a stand, remove the printer from the stand.
(11) Pack the printer in the packing box, and then put the roll media, ink tank, and optional devices in another packing box for moving.
Use the original packing materials for the printer and other optional devices. If they are not available, pack them with a sufficient amount of cushioning materials.
3. Transportation procedure when the printer is not operating properly
3-19
Chapter 3
To prevent the waste ink from leaking, remove the maintenance cartridge after draining the ink. Package the removed maintenance cartridge so that the waste ink
does not leak.
(1) Make sure that the printer is turned off.

(2) Disconnect the interface cable and power cord from the printer.
(4) Drain ink from the printer. (Refer to "DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY" > "Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly" > "Draining the Ink")
(5) Manually cap the printhead. (Refer to "4. Manual capping")
Manual capping is an emergency measure used when the printer does not operate properly, so it can damage the printhead.
(6) Remove the maintenance cartridge, and then package it so that waste ink does not leak.
Check that waste ink is no longer leaking after removing the maintenance cartridge. If it is leaking, install the maintenance cartridge and wait until waste ink no
longer leaks.
(7) Attach all external covers.

(8) Open the top cover, and then secure the carriage with the belt stopper.
(9) Close the top cover.
(10) Attach the cushioning materials and tape.
(11) If the printer is mounted on a stand, remove the printer from the stand.
(12) Pack the printer in the packing box, and then put the roll media, ink tank, and optional devices in another packing box for moving.
Use the original packing materials for the printer and other optional devices. If they are not available, pack them with a sufficient amount of cushioning materials.
4. Manual capping
When transporting the printer, cap the Printhead to protect the nozzles from drying out and to keep them clean. Follow the procedures described below:
(1) While referring to "DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY" > "Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly" > "Opening the caps and releasing the carriage lock
pins", open all of the caps.
(2) Move the carriage to the home position.
(3) While referring to "DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY" > "Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly" > "Opening the caps and releasing the carriage lock
pins", perform the capping.
Manual capping is an emergency measure when the printer does not operate. Manual capping can damage the printhead.
3-20
Chapter 3
3.2.2 Reinstalling the Printer
3.2.2.1 Reinstalling the Printer

0013-4210
1. When installing the printer after moving it on the same floor having no step
If you have moved the printer to the installation site on the same floor having no step without draining ink, check the operation test pattern.
2. When installing the printer after moving it on the same floor having a step(s)
If you have moved the printer to the installation site on the same floor having a step(s) with ink drained, install it again in the same manner as that for initial instal-
lation after reception of the delivered printer.
(1) Unpack the printer.

(2) Remove the cushioning materials and tape from the printer.
(3) Install the maintenance cartridge.
(4) Remove the belt stopper.
(5) Connect the power cord.
(6) Turn on the Power button and install ink tanks according to the displayed messages.
Ink filling will starts.
Load paper and check for normal operation.
3-21
Chapter 4 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY
Contents
Contents
4.1 Service Parts...................................................................................................................................................................4-1

4.1.1 Service Parts................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-1
4.2 Disassembly/Reassembly...............................................................................................................................................4-2
4.2.1 Disassembly/Reassembly............................................................................................................................................................. 4-2
4.3 Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly ...........................................................................................................4-2
4.3.1 Note: Items that should never be disassembled ........................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.3.2 Moving the carriage manually ..................................................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.3.3 Units requiring draining of ink .................................................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.3.4 External Covers............................................................................................................................................................................ 4-3
4.3.5 Drive Unit .................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-17
4.3.6 Cutter.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-18
4.3.7 Carriage Unit.............................................................................................................................................................................. 4-21
4.3.8 Feeder Unit................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-29
4.3.9 Roll Feed Unit............................................................................................................................................................................ 4-32
4.3.10 Purge Unit ................................................................................................................................................................................ 4-35
4.3.11 Waste Ink Collection Unit ....................................................................................................................................................... 4-38
4.3.12 Ink Tank Unit ........................................................................................................................................................................... 4-42
4.3.13 Head Management Sensor ....................................................................................................................................................... 4-45
4.3.14 Multi Sensor............................................................................................................................................................................. 4-46
4.3.15 PCBs ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 4-47
4.3.16 Opening the Cap/Moving the Wiper Unit................................................................................................................................ 4-51
4.3.17 Opening/Closing the Ink Supply Valve ................................................................................................................................... 4-53
4.3.18 Draining the Ink ....................................................................................................................................................................... 4-54
4.4 Applying the Grease.....................................................................................................................................................4-55
4.4.1 Applying the Grease .................................................................................................................................................................. 4-55
4.5 Adjustment and Setup Items ........................................................................................................................................4-59
4.5.1 Adjustment Item List ................................................................................................................................................................. 4-59
4.5.2 Procedure after Replacing the Carriage Unit or Multi Sensor ................................................................................................... 4-59
4.5.3 Procedure after Replacing the Head Management Sensor......................................................................................................... 4-62
Chapter 4
4.1 Service Parts
4.1.1 Service Parts

0012-6347
The service parts indicated below require careful handling.
1. Keep all packages with the warning not to turn over.

Pay careful attention to all individually packaged service part (carriage unit, purge unit, ink tank unit, and other parts) boxes marked "This side up" and handle
appropriately.
F-4-1
4-1
Chapter 4
4.2 Disassembly/Reassembly
4.2.1 Disassembly/Reassembly
0016-9450
For the procedure for disassembly/reassembly of the components excluding the major components, refer to the parts catalog.
Illustrations in the parts catalog are assigned illustration numbers according to the order in which parts are disassembled.
4.3 Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly
4.3.1 Note: Items that should never be disassembled

0012-6349
Assemblies that should never be removed after initial factory adjustments, are indicated by the presence of red screws.
Under no circumstance should these red screws be loosened or removed. Removing these screws will render the printer out of alignment forever.
F-4-2
4.3.2 Moving the carriage manually

0012-6350
Move the carriage as required during disassembly/reassembly to prevent the carriage form contacting the parts to be removed.
The carriage does not move when capped. When uncapping moving the carriage, refer to the procedures in DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY>Points to Note on
Disassembly and Reassembly>Opening the Cap/Moving the Wiper Unit.
4.3.3 Units requiring draining of ink

0013-5095
When disassembling the following units, drain the ink completely, to prevent ink leakage. For ink drain instructions, refer to DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY >
Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly > Draining the Ink.
[1] Carriage unit

Refer to DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly > Carriage Unit.
[2] Ink tank unit
Refer to DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink Tank Unit.
[1]
[2]
F-4-3
4-2
Chapter 4
4.3.4 External Covers

0019-6233
a) Left/right circle cover

Removing the left/right circle cover
1) When removing the left circle cover [1], turn it in the direction of the arrow.
[1]
F-4-4
2) When removing the right circle cover [1], turn it in the direction of the arrow.
[1]
F-4-5
4-3
Chapter 4
Attaching the left/right circle cover

1) When attaching the left circle cover, fit it in place with the three hooks [1] up and turn it toward the rear side of the printer. When attaching the right circle cover,
fit it in place with the two hooks [2] up and turn it toward the rear side of the printer.
[1]
[2]
F-4-6
b) Roll Feed Unit
Removing the roll feed unit
1) Remove two coin screws [1] to remove roll feed unit [2].
[2]
[1]
F-4-7
4-4
Chapter 4
c) Tank cover
Removing the tank cover
1) When removing the tank cover [4], open the top cover, and then remove the roll feed unit and left circle cover.
2) Open the tank cover [4], remove the three screws [1], and then release the three hooks [2] to remove the tank cover [4] while opening the hook [3] outward.
[1]
[4]
[3] [2]
F-4-8
d) Left cover
Removing the left cover
1) When removing the left cover [3], open the top cover, and then remove the roll feed unit, left circle cover and tank cover.
2) Remove the screw [1] and the hook [2], and slide the left cover in the direction of arrow 2, and then slide it in the direction of arrow 3 to remove the left cover [3].
[3]
3
2
[1] [2]
F-4-9
4-5
Chapter 4
e) Output guide
Removing the output guide
1) To remove the output guide [2], pull it by holding the handles [1].
[2]
[1]
F-4-10
f) Lower rear left cover
Removing the lower rear left cover
1) When removing the lower rear left cover [2], remove the roll feed unit.
2) Remove the screw [1] to remove the lower rear left cover[2].
[2]
[1]
F-4-11
4-6
Chapter 4
g) Lower rear cover

Removing the lower rear cover
1) When removing the lower rear cover [2], remove the roll feed unit and lower rear left cover.
2) Remove the two screws [1] to remove the lower rear cover [2].
[2]
[1]
F-4-12
h) Left rear cover
Removing the left rear cover
1) When removing the left rear cover [2], open the top cover, and then remove the roll feed unit, left circle cover, tank cover, left cover, lower rear cover, and lower
rear left cover.
2) Remove the three screws [1], and then remove the left rear cover [2].
[2]
[1]
F-4-13
4-7
Chapter 4
i) Left front cover

Removing the left front cover
1) When removing the left front cover [2], open the top cover, and then remove the roll feed unit, left circle cover, tank cover, left cover, and output guide.
2) Remove the three screws [1], and then remove the left front cover[2].
[2]
[1]
F-4-14
j) Right upper cover
Removing the right upper cover
1) When removing the right upper cover [2], open the top cover, and then remove the right circle cover.
2) Release the two hooks [1], and then remove the right upper cover [2].
[1] [2]
F-4-15
k) Operation panel
Removing the operation panel
1) When removing the operation panel [4], open the top cover, and then remove the right circle cover and right upper cover.
2) Remove the two hooks [1] and flexible cable [2] and earth cable [3], and then remove the operation panel [4].
[4] [1] [3] [2] [1]
F-4-16
4-8
Chapter 4
l) Exhaust Filter
Removing the exhaust filter
1) When removing the filter cover [1], push it in the direction of the arrow while pressing on the handhold.
[1]
F-4-17
2) Remove the exhaust filter [2] while pushing the hook [1].
[1]
[2]
F-4-18
m) Mist filter
Removing the mist filter
1) When removing the mist filter [2], open the top cover, and then remove the right circle cover.
2) Removing the screw [1], and then remove the mist filter [2].
[2]
[1]
F-4-19
4-9
Chapter 4
n) Right cover
Removing the right cover
1) When removing the right cover [3], open the top cover, and then remove the roll feed unit, right circle cover, right upper cover, operation panel, mist filter, exhaust
filter, and lower rear cover.
2) Remove the six screws [1] and the hook [2], and then remove the right cover [3].
[1]
[3]
[1]
[2]
F-4-20
Note on attaching the right cover
Be careful in attaching the right cover not to press the ink tubes with the edges of the cover.
F-4-21
o) Right front cover
Removing the right front cover
1) When removing the right front cover [2], open the top cover, and then remove the roll feed unit, output guide, right circle cover, operation panel, exhaust filter,
right cover, and lower rear cover.
2) Remove the two screws [1], and then remove the right front cover [2].
[1]
[2] [1]
F-4-22
4-10
Chapter 4
p) Rear cover
Removing the rear cover
1) When removing the rear cover [2], open the top cover, and then remove the roll feed unit, left circle cover, tank cover, left circle cover, right upper cover, oper-
ation panel, exhaust filter, right cover, lower rear cover, left cover, and left rear cover.
2) Remove the three screws [1], and then remove the rear cover [2].
[2]
[1]
F-4-23
q) Upper rear cover
Removing the upper rear cover
1) When removing the upper rear cover [2], open the top cover, and then remove the roll feed unit, left circle cover, tank cover, left cover, right circle cover, right
upper cover, operation panel, exhaust filter, right cover, and lower rear cover.
2) Remove the three screws [1], and then remove the upper rear cover [2].
[1]
[1] [2]
F-4-24
4-11
Chapter 4
Note on attaching upper rear cover

In attaching the upper rear cover, allow flexible cable [1] in the control area to pass over the cover.
[1]
F-4-25
r) Upper front cover
Removing the upper front cover
1) When removing the upper front cover [3], open the top cover, and then remove left circle cover, tank cover, left cover, right circle cover, right upper cover,
operation panel, right cover, and exhaust filter.
2) Remove the two screws [1], and then remove the upper front cover [3] while releasing the three hooks [2].
[1]
[2] [3]
F-4-26
4-12
Chapter 4
s) Lower front cover

Removing the lower front cover
1) When removing the lower front cover[2], open the top cover, and then remove the roll feed unit, left circle cover, tank cover, right circle cover, right upper cover,
operation panel, upper front cover, right cover, and exhaust filter.
2) Remove the three screws [1] and release the harness to remove the lower front cover [2].
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-4-27
t) Left back cover
Removing the left back cover
1) When removing the left back cover [1], open the top cover, and then remove the roll feed unit, left circle cover, tank cover, left cover, lower rear cover, lower
rear left cover, and left rear cover.
2) Remove the two screws [2], and then remove the left back cover [1].
[2]
[1]
F-4-28
4-13
Chapter 4
u) Back cover
Removing the back cover
1) When removing the back cover [1], open the top cover, and then remove the roll feed unit, left circle cover, tank cover, left cover, lower rear cover, lower rear
left cover, left rear cover, and left back cover.
2) Remove the two screws [2] and two hooks [3], and then remove the back cover [1].
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-4-29
v) Lower back cover
Removing the lower back cover
1) When removing the lower back cover [2], open the top cover, and then remove the roll feed unit, left circle cover, tank cover, left cover, lower rear cover, lower
rear left cover, left rear cover, right circle cover, right upper cover, operation panel, exhaust filter, and right cover.
2) Remove the two screws [1], and then remove the lower back cover [2].
[1]
[2]
F-4-30
4-14
Chapter 4
w) Cover guide
Removing the cover guide
1) When removing the cover guide [2], open the top cover, and then remove the roll feed unit, left circle cover, tank cover, left cover, right circle cover, right upper
cover, operation panel, exhaust filter, lower rear cover, lower rear left cover, left lower cover, rear cover, upper rear cover, upper front cover.
2) Remove the two screws [1], and then remove the cover guide [2].
[1]
[2]
F-4-31
x) Cover support plate (right)
Removing cover support plate (right)
1) When removing the cover support plate (right) [2], open the top cover, and then remove the roll feed unit, left circle cover, tank cover, left cover, right circle
cover, right upper cover, operation panel, exhaust filter, right cover, lower rear cover, left rear cover, rear cover, upper rear cover, upper front cover, and cover guide.
2) Remove the three screws [1], and then remove the cover support plate (right) [2].
[2] [1]
[1]
F-4-32
4-15
Chapter 4
y) Cover support plate (left)

Removing the cover support plate (left)
1) When removing the cover support plate (left) [2], open the top cover, and then remove the roll feed unit, left circle cover, tank cover, left front cover, left cover,
right circle cover, right upper cover, operation panel, exhaust filter, right cover, lower rear cover, rear cover, upper rear cover, upper front cover, and lower front
cover.
2) Remove the three screws [1] and two connectors [3], and then remove the cover support plate (left) [2].
[1]
[2]
[2]
[3]
F-4-33
4-16
Chapter 4
4.3.5 Drive Unit

0012-6368
a) Feed motor
Removing the feed motor
1) When removing the feed motor [1], remove the main controller support plate.
Refer to DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly > PCBs
2) Remove the two screws [1], spring [2], belt [3] and the pulley [4], and then disconnect the connector [5] to remove the feed motor [6].
[5]
[3]
[1]
[6] [2] [4]

F-4-34
Note on mounting the feed motor

When mounting the feed motor [1], engage the timing belt [3] to the pulley [4] and attach the spring [2], and then tighten the two screws [1].
4-17
Chapter 4
4.3.6 Cutter
0016-8468
a) Removing the Cutter

1) Perform service mode: [SERVICE MODE] > [REPLACE] > [CUTTER] and then choose [YES] to move the cutter to the replacement place.
2) Remove two screws [1] to remove the cutter [2].
[2]
[1]
F-4-35
MEMO:
After replacing the cutter, obey the message that displayed on the LCD to initialize the parts counter information. Then, the cutter moves to home position auto-
matically.
4-18
Chapter 4
b) Removing the cutter unit

1) When removing the cutter unit, open the top cover, and then remove the roll feed unit, output guide, left and right circle covers, tank cover, left front cover, right
upper cover, operation panel, exhaust filter, lower rear cover, right cover, right front cover, upper front cover, lower front cover. Refer to DISASSEMBLY/REAS-
SEMBLY > Points to note on Disassembly and Reassembly > External Covers.
2) Turning the motor pulley[1] in the arrow direction, move the cutter[2] about 2cm to the right of the left most end.
[1]
[2]
F-4-36
3) Remove the screw[1] and clamp[2] and slide cutter unit[3] to left obliquely upward out of position.
[2]
[1] [3]
F-4-37
4-19
Chapter 4
c) Points to note on Disassembly an Reassembly of Cutter unit

1) When disassembling or reassembling the cutter unit, align the cutter unit roller with the grooves[1] in the cutter lifter unit and cutter drive unit.
[1] [1]
F-4-38
d) Removing the cutter mounting plate
1) Remove the cutter unit.
2) Remove the two screws[1] and connector[2] and free the harness from harness guide[3] to remove the cutter mounting plate[4].
[2] [4] [3]
[1]
F-4-39
e) Removing the cutter drive unit
1) Remove the cutter unit.
2) Remove the two screws[1] and two connectors[2] and free the harness from harness guide [3] to remove the cutter drive unit[4].
[3]
[2]
[1]
[4]
F-4-40
4-20
Chapter 4
4.3.7 Carriage Unit

0017-5630
a) Removing the carriage unit

1) Drain the ink.
Refer to DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly > Draining the Ink.
2) Turn off the power, and then move the carriage over the platen.
Refer to DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly > Opening the Cap/Moving the Wiper Unit.
3) Remove the printhead.
4) Remove the joint of the ink tube unit. Wrap the removed joint with a plastic bag or other covering so that ink does not splashes, then close the plastic bag.
F-4-41
5) Remove the linear scale [1] from the right clamp plate's spring, and then remove it rightward.
[1]
F-4-42
When removing the linear scale, take care not to damage or stain it. The stained or damaged liner plate can cause malfunction.
6) While sliding the pulley [2] to the left, remove the carriage belt [1]. Tie the removed belt lightly on the unit.
[2]
[1]
F-4-43
4-21
Chapter 4
7) Disconnect the connector [1] and two connectors [2] of the flexible cables on the main controller PCB.
[1]
[2]
F-4-44
The flexible cable connectors [2] are provided with a locking mechanism. When disconnecting or reconnecting the flexible cable, be sure to release the lock. Oth-
erwise, the flexible cable can damage, resulting in malfunction.
8) Insert the flat-head screwdriver [3] into the part shown to release the hook [2] and then remove the flexible cable retainer [1]. (If flexible cable retainer [1] is
marked with index[A], insert the flat-head screw driver to meet the index.)
[2]
[1]
[A]
[3]
F-4-45
4-22
Chapter 4
9) Turn the gear [1] so that the sensor flag of the lift gear [2] leaves the interrupt position of the lift cam sensor [3], then remove the ring [4], the lift gear [2] and
the lift cam [5]. Disconnect the connector [6], remove the two screws [7], and then remove the lift cam sensor [3]. Remove the two torsion springs [8], pull out the
carriage shaft [9] from the right side of the printer, and then remove the carriage.
[8] [2] [4]

[5]
[3]
[8] [9]
[6]
[1]
[7]
F-4-46
b) Points to Note on disassembly and Reassembly of Carriage Unit
1) Align the mark on the gear [3] with the mark on the bushing [4]. Align the mark on the lift gear [1] with the mark on the gear [2] to remove the ring [5].
[5]
[1] [2] [3] [4]

F-4-47
2) Install the linear scale with its R-mark [1] located on the right side of the unit.
[1]
F-4-48
4-23
Chapter 4
3) Install the left right lift cam [1] so its circular dent comes in the direction as shown (right side of the unit).
[1] [1]
F-4-49
c) Note on attaching the flexible cable
1) Insert the flexible cable [2] through the three claws [1] in the flexible cable retainer.
[1] [2]
F-4-50
2) Lightly fold the flexible cable in its marked area [1] and pass it through claws [2].
[1]
[2]
F-4-51
4-24
Chapter 4
3) Insert folded flexible cable [1] through three claws [2].

4) Pull flexible cable [1] lightly from both sides to remove slacks in it.
[1]
[2]
F-4-52
5) Having installed the flexible cable retainer, align and flatten the flexible cables.
6) Attach the flexible guide sheet [1] over the flexible cable while bumping its rear side against the side plate.
[1]
F-4-53
d) Multi Sensor Recalibration
Since multi sensor has individual electrical specificity, the following are recalibrated at the factory, namely, the optical axis of the sensor, the sensor gain for meas-
uring the printhead height and sensor calibration. Accordingly, carry out the following adjustments in the service mode whenever replacing the carriage unit or
multi sensor.
* The multi sensor reference plate(QL2-1561: PLATE, REFLECTION, MULTI-SENSOR) must be replaced at the same time whenever the carriage or the multi
sensor is being replaced.
1) Carry out the following service mode without media loading.
- Service mode : SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > GAP CALIB.
2) Load the following media.
Media type : Photo glossy paper
Media size : Media having a width equal too larger than that of A2-size paper
3) Carry out the following service mode.
- Service mode : SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > PRINT PATTERN > OPTICAL AXIS
4-25
Chapter 4
e) Adjusting the wire roller

To prevent the wire roller mounted on the carriage from contacting the duct and others during carriage operation, perform the following adjustment whenever you
have removed or replaced the carriage unit. This adjustment is not required when you have replaced only the multi sensor.
- Make adjustments with the carriage lock released.
- Make adjustments with the tube disconnected from the tube guide.
1) Remove the ink tube from the wire guide.

2) Loosen the two screws[1].
3) Turn the gear[2] until the lift cam flag[3] reaches the position shown below.
- Bottom position where the sensor[4] light is blocked by the flag (lowest position to which the carriage unit descends)
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
F-4-54
4) Remove the clip [1] and roller retainer [2] from the carriage wire tool.
[2] [1]
F-4-55
4-26
Chapter 4
5) Install the carriage wire tool [1] in position with its leaf spring being attached to the top of mist fan [2].
[2] [1]
F-4-56
6) Moving the carriage, adjust the height of the wire guide to bring its roller [1] into contact with the top of carriage wire tool [2].
[2] [1]
F-4-57
7) Secure the roller retainer [1] with the clip [3] in contact with the top of roller [2].
[1] [3] [2]

F-4-58
4-27
Chapter 4
8) Retighten the two screws [1] loosened in Step 2) to secure the wire guide.
[1]
F-4-59
9) Pass the ink tubes through the wire guides.
f) Precautions against handling the carriage shaft
The carriage shaft is functionally important part. Therefore, be sure to note the following points.
- Do not touch the shaft.
- Do not allow the shaft to get scratched or marked.
- Do not apply the grease to the shaft.
4-28
Chapter 4
4.3.8 Feeder Unit

0019-6264
a) Removing the pinch roller

1) Remove the rear cover.
2) When removing the pinch roller, press down the pinch roller unit[1] in the direction of the arrow.
[1]
F-4-60
3) Remove the pinch roller[1].
[1]
F-4-61
b) Removing the spur unit
1) When removing the spur unit, first open the top cover, and then remove the left and right circle covers, tank cover, right upper cover, operation panel, lower rear
cover, right cover, right front cover, upper front cover, lower front cover, cover guide, upper rear cover, and left and right cover mounting plates. Refer to DISAS-
SEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly > External Covers.
2) Remove the three screws[1], and then remove the mist fan[2].
[1] [2]
[1]
F-4-62
4-29
Chapter 4
3) Remove the three screws[2], and then remove the two tube guides[1]. Remove the ink tube[3] from the front duct[4].
[2]
[1]
[3] [4]
F-4-63
4) Remove the front duct[2] by removing the four screws[1].
[1] [1]
[2]
F-4-64
5) Turn the pulley[1] in the direction of the arrow so that the spur unit[2] is at the top position.
[1] [2]
F-4-65
4-30
Chapter 4
6) While pressing down the protrusion[A], slide the spur unit[1] in the direction of the arrow to remove it.
[A] [1]
F-4-66
c) Handling the Feed Roller
The feed roller is an important mechanical component of the printer. Follow the precaution below when handling it.
- Do not touch the feed roller surface(coated surface).
- Do not scratch or dent the feed roller.
4-31
Chapter 4
4.3.9 Roll Feed Unit

0013-4377
a) Removing the roll motor

1) When removing the roll motor, remove the roll feed unit [2] from the main body, and then remove the right cover [3] by removing the two screws [1].
[1]
[2] [3]
F-4-67
2) Remove the four screws [1], and then remove the left cover [2] and paper tray [3].
[3] [1]
[2]
F-4-68
3) Remove the three screws [1], and then remove the right inner cover [2].
[1]
[2]
F-4-69
4-32
Chapter 4
4) Remove the two screws [1], and then remove the roll motor [2].
[2]
[1]
F-4-70
b) Removing the roll feed unit
1) When removing the roll motor, remove the roll feed unit [2] from the main body, and then remove the right cover [3] by removing the two screws [1].
[1]
[2] [3]
F-4-71
2) Remove the four screws [1], and then remove the left cover [2] and paper tray [3].
[3] [1]
[2]
F-4-72
4-33
Chapter 4
3) Remove the three screws [1], and then remove the right inner cover [2].
[1]
[2]
F-4-73
4) Remove the two screws [1], and then remove the roll feed unit PCB [2].
[2]
[1]
F-4-74
4-34
Chapter 4
4.3.10 Purge Unit

0013-2180
a) Removing the purge unit

1) Turn the gear [1] of the purge unit [3] in the direction of the arrow to unlock and uncap the carriage. Next, move the carriage [2] onto the platen.
[2]
[3] [1]
F-4-75
2) Disconnect the connector [1] from the rear of the unit to free the harness from the harness guide.
[1]
F-4-76
4-35
Chapter 4
3) Remove the two screws [3] and remove the joint by releasing two hooks [1] to remove the purge unit [2].
[3]
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-4-77
b) Precaution for mounting the purge unit
1) When attaching the waste ink tube, make sure that the waste ink tube has been firmly attached with the two hooks [2] of the joint [1] engaging.
If the waste ink tube has not been attached firmly, it causes the ink leakage.
[1]
[2]
F-4-78
2) When mounting the purge unit, pull out the waste ink tube [1] from the back of the printer to the position where the marking is visible. It the waste ink tube is
not pulled out to the marking position, it may bend and cause ink leakage.
Make sure that there is no break or the twist of the waste ink tube from the front of the printer.
[1]
F-4-79
4-36
Chapter 4
3) Check the waste ink tube[1] from the front of the unit to make sure that it is not broken or twisted.
[1]
F-4-80
4-37
Chapter 4
4.3.11 Waste Ink Collection Unit

0013-4188
a) Removing the waste ink box

1) When removing the waste ink box, first remove the cassette and output tray.
2) Remove the two screws [1] and connector cover [2].
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-4-81
3) Disconnect the connector [2], and then remove the waste ink box [1].
[1]
[2]
F-4-82
b) Removing the mist fan
1) When removing the mist fan, first open the top cover, and then remove the roll feed unit, output tray, right circle cover, right upper cover, operation panel, mist
filter, exhaust filter, right cover, and right front cover. Refer to DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly > External
Cover.
2) Remove the three screws [1] and disconnect the connector, and then remove the mist fan [2].
[1] [2]
[1]
F-4-83
4-38
Chapter 4
c) Removing the platen duct

1) When removing the platen duct, first open the top cover, and then remove the roll feed unit, output tray, maintenance cartridge, waste ink box, left and right circle
cover, tank cover, right upper cover, operation panel, mist filter, exhaust filter, right cover, right front cover, and mist fan. Refer to DISASSEMBLY/REASSEM-
BLY > Points to Note on Disassembly andReassembly > External Cover.
2) Remove the three screws [2], and then remove the two tube guide [1]. Remove the ink tube [3] from the guide of the front duct [4].
[2]
[1]
[3] [4]
F-4-84
3) Remove the front duct [2] by removing the four screws [1].
[1] [1]
[2]
F-4-85
4-39
Chapter 4
4) Remove the platen (front) [2] by removing the six screws [1].
[1]
[2]
F-4-86
5) Remove the four screws [1] and four bushings [2].
[1]
[2] [1]
[2]
F-4-87
6) Disconnect the two waste ink tubes [3] and remove the nine screws [2] and five bushings [3] and two bushing covers [4] and two springs [5], and then remove
the platen duct [6].
[2] [2] [2] [2] [2] [2] [2]
[3] [3] [3] [3]

[6] [5] [4] [1] [4] [5]
F-4-88
4-40
Chapter 4
d) Note on attaching ink tubes to the front duct

In attaching ink tubes to the front guides, insert joint [1] into guide [2] first and then attach them to the guides, making sure that the tubes are not broken or twisted.
The marks appearing on the tubes were used for factory assembly purposes and are not used for servicing.
[1] [2]
F-4-89
4-41
Chapter 4
4.3.12 Ink Tank Unit

0019-6265
a) Removing the ink tank unit

1) Drain the ink.
Refer to DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly > Draining the ink.
2) Remove the roll feed unit, output guide, left and right circle covers, tank cover, left and right covers, left and right front covers, right upper cover, operation panel,
mist filter, exhaust filter, lower rear cover, upper front cover, and lower front cover.
Refer to DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly > External Cover.
3) Move the carriage unit to the center.
Refer to "Removing the Purge Unit".
4) Remove the three screws [2], and then remove the two tube guide [1].
[2]
[1]
[3] [4]
F-4-90
5) Remove the two link levers [2] from the carriage unit [1], and then remove the joint base [3].
[2]
[3] [1]
F-4-91
4-42
Chapter 4
Put the removed joint base in a plastic bag so that ink does not splash.
F-4-92
6) Remove the cutter unit and cutter mounting plate.

Refer to DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > Point to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly > Cutter.
7) Remove the two screws [1], and then remove the support plate [2].
[1] [2] [1]

F-4-93
8) Remove the two screws [1], and then remove the ink tank unit R [2].
[1]
[2]
F-4-94
4-43
Chapter 4
9) Remove the two screws [1], and then remove the ink tank unit F [2].
[1]
[2]
F-4-95
b) Removing the valve motor unit
1) When removing the valve motor unit, remove the ink tank cover.
2) Remove the two screws [1], disconnect the two connectors [2], and then remove the valve motor unit [3].
[3]
[1]
[2]
F-4-96
4-44
Chapter 4
4.3.13 Head Management Sensor

0013-3845
a) Removing the head management sensor

1) Remove the screw [1], disconnect the connector [2], and then remove the head management sensor [3].
[3] [2]
[1]
F-4-97
b) Procedure after replacing the head management sensor
Since the distance between the head management sensor and the carriage unit varies among printers, the optical axis is factory-adjusted to adjust the non-discharging
detection position. When you have replaced the head management sensor or performed assembly/reassembly of surrounding parts that can change the distance be-
tween the head management sensor and the carriage unit, readjustment is required.
Perform the readjustment in the service mode.
Service mode : SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > NOZZLE CHK POS.
4-45
Chapter 4
4.3.14 Multi Sensor

0013-2914
a) Removing the multi sensor

1) Remove the screw [1], disconnect the flexible cable [2], and then remove the multi sensor [3].
[2] [3]
[1]
F-4-98
Since multi sensor has individual electrical specificity, the following are recalibrated at the factory, namely, the optical axis of the sensor, the sensor gain for meas-
uring the printhead height and sensor calibration. Accordingly, carry out the following adjustments in the service mode whenever replacing the carriage unit or
multi sensor.
* The multi sensor reference plate(QL2-1561: PLATE, REFLECTION, MULTI-SENSOR) must be replaced at the same time whenever the carriage or the multi
* When replacing the carriage unit, refer to Adjustment and Setup > Procedure after Removing or Replacing the Carriage Unit.

Media size : Media having a width equal toor larger then that of A2-size paper
4-46
Chapter 4
4.3.15 PCBs
0020-1948
Do not replace the main controller PCB and maintenance cartridge relay PCB(ROM board) at the same time.
These PCBs store important data such as settings and carriage drive time. Before replacement of either PCB, the data stored in it is moved to the other PCB through
internal communication so that it can be taken over to the new PCB automatically. This is the reason why the two PCBs should not be replaced at the same time.
If you want to replace both PCBs at the same time, first carry out the procedure "Procedure for replacing the maintenance cartridge relay PCB(ROM board)" and
then carry out the procedure "Procedure for replacing the main controller PCB".
After replacing with the main controller PCB or maintenance cartridge relay PCB which are supplied as service parts, check that the firmware to the latest version.
Reference:
a) Removing the main controller PCB

1) To remove the main controller PCB, open the top cover and remove the roll feed unit, left circle cover, tank cover, left cover, lower rear cover, lower rear left
cover and left rear cover.
Refer to DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > Points to note on Disassembly and Reassembly > External Covers.
2) Remove the four screws[1] and remove the shield plate[2].
[1]
[2]
F-4-99
3) Remove all connectors from the main controller PCB.
4) Remove two coin screws[1], interface cover[2] and screw[3] in this order.
[1] [2]
[3]
F-4-100
4-47
Chapter 4
5) Remove the ten screws[1] and free the harness from harness guide[2] to remove the main controller PCB[3].
[3] [1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-4-101
b) Removing the main controller mounting plate
1) Remove the main controller PCB.
2) Free the harness from the harness guide.
3) Remove the screw [1] and remove the flexible guide [2].
[1] [2]
F-4-102
4) Remove the four screws [1] and two hooks [2] from the harness guide and remove the main controller mounting plate [3].
[3]
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-4-103
4-48
Chapter 4
c) Note on installing the cable holder

In installing the cable holder, secure ferrite core [1] to the flexible cable on the carriage with the cable holder before hooking the flexible cable from the operation
panel at the three claws [2].
[1] [2]
F-4-104
d) Removing the power supply PCB
1) To remove the power supply PCB, open the top cover and remove the roll feed unit, left circle cover, tank cover, left cover, lower rear cover, lower rear left cover
and left rear cover.
Refer to DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > Points to note on Disassembly and Reassembly > External Covers.
2) Disconnect the two connectors[2] from the power supply PCB[1].
3) Remove the five screws[3] and remove the power supply PCB[1] together with the mounting plate.
[1] [2]
[3] [2] [3]

F-4-105
e) Procedure for replacing the maintenance cartridge relay PCB(ROM board)
1) Turn off the printer and unplug the power cord.
2) Replace the maintenance cartridge relay PCB.
3) Plug the power cord to the outlet, and then turn on the printer with the [PAPER SOURCE] button and [INFORMATION] button pressed down. (The printer will
start up in the PCB Replacement mode.)
4) Check that "Initializing" appears on the display, and then release the buttons. (When the printer enters the PCB Replacement mode, the message lamp goes on.)
5) What until "REPLACE MODE" appears on the display.
6) Select "MC BOARD", and then press the [OK] button.
7) Check that "TURN POWER OFF" appears on the display, and then turn off the printer.
8) Turn on the printer.
9) Check the firmware version. If the firmware is not the latest version, upgrade the firmware.
f) Procedure for replacing the main controller PCB

1) Turn off the printer and unplug the power cord.
2) Replace the main controller PCB.
3) Plug the power cord to the outlet, and then turn on the printer with the [PAPER SOURCE] button and [INFORMATION] button pressed down. (The printer will
start up in the PCB Replacement mode.)
4) Check that "Initializing" appears on the display, and then release the buttons. (When the printer enters the PCB Replacement mode, the message lamp goes on.)
5) What until "REPLACE MODE" appears on the display.
4-49
Chapter 4
6) Select "CPU BOARD", and then press the [OK] button.

7) Check that "TURN POWER OFF" appears on the display, and then turn off the printer.
8) Turn on the printer.
9) Check the firmware version. If the firmware is not the latest version, upgrade the firmware.
4-50
Chapter 4
4.3.16 Opening the Cap/Moving the Wiper Unit

0017-5590
This section explains how to open the cap and ink supply valve manualy.
To move the carriage with the power off, you need to release the carriage lock pin and cap manually.
1. Opening the Cap/Releasing the Carriage Lock Pin

1) Remove the right circle cover and mist filter.
Refer to DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly > External Cover.
2) Turn the gear [1] of the purge unit [3] in the direction of the arrow from the hole [6] of the right cover. The cap [5] and lock pin [4] move down, allowing you
to move the carriage [2].
[1] [6]
F-4-106
[5] [4]
[2]
[3] [1]
[3]
F-4-107
4-51
Chapter 4
2. Moving the Wiper Unit

1) Open the top cover, and then remove the roll feed unit, output guide, right circle cover, right upper cover, operation panel, mist filter, exhaust filter, right cover,
right front cover, cover guide, cover plate(right).
Refer to DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly > External Cover.
2) To move the wiper unit [3], turn the gear [1] of the purge unit [2] in the direction of the arrow.
[3]
[2] [1] [2]

F-4-108
4-52
Chapter 4
4.3.17 Opening/Closing the Ink Supply Valve

0012-6413
1) Open the top cover, and then remove the left circle cover and tank cover.
2) To open the ink supply valve, turn the cam [2] in the direction of the arrow and press the link [1].
[2]
[1]
F-4-109
- If the tube is full of ink, releasing the printhead lock lever with the ink supply valve open can cause the ink to flow back to the ink supply unit, resulting in leakage
of ink from the ink supply needle.
- If the ink supply valve is held open due to a problem such as a valve motor error(03130031-2F3A), remove the valve motor unit(refer to DISASSEMBLY/RE-
ASSEMBLY > Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink Tank Unit) and close the ink supply valve.
4-53
Chapter 4
4.3.18 Draining the Ink

0017-5591
There are two methods of removing the ink, a manual method and an automatic method.
There the ink is drained, the ink inside the ink passage totaling about 36g(about 6g x 6colors) is drained as waste ink.
To prevent ink leakage, be sure to drain the ink inside the ink passage before transporting the printer again.
1. Automatic ink drainage

To perform "automatic ink drainage", select "Main Menu" > "Maintenance" > "Move Printer".
Perform automatic ink drainage again if a power outage or other cause shuts off the power during the operation for automatic ink drainage.
2. Manual Ink Drainage

Perform manual ink drainage when the printer cannot be powered due to a printer's electrcal part failure, firmware error, or power supply problem.
Manual Ink Drainage Procedure
1) Open the top cover, and then remove the roll feed unit, left and right circle covers, tank cover, right upper cover, operation panel, mist filter, exhaust filter, and
right cover.
Refer to DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > Pointe toNote on Disassembly andReassembly > External Cover.
2) Move the carriage onto the platen.
Refer to DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly > Opening the Cap/Move the Wiper Unit.
3) Turn the cam [2] in the direction of the arrow, and then press the link [1] to open the ink supply valve.
[2]
[1]
F-4-110
4) Release printhead fixer lever [1] to flow the ink from inside the ink tube to the sub-buffer of the ink tank unit.
[1]
F-4-111
The sub-buffer can contain 22g of ink. About 6g of ink flows into the sub-buffer each time manual ink drainage is performed.
5) Make sure that the ink has been drained completely, turn the cam to close the ink supply valve.
MEMO:
When supplying the ink to the printer after the manual ink drainage, return the printer to the normal condition, and then turn ON the power supply without the
printhead installed. And according to the message, execute the installation of the printhead.
4-54
Chapter 4
4.4 Applying the Grease
4.4.1 Applying the Grease

0019-6268
Some parts require application of grease when replaced. Apply the grease(special tool) listed below.
Smear the grease lightly and evenly with a flat brush or the like.
For the printer disassembly/reassembly method, refer to "DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY" and "parts catalog".
Do not apply the grease to locations in which not designated grease may cause poor print quality. Take particular care that grease do not get onto the wiper, cap,
carriage shaft and the linear scale.
No. Location Grease Quantity Remarks

1 Joint base FLOIL G-5000H Approx. 6/12mg
2 Shaft cleaner/oil pad EU-1 Soaks enough.
3 Eject roller bearing FLOIL G-5000H Approx. 12mg
4 Eject roller center bearing FLOIL G-5000H Approx. 12mg
5 Spur cam FLOIL G-5000H Approx. 20mg
6 Pinch roller unit release shaft FLOIL G-5000H Approx. 12mg
4-55
Chapter 4
a) Carriage unit
1) Joint base
FLOIL G-5000H
Approx. 12mg
FLOIL G-5000H
Approx. 6mg
F-4-112
2) Shaft cleaner/oil pad
EU-1
F-4-113
4-56
Chapter 4
b) Eject roller unit

3) Eject roller bearing
4) Eject roller center bearing
FLOIL G-5000H
Approx. 12mg
FLOIL G-5000H
Approx. 12mg
(One location on A2 (17") model

and two location on A1 (24") model)
FLOIL G-5000H
Approx. 12mg
F-4-114
4-57
Chapter 4
c) Spur unit
5) Spur cam
FLOIL G-5000H
Approx. 20mg
F-4-115
d) Pinch roller unit
6) Pinch roller unit release shaft
(Five location A2 (17") model

and seven location A1 (24") model)
FLOIL G-5000H
Approx. 12mg
F-4-116
4-58
Chapter 4
4.5 Adjustment and Setup Items
4.5.1 Adjustment Item List

0016-9220
The following adjustment procedures need to be performed when the parts have been replaced or remove and then reinstalled:
T-4-1
Adjustment item Adjustment timing

Multi sensor recalibration Multi sensor replacement/removal
Carriage unit replacement/removal
Adjusting wire roller Wire guide replacement/removal
Head management sensor recalibration Head management sensor replacement/removal
4.5.2 Procedure after Replacing the Carriage Unit or Multi Sensor

0013-4203
a) Multi Sensor Recalibration

Since the multi sensor has individual electrical specificity, the following are recalibrated at the factory, namely, the optical axis of the sensor, the sensor gain for
measuring the printhead height and sensor calibration. Accordingly, carry out the following adjustments in the service mode whenever replacing the carriage unit
or multi sensor.
Media size : Media having a width equal too larger than that of A2-size paper
The multi sensor reference plate(QL2-1561: PLATE, REFLECTION, MULTI-SENSOR) must be replaced at the same time whenever the carriage or the multi
4-59
Chapter 4
b) Adjusting the wire roller

To prevent the wire roller mounted on the carriage from contacting the duct and others during carriage operation, perform the following adjustment whenever you
have removed or replaced the carriage unit. This adjustment is not required when you have replaced only the multi sensor.
- Make adjustments with the carriage lock released.
- Make adjustments with the tube disconnected from the tube guide.
1) Remove the ink tube from the wire guide.
2) Loosen the two screws [1].
3) Turn the gear [2] until the lift cam flag [3] reaches the position shown below.
- Bottom position where the sensor [4] light is blocked by the flag (lowest position to which the carriage unit descends)
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
F-4-117
4) Remove the clip [1] and roller retainer [2] from the carriage wire tool.
[2] [1]
F-4-118
4-60
Chapter 4
5) Install the carriage wire tool [1] in position with its leaf spring being attached to the top of mist fan [2].
[2] [1]
F-4-119
6) Moving the carriage, adjust the height of the wire guide to bring its roller [1] into contact with the top of carriage wire tool [2].
[2] [1]
F-4-120
7) Secure the roller retainer [1] with the clip [3] in contact with the top of roller [2].
[1] [3] [2]

F-4-121
4-61
Chapter 4
8) Retighten the two screws [1] loosened in Step 2) to secure the wire guide.
[1]
F-4-122
9) Pass the ink tubes through the wire guides.
4.5.3 Procedure after Replacing the Head Management Sensor

0012-6487
Since the distance between the head management sensor and the carriage unit varies among printers, the optical axis is factory-adjusted to adjust the non-discharging
detection position. When you have replaced the head management sensor or performed assembly/reassembly of surrounding parts that can change the distance be-
tween the head management sensor and the carriage unit, readjustment is required.
Perform the readjustment in the service mode.
Service mode : SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > NOZZLE CHK POS.
4-62
Chapter 5 MAINTENANCE
Contents
Contents
5.1 Periodic Replacement Parts ...........................................................................................................................................5-1

5.1.1 Periodic Replacement Parts ......................................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 Consumable Parts...........................................................................................................................................................5-1
5.2.1 Consumable Parts......................................................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.3 Periodic Maintenance.....................................................................................................................................................5-2
5.3.1 Periodic Maintenance................................................................................................................................................................... 5-2
Chapter 5
5.1 Periodic Replacement Parts
5.1.1 Periodic Replacement Parts

0013-4084
Level Periodic Replacement Part

User None
Service Personnel None
5.2 Consumable Parts
5.2.1 Consumable Parts

0019-6270
Consumables Service Mode

Life sheets/
Name Part number Q'ty PARTS xx COUNTER x States (Error Code)
A1
Service SUCTION FAN UNIT QM3-0701 1 15000 A1 A OK/W1/E146-4001
DUCT UNIT, PLATEN QM3-0801 1 15000 B1 B OK/W1/E146-4001
CARRIAGE UNIT QM3-0804 1 15000 D1 D OK/W1/W2
LEVER, L, INK TUBE QD1-0405 1 15000
LINK, LEVER, TUBE QC2-0661 2 15000
SPRING, TENSION QC2-1396 1 15000
PAD, OIL QC2-0664 2 15000
HOLDER, WIRE(MECH) QC2-0663 1 15000
TUBE GUIDE UNIT QM3-0704 1 15000
CLEANING UNIT, R, RAIL, QM3-0543 1 15000 D1/D3
CARRIAGE
CLEANING UNIT, L, RAIL, QM3-0542 1 15000 D1/D3
CARRIAGE
FLEXIBLE CABLE ASS'Y QM3-0806 1 15000 D2
ENCODER SENSOR UNIT QM2-3421 1 15000 D3
SCALE, LINEAR QC3-1888 1 15000
CAM, LIFTER QC2-0675 2 15000 D4
INK SUPPLY UNIT QM3-0568 1 15000 F1 F OK/W1/E144-4047
PURGE KIT QM3-0653 1 15000 H1 H OK/W1/E141-4046
HEAD MANAGEMENT SENSOR QM3-0529 1 15000 L1 L OK/W1/E194-404A
MOTOR, 26.4V, DC QK1-0447 1 50000 P1 P OK/W1/W2
CAM, ROWEL QC2-1027 1 15000 R1 R OK/W1/W2
MIST FAN UNIT QM3-0799 1 15000 V1 V OK/W1/E146-4001
MIST FILTER UNIT QM3-0212 1 15000
User See "Product Overview> Features> Consumables"
- Maintenance Kit
Kit name Parts number Life Counter name

MAINTENANCE KIT QY6-1318 15000 A/B/D/F
After supplies have been replaced, execute [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS xx] in service mode to initialize (clear) the parts counter information.
5-1
Chapter 5
5.3 Periodic Maintenance
5.3.1 Periodic Maintenance

0019-6271
T-5-1
Level Periodic maintenance

User Cleaning of ink mist and other substances(about once each month
Service personnel None
a) Printer cleaning
To keep up with print quality and prevent troubles, clean the printer about once each month.
1) Wipe the external surfaces of the printer with a cloth moistened with water and then wrung tight and then dry them finally with a dry cloth.
F-5-1
2) Press the [MENU] button to display the main menu.
3) Press the and buttons to select [Maintenance] and then press the button.
4) Press the and buttons to select [Platen Cleaning] and press the button.
5) Press the and buttons to select [Yes] and press [OK] button.
6) Open the top cover.
7) If the paper dust has accumulated in the suction port[1] on the platen or in the borderless printing ink grooves[2], use the cleaning brush, provided with the printer,
to wipe it away.
[2] [1]
F-5-2
MEMO:
Rinse the cleaner brush with water when it gets dirty.
5-2
Chapter 5
8) Wipe off dirt inside the top cover with a cloth moistened with water and then wrung tight. Wipe off ink smears from the entire surface of the platen, the pinch
roller unit, the borderless printing ink grooves and all else that is accessible.
F-5-3
- Do not dry the interiors of the top cover with a dry cloth. Electrostatic charges could make the internal components susceptible to dirt, resulting in degraded print
quality.
- Do not use flammable solvents, such as thinner and benzine, on the printer. Solvents coming into contact with any electrical parts inside the printer could result
in fires or electrical shock hazards.
- Do not touch linear scale [1] and carriage shaft [2].
[2] [1]
F-5-4
5-3
9) Remove the roll feed unit and fold plain paper [1] two to three times and then insert through the printer rear into the underside [2] of the pinch roller
unit to wipe off dirt on the pinch roller unit.
[1]
[2]
F-5-5
Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING
Contents
Contents
6.1 Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................................................................6-1

6.1.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.1.1 Outline of Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................................................................................6-1
6.2 Location of Connectors and Pin Arrangement...............................................................................................................6-2
6.2.1 Main controller PCB .................................................................................................................................................................... 6-2
6.2.2 Carriage PCB ............................................................................................................................................................................. 6-10
6.2.3 Power supply.............................................................................................................................................................................. 6-15
6.2.4 Roll feed unit PCB ..................................................................................................................................................................... 6-16
6.3 Version Up ...................................................................................................................................................................6-17
6.3.1 Firmware Update Tool ............................................................................................................................................................... 6-17
6.4 Service Tools................................................................................................................................................................6-22
6.4.1 Tool List..................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-22
Chapter 6
6.1 Troubleshooting
6.1.1 Outline
6.1.1.1 Outline of Troubleshooting

0012-6598
1. Outline
Troubles subject to troubleshooting are classified into those shown on the display (warning, error, and service call) and those not shown on the display.
The code of warning and error is shown by combining alphanumeric characters of eight digits and four digits.
The code of service call error is shown by the initial character of "E" and combining alphanumeric characters of three digits and four digits.
No code number is displayed when a warning occurs. Selecting [SERVICE MODE] > [DISPLAY] > [WARNING] in service mode allows you to check the warning
log.
2. Precautions for Troubleshooting

1) Check the environmental conditions and the media used for printing.
2) Before performing troubleshooting, make sure that all connectors and cables are connected properly.
3) When servicing the printer with the external cover removed and the AC power supplied, be extremely careful to avoid electric shock and shorting electrical
devices.
4) In the following sections, the troubleshooting steps are described such that the component related to the most probable cause of the problem will be repaired or
replaced first, being followed by components with less problem probability. If multiple components have the same problem probability, the steps are described
beginning with the easiest one.
After performing each step, check to see if the problem has been resolved by making test prints. If the problem persists, proceed to the next step.
5) After completion of the troubleshooting, check that all connectors and cables have been reconnected and screws have been tightened firmly.
6) Whenever you have performed replacement or repair services, make test prints to check whether the problem has been resolved.
7) When connecting with the printer by using the LAN cable at the service working, be sure to enter the service mode to recognize the printer correctly.
6-1
Chapter 6
6.2 Location of Connectors and Pin Arrangement
6.2.1 Main controller PCB

0019-6272
J2601
1 1
1
J3101
J3411
J3402
J3701 1
J3801 1
1
J1101 J1801
J2801
J3211
1
1 1
J3911
J3202
J3203
1
1
J1001 J2511
1
J2703 1
J1201 J2512
1
J3011
1 1
1
F-6-1
T-6-1
J1001 (USB)
Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT Function
1 VBUS IN USB VBUS (+5V)
2 D- IN/OUT USB data (-)
3 D+ IN/OUT USB data (+)
4 GND - USB GND
5 GND - GND (Connector shell)
6 GND - GND (Connector shell)
T-6-2
J1001 (IEEE1394 board)

1 GND - GND
2 GND - GND
3 GND - GND
4 +3.3V OUT Power supply (+3.3V)
10 N.C. - N.C.
11 GND - GND
12 PME# IN Power management enable signal
13 INTA# IN Interrupt signal
14 GND - GND
15 RST# OUT PCI reset signal
16 CLK OUT PCI clock signal
17 GNT# OUT Grant signal
18 GND - GND
19 REQ# IN Request signal
20 AD31 IN/OUT Address and data signal 31
24 GND - GND
6-2
Chapter 6
J1001 (IEEE1394 board)

29 CBE3# IN/OUT Bus command and byte enable signal 3
30 IDSEL OUT Initialization device select signal
31 GND - GND
32 GND - GND
37 GND - GND
42 CBE2# OUT Bus command and byte enable signal 2
43 GND - GND
44 FRAME# IN/OUT Cycle frame signal
45 IRDY# IN/OUT Initiator redy signal
46 TRDY# IN/OUT Target redy signal
47 DEVSEL# IN/OUT Device select signal
48 GND - GND
49 STOP# IN/OUT Stop signal
50 LOCK# IN/OUT Lock signal
51 PERP# IN/OUT Parity error signal
52 SERR# IN/OUT System error signal
53 PAR IN/OUT Parity signal
55 GND - GND
56 GND - GND
61 GND - GND
67 GND - GND
72 GND - GND
77 GND - GND
78 HDD_LED - N.C.
79 +5V OUT Power supply (+5V)
85 GND - GND
86 GND - GND
87 GND - GND
88 GND - GND
6-3
Chapter 6
T-6-3
J1201 (network)
1 TX+ OUT Ethernet data TX line (+)
2 TX- OUT Ethernet data TX line (-)
3 RX+ IN Ethernet data RX line (+)
4 - - Not used
5 - - Not used
6 RX- IN Ethernet data RX line (-)
7 - - Not used
8 - - Not used
9 GREEN_LED_C OUT Link LED (green:100Mb/s) cathode terminal
10 GREEN_LED_A OUT Link LED (green:100Mb/s) anode terminal
11 YELLOW_LED_C OUT Link LED (yellow:10Mb/s) cathode terminal
12 YELLOW_LED_A OUT Link LED (yellow:10Mb/s) anode terminal
T-6-4
J1801 (to power supply PCB)

1 HD1_VHFB+ OUT VH feedback voltage +
2 HD1_VHFB- OUT VH feedback voltage -
3 VH IN Power supply (+21.5V)
4 GND - GND
6 GND - GND
7 RGV20(VCC) IN Power supply (+21.5V)
8 GND - GND
9 VM IN Power supply (+26V)
10 GND - GND
11 VM2 IN Power supply (+26V)
12 GND - GND
13 VH_ENB OUT VH power supply ON/OFF signal
14 PW_CONT OUT Normal/power saving switch signal
T-6-5
J2511 (spur motor, spur cam sensor, mist fan, cutter motor, cutter right position sensor)
1 +3V OUT Power supply (+3.3V)
2 GND - GND
3 CUTTER_R_SNS_R IN Cutter right detection sensor signal
4 CUTTER_OUTA OUT Cutter motor driver signal A
5 CUTTER_OUTB OUT Cutter motor driver signal B
6 +3V OUT Power supply (+3.3V)
7 GND - GND
8 HAKUSHA_CAM_SNS_R IN Spur cam sensor output signal
9 HAKUSHA_MOTOR_AM OUT Spur motor drive signal AM
10 HAKUSHA_MOTOR_AP OUT Spur motor drive signal AP
11 FAN_VM OUT Power supply (+26V)
12 MIST_FAN_LOCK IN Mist fan lock signal
13 MIST_FAN_PWM OUT Mist fan duty control signal
14 GND - GND
T-6-6
J2512 (suction fan, maintenance cartridge relay PCB, paper detection sensor, lift cam sensor)
1 FAN_VM OUT Power supply (+26V)
2 PLATEN_FAN_LOCK IN Suction fan lock signal
3 PLATEN_FAN_PWM OUT Suction fan duty control signal
4 GND - GND
5 MENT_SDA IN/OUT Maintenance cartridge rom control signal (data)
6 MENT_SCL IN/OUT Maintenance cartridge rom control signal (clock)
7 GND - GND
8 MENT_3V Power supply (+3.3V)
9 SNS_3V OUT Power supply (+3.3V)
10 - - Not used
6-4
Chapter 6
J2512 (suction fan, maintenance cartridge relay PCB, paper detection sensor, lift cam sensor)
11 - - Not used
12 - - Not used
13 GND - GND
14 PE_SNS IN Paper ditection sensor output signal
16 GND - GND
17 LIFT_CAM_SNS IN Lift cam sensor output signal
T-6-7
J2601 (to operation panel PCB)

1 POWER_ON IN Power switch signal
2 PM_START OUT Power supply (+5V)
3 BUZZER OUT Buzzer control signal
4 PDODATA OUT Panel IC control signal
6 PDI_DATA IN Panel IC data signal
7 GND - GND
8 /PANEL RESET OUT Panel reset signal
9 GND - GND
10 PDOPCLK OUT Panel IC clock signal
11 PANEL_5V OUT Power supply (+5V)
12 /PDOCS_L OUT Panel supply chip select signal
T-6-8
J2703 (to roll feed unit PCB)

1 OPT_5V OUT Power supply (+5V)
2 GND - GND
3 ROLL_CAM_SNS IN Roll cam sensor signal
4 ROLL_PAPER_SNS IN Roll media sensor signal
5 ROLL_UNIT IN Roll unit detection signal
6 VM2 OUT Power supply (+26V)
8 /ROLL_SLEEP OUT Roll motor driver sleep signal
9 ROLL_STB OUT Roll motor driver strobe signal
10 ROLL_DAT OUT Roll motor driver data signal
11 ROLL_CLK OUT Roll motor driver clock signal
12 GND - GND
13 GND - GND
T-6-9
J2801 (feed motor)

1 LF_OUTB OUT Feed motor drive signal B
2 LF_OUTA OUT Feed motor drive signal A
T-6-10
J3011 (lift motor, head management sensor, purge motor, pump encoder sensor, pump cam sensor)
1 LIFT_OUTCOM OUT Lift motor Power supply
2 LIFT_OUTAP OUT Lift motor drive signal AP
3 LIFT_OUTAM OUT Lift motor drive signal AM
4 LIFT_OUTBP OUT Lift motor drive signal BP
5 LIFT_OUTBM OUT Lift motor drive signal BM
6 GND - GND
7 FUTO_CLMP OUT Head management sensor unit clamp signal
8 FUTO_XLEDON OUT Head management sensor unit LED ON/OFF signal
9 SNS_5V Power supply (+5V)
10 FUTO_XCMP0 IN Head management sensor unit skew detection signal
11 PUMP_OUTB OUT Purge motor drive signal B
12 PUMP_OUTA OUT Purge motor drive signal A
13 GND - GND
6-5
Chapter 6
J3011 (lift motor, head management sensor, purge motor, pump encoder sensor, pump cam sensor)
14 PUMP_ENCA IN Pump encoder sensor output signal A
16 PUMP_ENCB IN Pump encoder sensor output signal B
17 PUMP_CAM_3V OUT Power supply (+3.3V)
18 GND - GND
19 PUMP_CAM_SNS IN Pump cam sensor output signal
T-6-11
J3101 (carriage motor)

1 CR_HWP IN Carriage motor hole device W-phase + signal
2 CR_HWM IN Carriage motor hole device W-phase - signal
3 CR_W OUT Carriage motor W-phase drive signal
4 CR_HVM IN Carriage motor hole device V-phase - signal
5 CR_U OUT Carriage motor U-phase drive signal
6 GND - GND
7 CR_V OUT Carriage motor V-phase drive signal
9 N.C. - N.C
10 CR_HVP IN Carriage motor hole device V-phase + signal
11 CR_HUM IN Carriage motor hole device U-phase - signal
12 CR_HUP IN Carriage motor hole device U-phase + signal
T-6-12
J3202 (ink tank ROM PCB, ink detection sensor)

1 TANK_DAT0 IN/OUT Ink tank data signal 0
3 TANK_3V OUT Power supply (+3.3V)
5 GND - GND
6 TANK_CLK OUT Ink tank clock signal
9 TANK_3V OUT Power supply (+3.3V)
11 GND - GND
12 TANK_CLK OUT Ink tank clock signal
13 GND - GND
14 INK_SNS0 IN Ink detection sensor output signal 0
17 GND - GND
T-6-13
J3211 (valve open/closed detection sensor, valve motor, feed roller HP sensor, feed roller ensoder sensor)
2 GND - GND
3 VALVE_DETECT_SNS IN Valve open/closed detection sensor output signal
4 VALVE_MOTOR_AM OUT Valve motor drive signal AM
5 VALVE_MOTOR_AP OUT Valve motor drive signal AP
6 LF_HP_SNS_3V OUT Power supply (+3.3V)
7 GND - GND
8 LF_HP_SNS IN Feed roller HP sensor output signal
9 GND - GND
10 LF_ENCA IN Feed roller encoder sensor output signal A
11 RGV5 OUT Power supply (+5V)
12 LF_ENCB IN Feed roller encoder sensor output signal B
6-6
Chapter 6
T-6-14
J3402 (to carriage PCB)

1 GND - GND
2 GND - GND
3 GND - GND
4 GND - GND
5 GND - GND
6 GND - GND
7 VH OUT Power supply (+21.5V)
22 HD1_VHFBH IN VH feed back voltage +
23 HD1_VHFBG IN VH feed back voltage -
24 GND - GND
25 GND - GND
26 GND - GND
27 GND - GND
28 GND - GND
29 GND - GND
30 GND - GND
T-6-15
J3411 (temperature/humidity detection sensor)

1 TH2_OUT IN Thermistor output signal
2 GND - GND
3 RHV_OUT IN Temperature/humidity sensor output signal
T-6-16

1 H1-D-DATA-7-OD OUT Odd head L data signal 7(D)
2 GND - GND
3 H1-E-HE-8 OUT Head L heat enable signal8(E)
4 GND - GND
5 H1-E-DATA-8-OD OUT Odd head L data signal 8(E)
6 GND - GND
7 H1-F-DATA-10-OD OUT Odd head L data signal 10(F)
8 GND - GND
10 GND - GND
11 H1-F-HE-10 OUT Head L heat enable signal10(F)
12 GND - GND
14 GND - GND
16 GND - GND
17 H1-F-DATA-11-EV OUT Even head L data signal11(F)
18 GND - GND
20 GND - GND
6-7
Chapter 6

22 GND - GND
23 H1-E-DATA-9-EV OUT Even head L data signal9(E)
24 H1-DLD LICC2 OUT Head L analogue switch latch signal
25 H1-DATA LICC2 OUT Head L analogue switch data signal
26 H1-DASLK LICC2 OUT Head L analogue switch clock signal
27 GND - GND
28 H1-DSOUT2 IN Head L temperature output 2
29 H1-DSOUT1 IN Head L temperature output 1
30 GND - GND
31 PWLED4_ON OUT Multi sensor LED 4 drive signal
35 GND - GND
36 MLT_SNS_1IN IN Multi sensor signal 1
37 MLT_SNS_2IN IN Multi sensor signal 2
38 GND - GND
39 H1-B-DATA-2-OD OUT Odd head L data signal 2(B)
40 GND - GND
42 GND - GND
43 H1-C-HE-4 OUT Head L heat enable signal8(E)
44 GND - GND
45 H1-C-DATA-4-OD OUT Odd head L data signal 4(C)
46 SNS_5V OUT Power supply (+5V)
47 ENCODER_B IN Carriage encoder output signalB
48 SNS_5V OUT Power supply (+5V)
49 ENCODER_A IN Carriage encoder output signalA
50 GND - GND
T-6-17

1 H1-E-DATA-8-EV OUT Even head L data signal 8(E)
2 GND - GND
3 H1-D-HE-7 OUT Head L heat enable signal 7(D)
4 GND - GND
5 IO-ASIC_SDA IN/OUT Head ROM control signal (data)
6 GND - GND
7 H1-D-DATA-7-EV OUT Even head L data signal 7(D)
8 GND - GND
10 GND - GND
11 H1-D-DATA-6-OD OUT Odd head L data signal6(D)
12 GND - GND
13 IO-ASIC_SCL IN/OUT Head ROM control signal (clock)
14 GND - GND
16 GND - GND
17 H1-C-HE-5 OUT Head L heat enable signal 5(C)
18 GND - GND
19 H1-C-DATA-5-OD OUT Odd head L data signal5(C)
20 GND - GND
21 H1_CLK OUT Head L clock signal
22 GND - GND
23 HEAD_3V OUT Power supply (+3V)
25 H1_LT OUT Head L latch signal
26 H-DASH_LICC2_B OUT Analogue switch/AD triggar
27 H1-C-DATA-5-EV OUT Even head L data signal 5(C)
28 GND - GND
29 H1-B-HE-3 OUT Head L heat enable signal 3(B)
30 GND - GND
32 GND - GND
6-8
Chapter 6

33 H1-B-DATA-3-EV OUT Even head L data signal 3(B)
34 GND - GND
36 GND - GND
37 H1-A-DATA-1-EV OUT Even head L data signal 1(A)
38 GND - GND
39 H1-A-HE-1 OUT Head L heat enable signal 1(A)
40 GND - GND
42 GND - GND
44 GND - GND
45 H1-A-DATA-0-OD OUT Odd head L data signal0(A)
46 GND - GND
48 GND - GND
50 GND - GND
T-6-18
J3911 (ink tank cover switch, top cover sensor, cutter HP sensor)
1 TANK_COVER_SW IN Ink tank cover switch output signal
2 GND - GND
4 GND - GND
5 TOP_COVER_SNS IN Top cover sensor output signal
7 GND - GND
8 CUTTER_L_SNS IN Cutter HP sensor signal
6-9
Chapter 6
6.2.2 Carriage PCB

0017-5655
J21
J21
J22
J22
J5
J23
J23 J3
J24
J24
F-6-2
T-6-19
J3
1 ENCODER_B IN Linear encoder detection signal B
2 GND - GND
3 ENCODER_A IN Linear encoder detection signal A
4 H1_5V OUT Power supply (+5V)
T-6-20
J5
1 3.3V OUT Power supply (+3V)
2 SCL OUT EEPROM control signal (clock)
3 SDA IN/OUT EEPROM control signal (data)
4 GND - GND
5 PWLED1 OUT Multi sensor LED1 drive signal
10 OUT1 IN Multi sensor input signal 1
11 OUT2 IN Multi sensor input signal 2
12 H1-5V OUT Power supply (+5V)
T-6-21
J21
1 GND - GND
2 GND - GND
3 GND - GND
4 GND - GND
5 GND - GND
6 GND - GND
7 GND - GND
8 HD1_VHFBG OUT VH feed back voltage -
9 HD1_VHFBH OUT VH feed back voltage +
6-10
Chapter 6
J21
25 GND - GND
26 GND - GND
27 GND - GND
28 GND - GND
29 GND - GND
30 GND - GND
T-6-22
J22
1 GND - GND
2 ENCODER_A OUT Linear encoder output signalA
3 SNS_5V IN Power supply (+5V)
4 ENCODER_B OUT Linear encoder output signalB
5 SNS_5V IN Power supply (+5V)
6 H1-C-DATA-4-OD IN Odd head L data signal 4(C)
7 GND - GND
8 H1-C-HE-4 IN Head L heat enable signal8(E)
9 GND - GND
10 H1-B-DATA-3-OD IN Odd head L data signal 3(B)
11 GND - GND
12 H1-B-DATA-2-OD IN Odd head L data signal 2(B)
13 GND - GND
14 MLT_SNS_2IN OUT Multi sensor signal2
15 MLT_SNS_1IN OUT Multi sensor signal1
16 GND - GND
17 PWLED1_ON IN Multi sensor LED 1 drive signal
21 GND - GND
22 H1-DSOUT1 OUT Head L temperature output 1
23 H1-DSOUT2 OUT Head L temperature output 2
24 GND - GND
25 H1-DASLK LICC2 IN Head L analogue switch clock signal
26 H1-DATA LICC2 IN Head L analogue switch data signal
27 H1-DLD LICC2 IN Head L analogue switch latch signal
28 H1-E-DATA-9-EV IN Even head L data signal9(E)
29 GND - GND
30 H1-E-HE-9 IN Head L heat enable signal9(E)
31 GND - GND
32 H1-F-DATA-10-EV IN Even head L data signal10(F)
33 GND - GND
34 H1-F-DATA-11-EV IN Even head L data signal11(F)
35 GND - GND
36 H1-F-HE-11 IN Head L heat enable signal11(F)
37 GND - GND
38 H1-F-DATA-11-OD IN Odd head L data signal 11(F)
39 GND - GND
40 H1-F-HE-10 IN Head L heat enable signal10(F)
41 GND - GND
42 H1-E-DATA-9-OD IN Odd head L data signal 9(E)
43 GND - GND
44 H1-F-DATA-10-OD IN Odd head L data signal 10(F)
45 GND - GND
46 H1-E-DATA-8-OD IN Odd head L data signal 8(E)
47 GND - GND
48 H1-E-HE-8 IN Head L heat enable signal8(E)
49 GND - GND
50 H1-D-DATA-7-OD IN Odd head L data signal 7(D)
6-11
Chapter 6
T-6-23
J23
1 GND - GND
2 H1-B-HE-2 IN Head L heat enable signal 2(B)
3 GND - GND
4 H1-A-DATA-1-OD IN Odd head L data signal 1(A)
5 GND - GND
6 H1-A-DATA-0-OD IN Odd head L data signal 0(A)
7 GND - GND
8 H1-A-HE-0 IN Head L heat enable signal 0(A)
9 GND - GND
10 H1-A-DATA-0-EV IN Even head L data signal 0(A)
11 GND - GND
12 H1-A-HE-1 IN Head L heat enable signal 1(A)
13 GND - GND
14 H1-A-DATA-1-EV IN Even head L data signal 1(A)
15 GND - GND
16 H1-B-DATA-2-EV IN Even head L data signal 2(B)
17 GND - GND
18 H1-B-DATA-3-EV IN Even head L data signal 3(B)
19 GND - GND
20 H1-C-DATA-4-EV IN Even head L data signal 4(C)
21 GND - GND
22 H1-B-HE-3 IN Head L heat enable signal 3(B)
23 GND - GND
24 H1-C-DATA-5-EV IN Even head L data signal 5(C)
25 H-DASH_LICC2_B IN Analogue switch/AD triggar
26 H1_LT IN Head L latch signal
27 HEAD_3V IN Power supply (+3V)
28 HEAD_3V IN Power supply (+3V)
29 GND - GND
30 H1_CLK IN Head L clock signal
31 GND - GND
32 H1-C-DATA-5-OD IN Odd head L data signal 5(C)
33 GND - GND
34 H1-C-HE-5 IN Head L heat enable signal 5(C)
35 GND - GND
36 H1-D-HE-6 IN Head L heat enable signal 6(D)
37 GND - GND
38 IO-ASIC_SCL IN/OUT Head ROM control signal (clock)
39 GND - GND
40 H1-D-DATA-6-OD IN Odd head L data signal 6(D)
41 GND - GND
42 H1-D-DATA-6-EV IN Even head L data signal 6(D)
43 GND - GND
44 H1-D-DATA-7-EV IN Even head L data signal 7(D)
45 GND - GND
46 IO-ASIC_SDA IN/OUT Head ROM control signal (data)
47 GND - GND
48 H1-D-HE-7 IN Head L heat enable signal 7(D)
49 GND - GND
50 H1-E-DATA-8-EV IN Even head L data signal 8(E)
T-6-24
J24
4 VHT2 OUT Head L transistor drive power supply
6 EEPROM_SDA IN/OUT EEPROM control signal (data)
7 EEPROM_SCL OUT EEPROM control signal (clock)
9 H1-C-DIA1 IN Heal L DI sensor signal 1(C)
6-12
Chapter 6
J24
18 H1-E-DIA1 IN Heal L DI sensor signal 1(E)
19 H1-D-DIA1 IN Heal L DI sensor signal 1(D)
27 H1-D-DIA2 IN Heal L DI sensor signal 2(D)
29 H1-E-DIA2 IN Heal L DI sensor signal 2(E)
30 H1-F-DIA2 IN Heal L DI sensor signal 2(F)
34 H1-C-DATA-5-0D OUT Odd head L data signal 5(C)
37 H1-A-DIA2 IN Heal L DI sensor signal 2(A)
38 H1-B-DIA2 IN Heal L DI sensor signal 2(B)
39 H1-C-HE-4 OUT Head L heat enable signal8(E)
40 H1-D-DATA-7-OD OUT Odd head L data signal 7(D)
44 H1-F-DATA-8-EV OUT Even head L data signal 8(F)
46 H1-C-DIA2 IN Heal L DI sensor signal 2(C)
48 H1-B-DIA1 IN Heal L DI sensor signal 1(B)
52 H1-C-DATA-4-OD OUT Odd head L data signal 4(C)
53 GND - GND
54 GND - GND
55 GND - GND
57 H1-E-DATA-9-EV OUT Even head L data signal9(E)
58 GND - GND
59 H1-D-DATA-6-OD OUT Odd head L data signal6(D)
60 H1-C-HE-5 OUT Head L heat enable signal 5(C)
62 H1-A-DIA1 IN Heal L DI sensor signal 1(A)
64 GND - GND
65 GND - GND
66 GND - GND
67 GND - GND
69 H1-F-DIA1 IN Heal L DI sensor signal 1(F)
71 GND - GND
72 H1-CLK OUT Head L clock signal
73 H1-LT OUT Head L latch signal
6-13
Chapter 6
J24
76 GND - GND
77 GND - GND
78 GND - GND
6-14
Chapter 6
6.2.3 Power supply

0013-3767
CN1
CN2
F-6-3
T-6-25
CN1
1 AC(H) - Power supply (AC 120V or AC 230V)
2 AC(H) - Power supply (AC 120V or AC 230V)
T-6-26
CN2 (Connect to Main controller PCB)

1 HD1_VHFBH IN VH feedback voltage +
2 HD1_VHFBG IN VH feedback voltage -
4 GND - GND
6 GND - GND
7 RGV20(VCC) OUT Power supply (+21.5V)
8 GND - GND
9 VM OUT Power supply (+26V)
10 GND - GND
12 GND - GND
13 VH_ENB IN VH power supply ON/OFF signal
14 PW_CONT IN Normal/power saving switch signal
6-15
Chapter 6
6.2.4 Roll feed unit PCB

0013-3771
J1
J3
J2
F-6-4
T-6-27
J1 (Connect to Main controller PCB)

1 GND - GND
2 GND - GND
3 ROLL_CLK IN Roll motor driver clock signal
4 ROLL_DAT IN Roll motor driver data signal
5 ROLL_STB IN Roll motor driver strobe signal
6 /ROLL_SLEEP IN Roll motor driver sleep signal
9 ROLL_UNIT OUT Roll unit detection signal
10 ROLL_PAPER_SNS OUT Roll media sensor signal
11 ROLL_CAM_SNS OUT Roll cam sensor signal
12 GND - GND
13 OPT_5V IN Power supply (+5V)
T-6-28
J2 (Roll media sensor )

2 GND - GND
3 ROLL_PAPER_SNS IN Roll media sensor signal
T-6-29
J3 (Roll cam sensor, roll motor)

2 GND - GND
3 ROLL_CAM_SNS IN Roll cam sensor signal
4 GND - GND
5 ROLL_OUTAP OUT Roll motor drive signal AP
6 ROLL_OUTAM OUT Roll motor power supply AM
7 ROLL_OUTBP OUT Roll motor drive signal BP
8 ROLL_OUTBM OUT Roll motor power supply BM
6-16
Chapter 6
6.3 Version Up
6.3.1 Firmware Update Tool

0013-3917
Use of the following tools allows you to update the firmware of the main controller incorporated in the printer from the computer.
- imagePROGRAF Firmware Update Tool (for user)

- L Printer Service Tool (for service)
1. imagePROGRAF Firmware Update Tool

This tool has the following function.
- Updating the firmware of printer
Connection method with the computer:

USB, Network, IEEE1394
a) Operation
1) Make sure that the printer is the online mode.
2) Exit all other running programs.
3) Start the imagePROGRAF Firmware Update Tool.
4) According to the internet connection state of the computer, specify in the [Update Method Selection] dialogue box as shown in the followings.
4)-1 In case the computer is connected to the internet, select the [Connect to the internet to get the latest information], and then click [Next].
F-6-5
4)-2 In case the computer is not connected to the internet, select the [Specify the Firmware] and specify the firmware data that downloaded manually, and then click
the [Next].
F-6-6
5) The [Update Possible] is displayed in the [Status] field of the printers that a newer firmware is available.
F-6-7
MEMO:
The overwriting the same firmware version or the firmware downgrade can not execute.
6) Click the printer to update the firmware of to select it, and then click the [Start Update] icon.
F-6-8
6-17
Chapter 6
7) Click [Yes] in the [Update Confirmation] dialogue box.
F-6-9
8) The firmware data is transferred to the printer.
9) After the firmware data transference has completed, the [Finish Update] dialogue box is displayed. Click the [OK].
- When the firmware has been overwritten, the printer restarts.
F-6-10
2. L Printer Service Tool

This tool has the following function.
- Updating the firmware of printer
- Color check of multi sensor
- Displaying the printer information
Connection method with the computer:

USB, Network, IEEE1394
a) Screen description
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
F-6-11
[1] Main menu
Choose the menu to execute.
[2] Main menu button
Choose the menu to execute between the [Information] and the [Firmware] and the [Files].
[3] Sub menu button
The sub menu button is displayed according to the menu chosen by main menu or main menu button.
[4] Printer information area
The information of the printer connected with computer is shown according to the chose menu.
[5] Message area
The message of executed menu is shown. And the message is saved as the text file when choosing the "[Service]-[Save Message]" of the main menu.
6-18
Chapter 6
b) Operation
1) Showing the information of the printer
The data of PRINT INF or status print is shown.
(1) Choose the [Information] of the main menu button or the "[Service]-[Information]" of the main menu.
F-6-12
(2) Choose the printer from the list shown to the printer information area.
MEMO:
- The list is refreshed when choosing the [Refresh] of the sub menu button or the "[View]-[Refresh]" of the main menu.
- The printer is searched according to the setting of the [Specify Search Range] dialogue box after choosing the "[View]-[Specify Search Range]" of the main menu
to display the dialogue box. The five IP addresses at the maximum can register when searching by the IP address.
F-6-13
(3)-1 Choose the [Display PRINT INF] of the sub menu button or the "[Information]-[Display PRINT INF]" of the main menu when showing the PRINT INF.
- The data of PRINT INF is shown by the appointed application software.
(3)-2 Choose the [Display Status Print] of the sub menu button or the "[Information]-[Display Status Print]" of the main menu when showing the Status Print.
- The data of Status Print is shown by the appointed application software.
(3)-3 Choose the [Color Check] of the sub menu button or the "[Information]-[Color Check]" of the main menu when executing the color check.
- This mode judges the OK or NG by checking the color check data that measured by the multi sensor.
- Before executing the color check, need the following media to set to the printer.
Roll media of more than 10 inch width, or cut sheet of more than A4-size.
Paper type: Glossy Photo Paper 170gsm
- When executing the color check, the paper type that selected by the dialogue box must match with the paper type that set to the printer so that the check can
execute correctly.
6-19
Chapter 6
MEMO:
- The application software used to show the data and the folder used to store the files can change by the "[Service]-[Setup]" of the main menu.
[1]
[2]
F-6-14
[1] This menu can change the folder used to store the file.
[2] This menu can change the application software (NotePad or WordPad) used to show the data.
- The printer name can add by the "[Service]-[Add Printer]" of the main menu.
F-6-15
2) Updating the firmware of the printer

The firmware of printer can update according to the following procedure.
(1) Choose the [Firmware] of the main menu button or the "[Service]-[Firmware]" of the main menu.
F-6-16
(2) Choose the printer to update from the list of the printer shown to the printer information area.
6-20
Chapter 6
MEMO:
- The printer list is refreshed when choosing the [Refresh] of the sub menu button or the "[View]-[Refresh]" of the main menu.
- The printer is searched according to the setting of the [Specify Search Range] dialogue box after choosing the "[View]-[Specify Search Range]" of the main menu
to display the dialogue box. The five IP addresses at the maximum can register when searching by the IP address.
F-6-17
(3) Choose the [Specify Firmware] of the sub menu button or the "[Firmware]-[Specify Firmware]" of the main menu.
Specify the folder stored the file by the [Specify Firmware Folder] of the [Specify Firmware] dialogue box or specify the file (.jdl file) by the [Specify Firmware
File] of the dialogue box.
F-6-18
(4) Make sure that the printer is the online mode or the download mode.
The firmware of the printer is updated when choosing the [Transfer Firmware] of the sub menu button or the "[Firmware]-[Transfer Firmware]" of the main menu.
MEMO:
The Printer becomes the force transfer mode when choosing the "[Firmware]-[Force Transfer Mode]" of the main menu. Thereby, you can choose the [Transfer
Firmware] without concerning the status of the printer. And when transferring an incorrect file, as it may destroy the printer firmware, please take extra care.
3) Managing the information of the printer

The list of the PRINT INF or the status print gotten according to the procedure of "1) Showing the information of the printer" can manage.
(1) Choose the [Files] of the main menu button or the "[Service]-[Files]" of the main menu.
- The list of the PRINT INF or the status print gotten so far is shown in the printer information area.
F-6-19
(2) Choose the [Display] of the sub menu button or the "[Files]-[Display]" of the main menu after selecting the list that want to show in the printer information area.
The multiple selection from the lists is possible.
- The data of the selected PRINT INF or status print is shown.
MEMO:
- The user information can set to the list after choosing the [Input User Information] of the sub menu button or the "[Files]-[Input User Information]" of the main
menu. The input of max 511 characters is possible.
- In case of deleting the list, choose the "[Files]-[Delete Files]" of main menu after selecting the list which want to delete from the printer information area.
6-21
Chapter 6
6.4 Service Tools
6.4.1 Tool List

0013-4006
T-6-30
General-purpose tools Remarks

Long Phillips screwdriver Inserting and removing screws
Phillips screwdriver Inserting and removing screws
Flat-head screwdriver Removing the E-ring
Needle-nose pliers Inserting and removing the spring parts
Hex key wrench Inserting and removing hexagonal screws
Flat brush Applying grease
T-6-31
Special-purpose tools Remarks

Carriage Wire Tool Adjusting carriage wire height
(AY3-4493)
Grease FLOIL G-5000H Applying to specified locations
(FY9-6022)
EU-1 Soaks to specified locations
(FY9-6028)
Syringe Draining ink manually
(CK-0541)
Lint free paper Wiping off ink
(CK-0336)
Rubber gloves Preventing ink stains
(QC1-5547)
Penlight Assisting the manual cappings
(CK-0327)
6-22
Chapter 7 SERVICE MODE
Contents
Contents
7.1 Service Mode .................................................................................................................................................................7-1

7.1.1 Service Mode Operation .............................................................................................................................................................. 7-1
7.1.2 Map of the Service Mode............................................................................................................................................................. 7-2
7.1.3 Details of Service Mode............................................................................................................................................................... 7-7
7.1.4 Sample Printout.......................................................................................................................................................................... 7-15
7.2 Special Mode................................................................................................................................................................7-20
7.2.1 Special Modes for Servicing ...................................................................................................................................................... 7-20
Chapter 7
7.1 Service Mode
7.1.1 Service Mode Operation

0013-2121
a) How to enter the Service mode

Enter the Service mode following the procedure below.
1) Turn off the printer.

2) Turn on the printer while holding down the [Paper Source] button and [Information] button.
* Keep pressing the above buttons until "Initializing" appears on the display.
3) "S" is displayed in the upper right corner of the display showing the version.
4) After display of "Online", pressing the [Menu] button displays the SERVICE MODE top menu and the MESSAGE LED flashes.
* The Service mode is added to the options in the Main menu. The Service mode can be entered even in the error status (when an error message is shown on the
display) by turning the power off and then using the above key operation.
b) How to exit the Service mode

Turn off the printer.
c) Key operation in the service mode

- Selecting menus and parameters: [ ] or [ ] button
- Going to the next lower-level menu: [ ] button
- Going to the next higher-level menu: [ ] key
- Determining a selected menu or parameter: [OK] button
7-1
Chapter 7
7.1.2 Map of the Service Mode

0019-6274
The hierarchy of menus and parameters in the Service mode is shown below.
T-7-1
DISPLAY PRINTINF YES/NO : Select YES to execute
print
SYSTEM S/N
TYPE
LF TYPE
TMP
SIZE LF
SIZE LF
SIZE CR
SIZE CR
HEAD S/N
LOT
INK C
---
BK
WARNING 1
---
20
ERROR 1
---
20
INK CHECK 000000
I/O DISPLAY I/O DISPLAY 1
I/O DISPLAY 2
ADJUST PRINT PATTERN NOZZLE 1 : Press the [OK] button to
execute
NOZZLE 2 : Press the [OK] button to
execute
NOZZLE 3 : Press the [OK] button to
execute
OPTICAL AXIS : Press the [OK] button to
execute
LF & HAKUSYA
SENSOR CHECK
HEAD ADJ. MANUAL HEAD ADJ DETAIL : Press the [OK]
button to execute
BASIC : Press the [OK]
button to execute
ADJ. SETTING A A-1 : Adjustment value
entry
---
A-24 : Adjustment value
entry
---
F F-1 : Adjustment value
entry
SAVE SETTINGS YES/NO
RESET SETTINGS YES/NO
NOZZLE CHK POS. YES/NO
GAP CALIB. YES/NO
REPLACE CUTTER YES/NO
7-2
Chapter 7
T-7-2
COUNTER PRINTER LIFE TTL
LIFE ROLL
LIFE CUTSHEET
LIFE A
---
LIFE F
POWER ON
W-INK
CUTTER
WIPE
CARRIAGE PRINT
CR COUNT
CR DIST.
PRINT COUNT
PURGE CLN-A-1
CLN-A-2
CLN-A-3
CLN-A-6
CLN-A-7
CLN-A-10
CLN-A-11
CLN-A-15
CLN-A-16
CLN-A-17
CLN-A-TTL
CLN-M-1
CLN-M-4
CLN-M-5
CLN-M-6
CLN-M-TTL
CLEAR CLR-INK CONSUME
CLR-CUTTER EXC.
CLR-MTC EXC.
CLR-HEAD EXC.
CLR-UNIT A EXC.
CLR-UNIT B EXC.
CLR-UNIT D EXC.
CLR-UNIT F EXC.
CLR-UNIT H EXC.
CLR-UNIT L EXC.
CLR-UNIT P EXC.
CLR-UNIT R EXC.
CLR-UNIT V EXC.
CLR-FACTORY CNT.
7-3
Chapter 7
T-7-3
COUNTER EXCHANGE CUTTER EXC.
MTC EXC.
HEAD EXC.
BOARD EXC.(M/B)
UNIT A EXC.
UNIT B EXC.
UNIT D EXC.
UNIT F EXC.
UNIT H EXC.
UNIT L EXC.
UNIT P EXC.
UNIT R EXC.
UNIT V EXC.
DETAIL-CNT MOVE PRINTER
N-INK CHK(C)
---
N-INK CHK(BK)
MEDIACONFIG-CNT
INK-USE1 INK-USE1(C)
---
INK-USE1(BK)
INK-USE1(TTL)
N-INK-USE1(C)
---
N-INK-USE1(BK)
N-INK-USE1(TTL)
INK-USE2 INK-USE2(C)
---
INK-USE2(BK)
INK-USE2(TTL)
N-INK-USE2(C)
---
N-INK-USE2(BK)
N-INK-USE2(TTL)
INK-EXC INK-EXC(C)
---
INK-EXC(BK)
INK-EXC(TTL)
N-INK-EXC(C)
---
N-INK-EXC(BK)
N-INK-EXC(TTL)
7-4
Chapter 7
T-7-4
COUNTER MEDIA 1 NAME
TTL
TTL
ROLL
ROLL
CUTSHEET
CUTSHEET
---
MEDIA 7 NAME
TTL
TTL
ROLL
ROLL
CUTSHEET
CUTSHEET
MEDIA OTHER NAME
TTL
TTL
ROLL
ROLL
CUTSHEET
CUTSHEET
MEDIASIZE1 ROLL P-SQ 24-36
P-SQ 24-36
P-SQ 17-24
P-SQ 17-24
P-SQ -17
P-SQ -17
P-CNT 24-36
P-CNT 17-24
P-CNT -17
MEDIASIZE2 ROLL D-SQ 24-36
D-SQ 24-36
D-SQ 17-24
D-SQ 17-24
D-SQ -17
D-SQ -17
D-CNT 24-36
D-CNT 17-24
D-CNT -17
MEDIASIZE1 CUT P-SQ 24-36
P-SQ 24-36
P-SQ 17-24
P-SQ 17-24
P-SQ -17
P-SQ -17
P-CNT 24-36
P-CNT 17-24
P-CNT -17
7-5
Chapter 7
T-7-5
COUNTER MEDIASIZE2 CUT D-SQ 24-36
D-SQ 24-36
D-SQ 17-24
D-SQ 17-24
D-SQ -17
D-SQ -17
D-CNT 24-36
D-CNT 17-24
D-CNT -17
HEAD DOT CNT. 1 C
---
BK
TTL
HEAD DOT CNT. 2 C
---
BK
TTL
PARTS CNT. COUNTER A OK/W1/W2/E
PARTS A1 1:00
2:00
3:00
4:00
---
COUNTER V OK/W1/W2/E
PARTS V1 1:00
2:00
3:00
4:00
SETTING Pth ON/OFF
RTC DATE yyyy/mm/dd
TIME hh:mm
PV AUTO JUDGE ON/OFF
INITIALIZE WARNIG : Press the [OK] button to clear
ERROR : Press the [OK] button to clear
ADJUST : Press the [OK] button to clear
W-INK : Press the [OK] button to clear
PURGE : Press the [OK] button to clear
INK-USE CNT : Press the [OK] button to clear
CUTTER-CHG CNT : Press the [OK] button to clear
W-INK-CHG CNT : Press the [OK] button to clear
HEAD-CHG CNT : Press the [OK] button to clear
PARTS-CHG CNT PARTS A1 : Press the [OK]
button to clear
---
PARTS V1 : Press the [OK]
button to clear
PARTS COUNTER PARTS A1 : Press the [OK]
button to clear
---
PARTS V1 : Press the [OK]
button to clear
7-6
Chapter 7
7.1.3 Details of Service Mode

0019-6275
This section provides details of the Service mode menu.
a) DISPLAY
Displays and prints the printer information.
1) PRINF INF
Prints adjustment values in the User menu, [DISPLAY] and [COUNTER] parameters on A4-size or lager paper.
When roll media is used, the layout is optimized according to the media width.
2) SYSTEM
Displays the printer information shown below.
T-7-6
Display Description Unit

S/N Serial number of printer -
TYPE Type setting on main controller PCB -
* iPF605 is represented by 24.
LF TYPE Feed roller type: 0 or 1 -
TMP Ambient temperature degrees C
SIZE LF Detected size of loaded media (feed direction) mm
0 is always detected for the roll media.
SIZE LF Detected size of loaded media (feed direction) inch
0 is always detected for the roll media.
SIZE CR Detected size of loaded media (carriage scan direction) mm
SIZE CR Detected size of loaded media (carriage scan direction) inch
3) HEAD
Displays the following EEPROM information of the printhead.
T-7-7
Display Description
S/N Serial number of printhead
LOT Lot number of printhead
4) INK
Displays the numbers of days passed since installation of the following ink tanks.
T-7-8

BK Number of days passed since the BK ink tank was installed Day(s)
MBK Number of days passed since the MBK ink tank was installed Day(s)
MBK2 Number of days passed since the MBK2 ink tank was installed Day(s)
C Number of days passed since the C ink tank was installed Day(s)
M Number of days passed since the M ink tank was installed Day(s)
Y Number of days passed since the Y ink tank was installed Day(s)
5) WARNING
Displays the warning history (up to 20 events). The newest event has the smallest history number.
6) ERROR
Displays the error history (up to 20 events). The newest event has the smallest history number.
7) INK CHECK
Displays the number of times the remaining ink level detection function was turned off, to accommodate refilled ink cartridges in the order of C, M, Y, MBK, MBK,
BK.
0: Never
1: Executed at least once
7-7
Chapter 7
b) I/O DISPLAY
The status of each sensor and switch is shown in the display.
Sensor and switch status is shown in the display.

ON = 1
OFF or not used = 0
Screen 1
T-7-9
I / O D I S P L A Y 1 Upper row
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Lower row
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 (Display position)
Screen 2
T-7-10
I / O D I S P L A Y 2 Upper row
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Lower row
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 (Display position)
Screens 1 and 2 are selectable with the [ ] and [ ] buttons.

These screens display the associated sensor status as listed in the table below.
T-7-11
Display
Sensor name LCD display contents
position
1 Pump Cam Sensor 0: Sensor ON , 1: Sensor OFF
2 Valve Open/Closed Detection Sensor 0: Sensor ON , 1: Sensor OFF
3 (Not Used) 0
4 (Not Used) 0
5 Spur Cam Sensor 0: Sensor ON , 1: Sensor OFF
6 Lift Cam Sensor 0: Sensor ON , 1: Sensor OFF
7 Feed Roller HP Sensor 0: Sensor ON , 1: Sensor OFF
8 Top Cover Sensor 0: Cover open , 1: Cover close
9 (Not Used) 0
10 Ink Tank Cover Switch 0: Cover open , 1: Cover close
11 (Not Used) 0
12 Paper Detection Sensor 0: Sensor ON , 1: Sensor OFF
13 (Not Used) 0
14 (Not Used) 0
15 (Not Used) 0
16 (Not Used) 0
17 Roll Media Sensor 0: Sensor ON , 1: Sensor OFF
18 Roll Cam Sensor 0: Sensor ON , 1: Sensor OFF
19 (Not Used) 0
20 Cutter Right Position Sensor 0: Sensor ON , 1: Sensor OFF
21 Cutter HP Sensor 0: Sensor ON , 1: Sensor OFF
22 (Not Used) 0
23 (Not Used) 0
24 (Not Used) 0
25 (Not Used) 0
26 Roll unit detection 0: Roll unit not detected , 1: Roll unit detected
27 Cutter unit detection 0: Cutter unit not detected , 1: Cutter unit detected
28 (Not Used) 0
29 (Not Used) 0
30 (Not Used) 0
31 (Not Used) 0
32 (Not Used) 0
7-8
Chapter 7
c) ADJUST
Performs adjustments and prints the adjustment and check patterns necessary for adjusting the printer parts.
1) PRINT PATTERN
T-7-12
Display Description
NOZZLE 1 Prints the nozzle check pattern by single direction/ single pass without using the non-
discharging back up.
It is used to check for the non-discharging nozzles.
- Media size: A4
- Media type: any
NOZZLE 2 Print a 100% solid print pattern (used to check the ink reaction that cannot be checked with
"NOZZLE 1") in the single path direction. Use this method when checking blocked nozzles.
- Use paper with a height equal to or longer than that of A4-sized paper (in portrait orientation).
- Any media type is acceptable.
NOZZLE 3 Print a 100% solid print pattern (used to check the ink reaction that cannot be checked with
"NOZZLE 1") in the single path direction. Use this method when checking blocked nozzles.
(The print drive control method is different from that for "NOZZLE 2".)
- Use paper with a height equal to or longer than that of A4-sized paper (in portrait orientation).
- Any media type is acceptable.
OPTICAL AXIS Prints the pattern and adjusts the optical axis of the multi sensor.
For details, refer to "Disassembly/Reassembly" > "Adjustment and Setup Items" > "Procedure
after replacing the carriage unit or multi sensor".
- Media type: photo glossy paper
LF & HAKUSHA * For Factory

SENSOR CHECK * For Factory
LF & HAKUSYA and SENSOR CHECK are intended for factory adjustment purposes.
No adjustment by service personnel is required.
2) HEAD ADJ.
Set or initialize the registration adjustment values of each printheads.
T-7-13
Display Description
MANUAL HEAD ADJ DETAIL Prints the detail patterns for the manual head adjustment.
After printing, the mode will change to [ADJ. SETTING]. Check the printed patterns and input the set values.
BASIC Prints the basic patterns for the manual head adjustment.
After printing, the mode will change to [ADJ. SETTING]. Check the printed patterns and input the set values.
ADJ. SETTING A to F A-1 to F-1 This mode is to input the registration adjustment values.
It is possible to return the values to the former one by printing the status print before changing the value.
SAVE SETTINGS Save the registration adjustment values that has been input.
RESET SETTINGS Initialize the registration adjustment values (to 0).
3) NOZZLE CHK POS.

This mode is for adjusting the optical axis of the head management sensor. For details, refer to "Disassembly/Reassembly" > "Adjustment and Setup Items" > "Pro-
cedure after replacing the head management sensor".
4) GAP CLIB.
This mode measures the gap between the printhead and media by using the multi sensor and corrects the calibration value.
7-9
Chapter 7
d) REPLACE
1) CUTTER
This mode is for replacing the cutter unit.
e) COUNTER
Displays the life (operation frequency and time) of each unit, print counts for each media type, and else.
The count values can be printed from [PRINT INF].
1) PRINTER: Counters related to product life

T-7-14

LIFE TTL Cumulative number of printed media (equivalent of A4) sheets
LIFE ROLL Cumulative number of printed roll media (equivalent of A4) sheets
LIFE CUTSHEET Cumulative number of printed cut sheets (equivalent to A4) sheets
LIFE A-F Cumulative number of printed media for environments A to F sheets
POWER ON Cumulative power-on time (excluding the sleep time) Hours
W-INK Remaining capacity of the maintenance cartridge %
CUTTER Number of cutting operations (count as 1 by moving back and forth) Times
WIPE Number of wiping operations Times
2) CARRIAGE: Counters related to carriage unit

T-7-15

PRINT Cumulative printing time Hours
CR COUNT Cumulative carriage scan count (count as 1 by moving back and forth) Times
CR DIST. Cumulative carriage scan distance (count as 1 by moving 210mm) Times
PRINT COUNT Cumulative print end count (count as 1 by capping) Times
3) PURGE: Counters related to purge unit

T-7-16

CLN-A-1 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 1 (normal suction) operations Times
CLN-A-2 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 2 (ink level adjusting) operations Times
CLN-A-3 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 3 (initial filling) operations Times
CLN-A-6 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 6 (strong normal suction) operations Times
CLN-A-7 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 7 (aging) operations
CLN-A-10 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 10 (ink filling after secondary transportation) operations Times
CLN-A-11 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 11 (ink filling after head replacement) operations Times
CLN-A-15 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 15 (dot count small suction) operations Times
CLN-A-16 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 16 (sedimented ink agitation) operations Times
CLN-A-17 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 17 (small suction) operations Times
CLN-A-TTL Total number of automatic cleaning operations Times
CLN-M-1 Cumulative number of manual cleaning 1 (normal suction) operations Times
CLN-M-4 Cumulative number of manual cleaning 4 (ink draining from head after head replacement) operations Times
CLN-M-5 Cumulative number of manual cleaning 5 (ink draining from head and tube before transportation ) operations Times
CLN-M-6 Cumulative number of manual cleaning 6 (normal strong suction) operations Times
CLN-M-TTL Total number of manual cleaning operations Times
7-10
Chapter 7
4) CLEAR: Counters related to counter initialization

T-7-17

CLR-INK CONSUME Cumulative count of ink section consumption amount clearing Times
CLR-CUTTER EXC. Cumulative count of cutter replacement count clearing Times
CLR-MTC EXC. Cumulative count of maintenance cartridge replacement count clearing Times
CLR-HEAD EXC. Cumulative count of printhead replacement count clearing Times
CLR-UNIT A EXC. Cumulative count of unit A(waste ink system) replacement count clearing Times
CLR-UNIT B EXC. Cumulative count of unit B(platen duct) replacement count clearing Times
CLR-UNIT D EXC. Cumulative count of unit D(carriage unit) replacement count clearing Times
CLR-UNIT F EXC. Cumulative count of unit F(ink supply system) replacement count clearing Times
CLR-UNIT H EXC. Cumulative count of unit H(purge) replacement count clearing Times
CLR-UNIT L EXC. Cumulative count of unit L(head management sensor) replacement count clearing Times
CLR-UNIT P EXC. Cumulative count of unit P(feed motor) replacement count clearing Times
CLR-UNIT R EXC. Cumulative count of unit R(spur cam) replacement count clearing Times
CLR-UNIT V EXC. Cumulative count of unit V(mist fan unit) replacement count clearing Times
CLR-FACTORY CNT. For factory Times
5) EXCHANGE: Counters related to parts replacement

T-7-18

CUTTER EXC. Cutter replacement count Times
(Count of executing cutter replacement mode)
MTC EXC. Maintenance cartridge replacement count Times
HEAD EXC. Printhead replacement count Times
BOARD EXC.(M/B) Main controller PCB replacement count Times
UNIT A EXC. Unit A (waste ink system) replacement count Times
(Count of executing [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS A])
UNIT B EXC. Unit B (waste ink system) replacement count Times
(Count of executing [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS B])
UNIT D EXC. Unit D (carriage unit) replacement count Times
(Count of executing [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS D])
UNIT F EXC. Unit F (ink supply system) replacement count Times
(Count of executing [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS F])
UNIT H EXC. Unit H (purge unit) replacement count Times
(Count of executing [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS H])
UNIT L EXC. Unit L (head management sensor) replacement count Times
(Count of executing [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS L])
UNIT P EXC. Unit P (feed unit) replacement count Times
(Count of executing [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS P])
UNIT R EXC. Unit R (pick-up system) replacement count Times
(Count of executing [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS R])
UNIT V EXC. Unit V(mist fan unit) replacement count Times
(Count of executing [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS V])
6) DETAIL-CNT: Other counters

T-7-19

MOVE PRINTER Count of [Move Printer] operations Times
N-INKCHK(XX) XX: Ink color Times
Count of turning off the ink remaining level detection for each color
MEDIACONFIG-CNT Count of media registered by media editor Times
7) INK-USE1: Counters related to ink consumption

T-7-20

INK-USE1(XX) XX: Ink color ml
Cumulative consumption amount of generic ink
INK-USE1(TTL) Total amount of the cumulative consumption of generic ink ml
N-INK-USE1(XX) XX: Ink color ml

Cumulative consumption amount of refilled ink
N-INK-USE1(TTL) Total amount of the cumulative consumption of refilled ink ml
7-11
Chapter 7
8) INK-USE2: Counters related to ink consumption

T-7-21

INK-USE2(XX) XX: Ink color ml
Consumption amount of generic ink of the currently installed ink tank.
INK-USE2(TTL) Total consumption amount of generic ink of the currently installed ink tanks ml
N-INK-USE2(XX) XX: Ink color ml
Consumption amount of refilled ink of the currently installed ink tank
N-INK-USE2(TTL) Total consumption amount of refilled ink of the currently installed ink tanks ml
9) INK-EXC: Counters related to ink tank replacement

T-7-22

INK-EXC(XX) XX: Ink color ml
Cumulative count of generic ink tank replacement
INK-EXC(TTL) Total amount of tho cumulative count of generic ink tank replacement ml
N-INK-EXC(XX) XX: Ink color ml

Cumulative count of refilled ink tank replacement
N-INK-EXC(TTL) Total amount of tho cumulative count of refilled ink tank replacement ml
10) MEDIA x (x: 1 to 7): Counters related to media

One to seven media types are displayed individually in order with large cumulative print area.
T-7-23

NAME Media type -
TTL Total amount of cumulative print area of roll media and cut sheet (metric) m2
TTL Total amount of cumulative print area of roll media and cut sheet (inch) Sq.f
ROLL Cumulative print area of roll media (metric) m2
ROLL Cumulative print area of roll media (inch) Sq.f
CUT SHEET Cumulative print area of cut sheet (metric) m2
CUT SHEET Cumulative print area of cut sheet (inch) Sq.f
11) MEDIA OTHER: Counters related to media

Displays the total amount of cumulative print area of the other media type than the above-mentioned
T-7-24

NAME Media type -
TTL Total amount of cumulative print area of roll media and cut sheet (metric) m2
TTL Total amount of cumulative print area of roll media and cut sheet (inch) Sq.f
ROLL Cumulative print area of roll media (metric) m2
ROLL Cumulative print area of roll media (inch) Sq.f
CUT SHEET Cumulative print area of cut sheet (metric) m2
CUT SHEET Cumulative print area of cut sheet (inch) Sq.f
12) MEDIASIZE1 ROLL: Counters related to roll media printing

T-7-25

P-SQ 24-36 Cumulative print area of paper equal to or larger than 24 inches but less than 36 inches (physical size) m2/Sq.f
P-SQ -17 Cumulative print area of paper less than 17 inches (physical size) m2/Sq.f
P-CNT 24-36 Cumulative number of sheets of A4-equivalent paper equal to or larger than 24 inches but less than 36 inches sheets
(physical size)
(physical size)
P-CNT -17 Cumulative number of sheets of A4-equivalent paper less than 17 inches (physical size) sheets
7-12
Chapter 7
13) MEDIASIZE2 ROLL: Counters related to roll media printing

T-7-26

D-SQ 24-36 Cumulative print area of paper equal to or larger than 24 inches but less than 36 inches (data size) m2/Sq.f
D-SQ -17 Cumulative print area of paper less than 17 inches (data size) m2/Sq.f
D-CNT 24-36 Cumulative number of sheets of A4-equivalent paper equal to or larger than 24 inches but less than 36 inches sheets
(data size)
(data size)
D-CNT -17 Cumulative number of sheets of A4-equivalent paper less than 17 inches (data size) sheets
14) MEDIASIZE1 CUT: Counters related to cut sheet printing

T-7-27

P-SQ -17 Cumulative print area of paper less than 17 inches (physical size) m2/Sq.f
(physical size)
(physical size)
P-CNT -17 Cumulative number of sheets of A4-equivalent paper less than 17 inches (physical size) sheets
15) MEDIASIZE2 CUT: Counters related to cut sheet printing

T-7-28

D-SQ -17 Cumulative print area of paper less than 17 inches (data size) m2/Sq.f
(data size)
(data size)
D-CNT -17 Cumulative number of sheets of A4-equivalent paper less than 17 inches (data size) sheets
16) HEAD DOT CNT.1: Counter related to dot count

T-7-29

XX XX: Ink color (x 1,000,000) dots
Dot counts of each colors of the currently installed printhead
TTL Total dot counts of each colors of the currently installed printhead (x 1,000,000) dots
17) HEAD DOT CNT.2: Counter related to dot count

T-7-30

XX XX: Ink color (x 1,000,000) dots
Cumulative dot counts of each colors
TTL Total cumulative dot counts of each colors (x 1,000,000) dots
7-13
Chapter 7
18) PARTS CNT. : Counter related to consumable parts

T-7-31

COUNTER x x: Unit number of consumable parts Day(s)
(For detail, refer to "Maintenance and Inspection" > "Consumable Parts")
Display the status and the days passed since the counter resetting.
- Status
OK: Use rate (until part replacement) of all consumable parts included in each unit are below 90%.
W1: Use rate (until part replacement) of either of the consumable parts included in each unit has reached
90% or more.
W2: Use rate (until part replacement) of either of the consumable parts included in each unit has reached
100%, but no need to stop the printer.
E : Use rate (until part replacement) of either of the consumable parts included in each unit has reached
100%, and the printer needs to be stopped.
PARTS yy 1: yy: Unit number of consumable parts
(For detail, refer to "Maintenance and Inspection" > "Consumable Parts")
Counter of the consumable part (current)
2: Life of the consumable part
3: Use rate until part replacement %
4: Counter of the consumable part (accumulate)
7-14
Chapter 7
f) SETTING
Make various settings.
1) Pth
Turn on or off the head pulse rank control function.
Default: OFF
2) RTC
Set RTC (real time clock) after replacing the lithium battery on the main controller PCB.
T-7-32
Display Description
DATE yyyy/mm/dd Set date
TIME hh:mm Set time
3) PV AUTO JUDGE
Sets ink saver mode.
Default: OFF
g) INITIALIZE
Clear the [DISPLAY] histories, [ADJUST] settings, [COUNTER] values, and other parameters.
T-7-33
Display Description
WARNING Initialize the history of WARNING.
(All displayed contents of [DISPLAY] > [WARNING] will be initialized.)
ERROR Initialize the history of ERROR.
(All displayed contents of [DISPLAY] > [ERROR] will be initialized.)
ADJUST Initialize the value of band adjustment (by user) and head adjustment.
The automatically adjusted value will not be initialized.
W-INK Initialize the remaining capacity (%) of the maitenance cartridge.
(Clear [COUNTER] > [PRINTER] > [W-INK])
PURGE Initialize the counter related to purge unit.
(Clear [COUNTER] > [PURGE])
INK-USE CNT Initialize the consumption amount of ink.
(Clear [COUNTER] > [INK-USE2], and count up [COUNTER] > [CLEAR] > [CLR-INK CONSUME])
CUTTER-CHG CNT Initialize the cutter unit replacement frequency.
(Clear [COUNTER] > [EXCHANGE] > [CUTTER EXC.], and count up [COUNTER] > [CLEAR] > [CLR-CUTTER
EXC.])
W-INK-CHG CNT Initialize the maintenance cartridge replacement frequency.
(Clear [COUNTER] > [EXCHANGE] > [MTC EXC.], and count up [COUNTER] > [CLEAR] > [CLR-MTC EXC.])
HEAD-CHG CNT Initialize the printhead replacement frequency.
(Clear [COUNTER] > [EXCHANGE] > [HEAD EXC.], and count up [COUNTER] > [CLEAR] > [CLR-HEAD
EXC.])
PARTS-CHG PARTS xx xx: Unit number of consumable parts
CNT (For details, refer to "Maintenance and Inspection" > "Consumable Parts")
Initialize the consumable part replacement frequency.
(Clear [COUNTER] > [EXCHANGE] > [UNIT x EXC], and count up [COUNTER] > [CLEAR] > [CLR-UNIT x
EXC.])
PARTS PARTS xx xx: Unit number of consumable parts
COUNTER (For details, refer to "Maintenance and Inspection" > "Consumable Parts")
Initialize the counter amount of the consumable parts.
(Clear [COUNTER] > [PARTS CNT.] > [PARTS x])
* After replacing the consumable part, be sure to execute this menu.
7-15
Chapter 7
7.1.4 Sample Printout

0019-6276
a) PRINTINF
A sample printout that is produced by executing [SERVICE MODE] > [DISPLAY] > [PRINTINF] is shown below, along with instructions about how to interpret it.
xxxx PRINT INF

(1) Firm:00.49 Boot:00.31 MIT(DBF):9303 MIT(DB):1.02 S/N:DF029090
(2) SYSTEM
TYPE:DF029090 24 0 TMP:26 SIZE_LF: 0.0 SIZE_CR: 514.3
HEAD S/N:39410000
HEAD LOT:166L09A0
INK
C :0 M :0 Y :0 MBK :0MBK2 :0 BK :0
WARNING
01:0000 02:0000 03:0000 04:0000 05:0000
06:0000 07:0000 08:0000 09:0000 10:0000
11:0000 12:0000 13:0000 14:0000 15:0000
16:0000 17:0000 18:0000 19:0000 20:0000
ERROR
01:03060A00-2E01 02:0000 03:0000 04:0000 05:0000
06:0000 07:0000 08:0000 09:0000 10:0000
11:0000 12:0000 13:0000 14:0000 15:0000
16:0000 17:0000 18:0000 19:0000 20:0000
INK CHK: C:0 M:0 Y:0 MBK:0 MBK2:0 BK:0
(3) COUNTER
PRINTER
LIFE TTL:0
LIFE ROLL:0 LIFE CUTSHEET:0
LIFE A:0 B:0 C:0 D:0 E:0 F:0
MEDIA 7 MEDIA OTHER
NAME : NAME : OTHER
TTL : 0.0 m2 0.0 sq.f TTL : 0.0 m2 0.0 sq.f
ROLL : 0.0 m2 0.0 sq.f ROLL : 0.0 m2 0.0 sq.f
CUTSHEET : 0.0 m2 0.0 sq.f CUTSHEET : 0.0 m2 0.0 sq.f
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f)

PARTS COUNTER
COUNTER A : OK 36
PARTS A1 : 0.0 36.1 0% 0.0
COUNTER B : OK 36
PARTS B1 : 0.0 64.0 0% 0.0
COUNTER D : OK 36
PARTS D1 1362 13028571 0% 1362
PARTS D2 : 377 6700000 0% 377
PARTS D3 : 2238 16500000 0% 2238
PARTS D4 : 33 60000 0% 33
COUNTER F : OK 36
PARTS F1 : 377 4000000 0% 377
COUNTER H : OK 36
PARTS H1 : 15 50000 0% 15
COUNTER L : OK 36
PARTS L1 : 4 12500 0% 4
COUNTER P : OK 36
PARTS P1 : 0 750 0% 0
COUNTER R : OK 36
PARTS R1 : 0 27500 0% 0
COUNTER V : OK 36
PARTS V1 : 0.0 15.2 0% 0.0
(4) PV AUTO JUDGE : ON(NORMAL) , 1

(a) (b)
F-7-1
7-16
Chapter 7
(1) Version numbers of the firmware installed in the printer, boot ROM, and MIT DB format
(2) Printer information

For more item details, see "Detail of Service Mode" > "a) Display".
(3) Counter information

For more item details, see "Detail of Service Mode" > "e) Counter".
(a) Consumables status
(b) Number of days elapsed since the counter was last reset
(c) Counter value
(d) Value with which consumables reach their replacement timing
(e) Ratio of the current count to the replacement timing
(f) Cumulative counter value
(4) Ink saver mode setting

(a) Ink saver mode status
(b) Number of times ink save mode has been executed (unit: times).
7-17
Chapter 7
b) NOZZLE 1
A sample printout that is produced by executing [SERVICE MODE]> [ADJUST]> [PRINT PATTERN]> [NOZZLE 1] is shown below.
Nozzle Check Pattern SERVICE
F-7-2
c) NOZZLE 2/NOZZLE 3
A sample printout that is produced by executing [SERVICE MODE]> [ADJUST]> [PRINT PATTERN]> [NOZZLE 2] or [NOZZLE 3]is shown below.
F-7-3
d) OPTICAL AXIS
A sample printout that is produced by executing [SERVICE MODE]> [ADJUST]> [PRINT PATTERN]> [OPTICAL AXIS] is shown below.
F-7-4
7-18
Chapter 7
e) DETAIL
A sample printout that is produced by executing [SERVICE MODE]> [ADJUST]> [HEAD ADJ.] > [AUTO HEAD ADJ]> [DETAIL] is shown below.
Printhead Adjustment Pattern
A-1 A-3 A-5 A-7 A-9 A-11 B-1 B-2 B-3 B-4 B-5 B-6
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14
16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
A-2 A-4 A-6 A-8 A-10 A-12 C-1 C-2 C-3 C-4 C-5
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
14 14 14 14 14 14 14
6 6
16 16 16 16 16
8 8 8 8 8
18 18 18
10 10 10 10 10 10 10
12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14
16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
Canon imagePROGRAF iPF600 Printhead Adjustment Pattern
D-1 D-2 D-3 D-4 D-5 D-6

0 0 0 0 0 0
2 2 2 2 2 2
4 4 4 4 4 4
6 6 6 6 6 6
8 8 8 8 8 8
10 10 10 10 10 10
12 12 12 12 12 12
14 14 14 14 14 14
16 16 16 16 16 16
18 18 18 18 18 18
20 20 20 20 20 20
D-7 D-8 D-9 D-10 D-11 D-12

0 0 0 0 0 0
2 2 2 2 2 2
4 4 4 4 4 4
6 6 6 6 6 6
8 8 8 8 8 8
10 10 10 10 10 10
12 12 12 12 12 12
14 14 14 14 14 14
16 16 16 16 16 16
18 18 18 18 18 18
20 20 20 20 20 20
E-1 E-2 E-3 E-4 E-5

0 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4
F-1
0 2 4 6 8
10 12
F-7-5
7-19
Chapter 7
f) BASIC
A sample printout that is produced by executing [SERVICE MODE]> [ADJUST]> [HEAD ADJ.] > [AUTO HEAD ADJ]> [BASIC] is shown below.
Printhead Adjustment Pattern
D-1 D-2 D-3 D-4 D-5 D-6

0 0 0 0 0 0
2 2 2 2 2 2
4 4 4 4 4 4
6 6 6 6 6 6
8 8 8 8 8 8
10 10 10 10 10 10
12 12 12 12 12 12
14 14 14 14 14 14
16 16 16 16 16 16
18 18 18 18 18 18
20 20 20 20 20 20
D-7 D-8 D-9 D-10 D-11 D-12

0 0 0 0 0 0
2 2 2 2 2 2
4 4 4 4 4 4
6 6 6 6 6 6
8 8 8 8 8 8
10 10 10 10 10 10
12 12 12 12 12 12
14 14 14 14 14 14
16 16 16 16 16 16
18 18 18 18 18 18
20 20 20 20 20 20
F-7-6
7-20
Chapter 7
7.2 Special Mode
7.2.1 Special Modes for Servicing

0013-2122
This printer supports the following special modes in addition to the service mode:
- PCB replacement mode

- Download mode
- Counter display mode
1. PCB replacement mode
This mode is used when replacing the main PCB or MC relay PCB.
By executing this mode,
- Backup data of the settings and counter values stored in the MC relay PCB are moved to the new main PCB.
- The data such as the settings and counter values are copied to the MC relay PCB.
a) Entering the PCB replacement mode

Follow the same procedure as that for entering the service mode.
(With the [Paper Source] button and [Information] button pressed down, turn on the [Power] button.)
When the printer starts up, compare the serial number memorized in the main PCB's EEPROM with that memorized in the MC relay PCB's EEPROM. If they do
not match, or no serial number is memorized in either EEPROM, enter the PCB replacement mode.
While you are in the PCB replacement mode, the MESSAGE LED, roll media LED, and ONLINE LED are lit.
b) Procedure
Select "CPU BOARD" or "MC BOARD" using the [ ] and [ ] buttons, and then press the [OK] button to determine it.
- CPU BOARD
Select this after replacing the main PCB.
The data in the MC relay PCB is copied to the main PCB.
- MC BOARD
Select this before replacing the MC relay PCB.
The data in the main controller PCB is copied to the MC relay PCB.
c) Exiting the PCB replacement mode

Turning off the [Power] button of the printer allows you to exit the PCB replacement mode.
For details on how to replace the PCB, see DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly > PCBs.
2. Download mode
Use this mode only when updating the firmware without performing initialization.
This mode can update the firmware even if the printhead and ink tanks have not been installed to the printer.
Reference:
a) Entering the download mode

1) Turning off the [Power] button of the printer.
2) With the [Stop] and [Information] buttons pressed down, turn on the [Power] button of the printer.
* Keep pressing the above buttons until "Initializing" appears on the display.
b) Procedure
When "Download Mode/Send Firmware" is shown on the display, transfer the firmware.
When downloading of the firmware is completed, the printer is turned off automatically.
3. Counter display mode
Use this mode to view only printer counter information.
a) Invoking counter display mode

1) Press the [MENU] button to keep [Information] > [System Info] selected.
2) Press the [ ] button whole holding down the [MENU] button + [OK] button to invoke counter display mode.
b) How to view counter display mode

- S/N: Unit serial number
- CNT: Number of copies printed in A4 terms (unit: copies)
7-21
Chapter 8 ERROR CODE
Contents
Contents
8.1 Outline............................................................................................................................................................................8-1
8.1.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.2 Warning/Error/Service Call Error ..................................................................................................................................8-2
8.2.1 Code Table ................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-2
Chapter 8
8.1 Outline
8.1.1 Outline
0012-6681
The printer indicates errors using the display and LEDs.

If an error occurs during printing, the printer status is also displayed on the status monitor of the printer driver.
The following three types of errors are displayed on the display:
- Warning
Status where the print operation can be continued without remedying the cause of the problem. This can, however, adversely affect the printing results.
- Error
Status where the print operation is stopped, and the regular operation cannot be recovered until the cause of the problem is remedied.
- Service call error

When a service call error occurs, the error is not cleared and the error indication remains on the operation panel even if the printer is powered off and on again.
(Occurrence of the service call error is indicated again at power-on.)
This measure is taken to prevent user's recovery of the service call error and damages to the printer.
Service call errors can be cleared, however, by starting up the printer in the service mode.
The codes of warning and error and service call error are common in all models.
Note that some of the warnings, errors, and service call error described in the following tables may not appear in this printer.
In addition, the message that appears on the screen may not be the same as what is described in the table.
The first 4 digits of Warning and Error code show the following description.
The first 2 digits of code Description

01xxxxxx-xxx Warning
03xxxxxx-xxx Error
The next 2 digits of code Description

xx01xxxx-xxxx Jam-related
xx03xxxx-xxxx Cover-related
xx06xxxx-xxxx Media-related
xx13xxxx-xxxx Controller-related
xx1Axxxx-xxxx HDD-related
xx32xxxx-xxxx Media-related
xx34xxxx-xxxx PDL-related
xx80xxxx-xxxx Printhead-related
xx81xxxx-xxxx Inktank-related
xx83xxxx-xxxx Inktank-related
xx84xxxx-xxxx Maintenance cartridge-related
xx86xxxx-xxxx Print-related
xx87xxxx-xxxx Cutter-related
xx89xxxx-xxxx Media take-up unit-related
xx8Bxxxx-xxxx Stacker-related
xx90xxxx-xxxx Version up-related
8-1
Chapter 8
8.2 Warning/Error/Service Call Error
8.2.1 Code Table

0032-0886
Code
Panel display Panel display
(last 4 digits) Explanation/Detection sequence Remedial Action
(Large LCD) (Small LCD)
- Sheet printing Paper mismatch (cut sheet) Printing on cut sheet is not functional
is selected, but Print data having a cut sheet print with a media take-up unit in use.
a roll is loaded. specification has been received with media
take-up unit use being selected.
- Media Type not Media Check Paper mismatch (cut sheet) Check the cassette pick-up setting/
compatible with Please Cancel Cassette pickup has been specified for paper type.
cassette. Cas Cannot Feed paper that does not support cassette pickup.
Check Media Type. Please Check
Stop: Stop Printing

- Regular printing Paper mismatch (cut sheet) Check the cassette pick-up setting/
is selected, but Print data having a manual feed print paper type.
a roll is loaded. specification has been received at the
completion of roll paper pickup.
Press OK,
remove the roll,
and load sheets.
- Papr Type Mismatch PaprTyp Mismatch Paper mismatch (type) This is a warning and allows continued
(1) Mismatch following the selection of printing.
any of the following menu choices:
- [Warning Indication] has been selected
for [Paper Mismatch Detection].
- [ON] has been selected for [Paper Error
Skip].
(2) On forced printing following a
mismatch resulting from the selection of
the following menu option:
- [Pause] has been selected for [Paper
Mismatch Detection].
- Paper Mismatch Paper mismatch (both type and size) This is a warning and allows continued
Skip].
- Papr Size Mismatch PaprSiz Mismatch Paper mismatch (size) This is a warning and allows continued
Skip].
- Cannot print Paper mismatch (size) Replace the paper with appropriate
as specified. When performing internal printing, paper one.
loaded is smaller than the size specified for
Lift the release each print purpose.
lever and replace
paper with XXX [XXX]: appropriate paper size
(vertical) or larger
- Sheet printing Paper mismatch (cut sheet) Load cut sheet.
is selected. No cassette paper has been loaded when
data having a cut sheet specification is
Press Load/Eject received. (Paper type /size not determined)
and load sheets.
- Sheet printing Paper mismatch (cut sheet) Load cut sheet.
is selected. No cassette paper has been loaded when
received.
(Paper type /size not determined)
- Paper Pos Wrong Paper Pos Wrong Invalid paper loading position
Paper is invalidly positioned on the platen.
- Turn on the media Printing has started with the media take-up Switch on the media take-up unit.
take-up unit. unit setting of [Use] and with the media
take-up unit switched off. *A measure for a third-party media
take-up unit that is not connected to the
main unit.
8-2
Chapter 8
Code
- Media take-up unit Media take-up unit use has been set to [Do 1. Press the [Online] button to set the
ready. not use] at the start of printing when the media take-up unit use setting to force
media take-up unit is active. [Use] and print.
Online: Print 2. Press the [Stop] key to cancel
Stop: Stop Printing printing.
- End of paper feed. Feed Limit.. Forced feed limit The message clears automatically 2
Cannot feed Paper being manually fed in the return seconds later.
paper more. direction (back-feeding) has reached the Check the Paper detection sensor/
pinch roller position. Media sensor sensor (I/O mode).
- Close Ink Tank Ink tank cover open while printing The message clears when the ink tank
Cover On a model having a subtank, the ink tank cover is closed.
cover opened while printing. (Printing is Check the sensor (I/O mode).
allowed to continue.)
- The roll feed unit The roll unit has been pulled out during Close the roll unit.
is loose. Push it standby or printing on the lower roll paper
all the way in. or cut sheet A3 or less.
- Prepare for parts W Level 1 Durable parts replacement due soon Check the parts counter and prepare
replacement. Consumables Low Any of the parts counters has reached the target unit or Refresh Service Kit.
Call for service. warning level 1. Initialize the parts counter for the
- Parts replacement W Level 2 Durable parts replacement due soon target unit after the replacement.
time has passed. Repl Consumables Any of the parts counters has reached
Call for service. warning level 2.
1000 Ink Level: Check Ink Lvl: Chk XX Ink tank near-empty (continued use 1. Replace the tank (continued usage
to Not much ink is allowed) allowed).
100C left. Prepare to The remaining volume of ink is 2. If the problem persists after the tank
replace the ink. diminishing (below the pin check level). has been replaced, the remaining ink
(XX: Target color display) detection system is at fault. (Replace
the supply unit or check catching wire
Last 2 digits of error code: or connection status of harness.)
00:Bk, 01:Y, 02:M, 03:C, 04:PM, 05:PC,
06:MBk1, 07:MBk2, 08:GY, 09:PGY,
0A:R, 0B:B, 0C:G
100F End of paper feed. End of paper feed. The limit of forced paper feeding. The The message is cleared automatically
Cannot feed media reached to a pinchroller at feeding after displaying for 2sec.
paper any more. backfeed media manually. Confirmation of Paper detection
(not an error or a failure) sensor/ Media sensor sensor (I/O
mode)
1010 Problem with CheckPrintout:LR Head non-ejection warning (Check 1. Check image quality. (Unless there
Printhead L/R printout/ possible to continue printing) are problems with the image quality,
Chk printing results there is no need to replace the
Check printed Check Printout See 280C for detection criteria. printhead.)
document. 2. Replace the printhead.
1012 Problem with CheckPrintout:R Printhead R non-ejection warning (double-

Printhead R head model)
Chk printing results (Check printout/ possible to continue
printing)
See 280C for detection criteria.

1013 Problem with CheckPrintout:L Printhead L non-ejection warning (double-
Printhead L head model)
Chk printing results (Check printout/ possible to continue
printing)
See 280C for detection criteria.

1015 This type of paper GL2: Unsup. papr HP-GL2 error: out of the scope of paper When [Warning Indication] is selected
is not compatible GL2: Incompatible paper support Replace with appropriate paper.
with HP-GL/2. type [Warning Indication] or [Pause] have been
Press Online Starts printing selected for [Paper Mismatch Detection]. When [Pause] is selected
1. Press the [Online] button to force
The paper that is being fed does not support printing.
HP-GL/2 printing; that is, a paper type that Caution) Due to use of image process
does not have a required print mode has table (LUT) defined for HP-GL/2
been set. compatible paper different from the
specified paper, you might have a
problem in quality of image.
2. Press the [Stop] button to cancel
printing.
1021 Papr Type Mismatch MediaType Mismatch Paper mismatch (type) Continued printing is allowed.
With [Warning Indication] is selected for Check driver setting.
[Paper Mismatch Detection], the type of Replace with appropriate paper.
loaded paper mismatches the specified
type. Or, with [Pause] is selected for [Paper
Mismatch Detection], the [Online] button
was pressed to execute forced printing.
1022 Papr Type Mismatch MediaType Mismatch Paper mismatch (type) Continued printing is allowed.
With [Warning Indication] is selected for Check driver setting.
[Paper Mismatch Detection], the type of Replace with appropriate paper.
loaded paper mismatches the specified
type. Or, with [Pause] is selected for [Paper
Mismatch Detection], the [Online] button
was pressed to execute forced printing.
8-3
Chapter 8
Code
1030 GARO W1221 GARO W1221 (Image mode)Unknown command 1. Identify the model.
A character that is located within bounds of 2. If the error has occurred with RIP,
a group character or end parameter try with the printer driver.
character but that is not defined as a 3. Try in an alternative environment (I/
command has been detected during Image F, PC).
mode command decoding.
1031 GARO W1222 GARO W1222 (Image mode) Invalid parameter count (no
parameters)
A numeric field has not been identified as
being numeric during Image mode
command decoding.
1032 GARO W1223 GARO W1223 (Image mode) Required item missing
A character out of bounds has been
detected where a group or end parameter
character ought to exist, during Image
mode command decoding.
1034 GARO W1225 GARO W1225 (Image mode)Other warning
A character other than <ESC> has been
detected right after the image mode
analysis module entered Image mode or
when the decoding of a single command
ended.
1035 GARO W1231 GARO W1231 (Setup mode)Unknown command
A command character string other than
RESET, SET, OPCMT0 and OPCMT2 has
been detected in a PJL command.
1036 GARO W1232 GARO W1232 (Setup mode)Invalid parameter count
Too many or too few parameters have been
detected during Setup mode command
decoding.
1037 GARO W1233 GARO W1233 (Setup mode) Required item missing
The exit parameter is missing in the
EnterGAROMode command and the
UniversalExitLanguage command used in
Setup mode.
1038 GARO W1234 GARO W1234 (Setup mode)Data out of bounds
A character string that is not defined as an
environmental variable has been detected.
An unknown environmental variable has
been detected.
A character string that is not defined as an
environmental variable value has been
detected.
The value of an unknown environmental
variable has been detected.
1039 GARO W1235 GARO W1235 (Setup mode) Other warning
A character string other than the @PJL
prefix has been detected while the analysis
module was idle.
103A GARO W1226 GARO W1226 (Image mode) Image processing table error 1. Retransmit.
No image processing table is being 2. Check with a different interface
transmitted, a required image processing choice.
table is unavailable, or an image processing 3. Try by printing other data.
table contains a value out of bounds. 4. With RIP, print from the print
driver.
Supplement: If this error occurs, the
print result would appear blank.
1040 GL2: W0501 GL2: W0501 HP/GL2 error; Insufficient memory 1. Reduce the size of rendering data.
The memory is full. capacity 2. Replace with HP RTL data for
The size of drawing data exceeds the manipulation with On The Fly*.
processing capacity.
*: On The Fly: The method to transmit
data in sequence from paper. The
software that generates HP-GL/2 data
has this option to specify. Select this
option to save the memory usage of the
printer.
1041 GL2: W0502 GL2: W0502 HP/GL2 error; invalid parameter Verify the data and fix it.
The parameter is out Data having an invalid number of types of
of range. parameters that follow the command has
been detected.
1043 GL2: W0504 GL2: W0504 HP/GL2 error; Invalid command Verify the data and fix it.
This command is not A command that is not defined in HP-GL/2
supported. or HP RTL is included.
1047 GL2: W0903 GL2: W0904 HP/GL2 error; replot buffer overflow 1. Reduce the size of rendering data.
The memory is full. Data storage buffers have run short. 2. Replace with HP RTL data for
manipulation with On The Fly*.

printer.
8-4
Chapter 8
Code
1048 GL2: W0904 GL2: W0903 HP/GL2 error; polygon buffer overflow 1. Reduce the size of rendering data.
The memory is full. The size of drawing data exceeds the 2. Replace with HP RTL data for
processing capacity. manipulation with On The Fly*.

printer.
1049 Before borderless When print data with borderless printing Open the platen shutter.
printing, move the specification has been received, platen
blue platen switch. shutter was closed.
1050 Blue platen switch Cleaning of platen shutter is necessary. Clean the platen shutter.
is dirty. Please
clean the switch. When reading the platen shutter in
multisensor, borderless printing data has
been received in unstable output condition.
1051 Paper Too Small Paper mismatch (size) Continued printing allowed.
Size clip warning Check driver settings.
With [Warning Indication] selected for Replace with appropriate paper.
[Paper Mismatch Detection] in the menu
settings, the size of paper loaded is smaller
than that of specified from driver.
1052 Borderless printng Borderless printing not available Replace with appropriate paper.
not possible. Check (unsupported size)
supported paper.
With [Warning Indication] selected for
[Paper Mismatch Detection] in the menu
settings, borderless printing data is
received, but roll paper not supporting
borderless printing has been loaded.
1053 Paper position not Borderless printing not available (physical) Reload/ replace the roll paper.
suitable for With [Warning Indication] selected for
borderless printing. [Paper Mismatch Detection] in the menu
settings, borderless printing data is
received, but roll paper loaded is more than
1mm off the predefined position for the
pre-ejection opening at the counter-HP
side.
1053 Borderless printng Reload/ replace the roll paper.
not possible. Check Check the borderless spacer.
pap. pos. or spacer
1054 PaprWidth Mismatch Paper mismatch (size) Continued printing allowed.
With [Warning Indication] selected for Check driver settings.
[Paper Mismatch Detection] in the menu Replace with appropriate paper.
settings, the width of roll paper loaded and
that of specified by data do not match.
1056 Move the blue The multisensor detected that the platen Move the platen shutter relevant to the
to platen switch No.XX shutter used for pre-ejection was closed. message to the right, to open it.
1062 to the right. Detection timing:
-At paper loading
-At start of first printing (after upper cover
is opened and closed, or recovery from
sleep mode, or the power is turned on with
paper loaded)
The following list shows the last 2 digits of

error codes and the corresponding
messages.
56:No.2, 57:No.3, 58:No.459:No.5,
5A:No.6, 5B:No.75C:No.8,
5D:No.9, 5E:No.105F:No.11, 60:No.12,
61:No.13, 62:No.14
1100 Prepare for MTCart Full Soon Maintenance cartridge near-full (continued Prepare a maintenance cartridge.
maint cart usage allowed)
replacement. Near-full has been detected from the dot
count and the usage period (drying time).
<Maintenance cartridge detection timings>

The presence of a maintenance cartridge is
detected at the following timings:
1. Before printing/during printing (twice
per second)/at the end of printing/ between
pages
2. Before a recovery operation/during a
recovery operation (twice per second)/
before opening of the ink supply valve
3. When the cartridge is removed and
inserted following the occurrence of an
error or warning.
1101 Replace part soon. Mist Full Soon Mist count near-full Check the parts counter and replace the
Waste ink near-full has been detected from target unit or Refresh Service Kit.
the dot count. Initialize the parts counter for the
target unit after the replacement.
8-5
Chapter 8
Code
1400 No ink left. Ink tank empty (continued use allowed) 1. Replace the tank.
to Press OK and The ink tank has run out of ink, but a 2. Failure of remaining ink detection
140C replace ink tank. certain volume of ink is reserved in the system.
Ink tank is empty. subtank. (The reserved volume of ink is put (Replace the supply unit /check the
Replace the ink to use after the remaining ink falls below bundled wires.)
tank. the pin check level.)
Displayed only on models having a
subtank.
(XX: Display applicable colors)
Last 2 digits: 00:Bk, 01:Y, 02:M, 03:C,
04:PM, 05:PC, 06:MBk1, 07:MBk2,
08:GY, 09:PGY, 0A:R, 0B:B, 0C:G
1410 No ink tank Ink tank not installed (continued use 1. Mount the tank.
to loaded. allowed) 2. Failure of remaining ink detection
141C Check ink tank. The ink tank is not installed but a sufficient system.
volume of ink is left in the subtank. (Replace the supply unit /check the
Displayed only on models having a bundled wires.)
subtank.
This occurs in cases such as when the ink
tank cover is opened during printing, and
the ink tank is removed. (XX: Displays
applicable colors)
Last 2 digits: 10:Bk, 11:Y, 12:M, 13:C,
14:PM, 15:PC, 16:MBk1, 17:MBk2,
18:GY, 19:PGY, 1A:R, 1B:B, 1C:G
200A Paper size not Paper Paper size detection failure
detected. Press Load/Eject Please Reload Cannot detect the paper width (poorly
and reload the Size Undetected positioned paper).
paper.
Paper size not
detected. Reload paper.
Paper size not
detected. Press OK and
reload the paper.
200B Paper size not Paper Paper size detection failure
detected. Reload paper. Please Reload Paper is invalidly positioned on the platen.
Size Undetected
200C Paper size not Paper Paper size detection failure
detected. Please Reload Cannot detect the leading edge of the
Press Load/Eject Size Undetected paper.
and reload the The leading edge of paper has been located
paper. by coarse detection but not by a second
Paper size not round of fine detection (up to 300 mm)
detected. (semi-transparent paper).
Reload paper. (This is the message when the release lever
operation is not necessary.)
Paper size not Papr Size Paper size detection failure
detected. Undetected Cannot detect the leading edge of the
Lift the release Press Online Key paper.
lever and reload and Reload The leading edge of paper has been located
the paper. by coarse detection but not by a second
round of fine detection (up to 300 mm)
(semi-transparent paper).
200D Paper size not Paper Paper size detection failure 1. Check to see if roll paper are not
detected. Please Reload Cannot detect the trailing edge of the paper. loaded in the cut sheet mode.
Press Load/Eject Size Undetected -Cannot detect the trailing edge of the cut 2. Load cut sheet.
and reload the sheet loaded after they have been fed 50
paper. mm.
Leading edge -Cannot locate the trailing edge of the
detection error. paper that has been found by coarse
Lift the release detection.
lever and align
leading edge
with orange line.
Paper size not
detected.
Lift the release
lever and reload
the paper.
Paper size not
detected.
Reload paper.
200E This paper Paper Size Paper is too small 1. Check paper conditions (soiling,
cannot be used. Please Check The width and length of paper detected are tear-offs, residual paper chips, residual
Check supported Paper Too Small shorter than the supported size (1.5% trimming cuts, folds)/size.
paper sizes. margin). 2. Has the paper been fed successfully
This paper Paper Size (without slippage under a load or any
cannot be used. Please Check influence)?
Check supported Paper Too Small 3. Has the LF adjustment value set
paper sizes. Press Online Key correctly?
Load/Eject: Change Paper 4. Hasn't the loaded paper shrunk to
below its margin in the particular
environment?
8-6
Chapter 8
Code
200F This paper Paper Size Paper mismatch (size) 1. Check paper conditions (soiling,
cannot be used. Please Check Paper is too large tear-offs, residual paper chips, residual
Check supported Paper Too Large -The width and length of paper detected are trimming cuts, folds)/size.
paper sizes. longer than the supported size (1.5% 2. Has the paper been fed successfully
This paper Paper Too Large margin). (without slippage under a load or any
cannot be used. Please Check -Cannot detect the leading edge of paper influence)?
Check supported Press Online Key even when the paper has been fed by 1300 3. Has the LF adjustment value set
paper sizes. and Reload mm for roll paper and by the size correctly?
Load/Eject: Change Paper mentioned above for cut sheet. 4. Hasn't the loaded paper shrunk to
-Cannot detect the width of paper even below its margin in the particular
when the paper is fed by the size mentioned environment?
above.
2010 Paper loaded askew. Paper Askew Skew (skewed right) Reload the paper.
Press Load/Eject Please Reload
and reload the Paper Skew Paper is determined skewed as its edge is
paper. read by the multisensor.
Paper loaded askew. Paper Loaded
Reload the paper. Crooked
Press Online Key
and Reload
Paper loaded askew. Paper loaded
Lift the askew.
release lever. Remove paper
Paper loaded askew.
Lift the release
lever and reload
the paper.
Paper loaded askew.
Press OK and
reload the paper.
Paper loaded askew
Lift the release lever.
2015 Cannot cut paper. <When small LCD 1> Cutting failure/jam detected due to a
Press Load/Eject Cutting Error cutting failure
and reload the Please Cut Papr An idle cutter unit or a cutter blade that is
paper. too blunt to cut sheet has been detected by
Cannot cut paper. <When small LCD 2> the paper leading edge detection sequence.
Reload the paper. Press (upper arrow) Key
to Release Paper
Cannot cut paper.
Lift the release
lever and reload
the paper.
Paper cutting
failed. Lift the
release lever.
2016 No sheets. Sheets Paper loosened out of position while Reload the paper.
Press Load/Eject Please Load printing
and reload the Sheet Not Loaded The trailing edge of paper has been
paper. detected at least 20 mm shorter than the
No sheets. length of cut forms detected.
Lift the release
lever and reload the sheets.
The paper is too
small.
Check paper size.
Sheet removed.
Lift the release
lever.
Paper jam. Paper Jam Jam while picking up, ejecting or printing 1. Open and close the release lever to
Press Load/Eject and reload Press (upper arrow) Key on paper reload the paper.
the (A sequence of removing jams with the 2. Remove the paper once and then
paper. pinch roller released is required) refeed it.
Paper jam. Paper Jam Virtually all recovery errors that could
Manually rewind roll Press (upper arrow) Key occur in connection with paper pickup are
all the way. Paper Eject Err handled.
Paper jam. Remove Paper

Manually rewind roll
all the way
and press OK.
Cannot feed paper
Lift the release
lever and reload paper.
Cannot feed paper.
Reload the paper.
Cannot feed paper.
Press Load/Eject
and reload the
paper.
8-7
Chapter 8
Code
2017 Paper size not detected. Paper Paper (right) side detection error
Lift the release Please Reload 1. Multisensor error on light quantity
lever and reload Size Undetected adjustment
the paper. Press (upper arrow) Key 2. The read reference paper edge is 5 mm or
more apart from its theoretical position.
Paper size is undetected. Papr Size 3. Cannot locate the edge of reference
Reload paper. Undetected paper.
Paper size not Press Online Key

detected. and Reload
Press Load/Eject
and reload the
paper.
Paper size not
detected. Lift the
release lever.
Could not detect
paper size. Push
release lever back, then pull
out the
cut sheet.
Could not detect
paper size.
Press OK, then Insert roll
paper straight into feed
slot..
2018 Paper size not detected. Papr Size Paper (left) side detection error
Lift the release Undetected The non-reference edge of paper has been
lever and reload Press Online Key located by coarse detection but not by a
the paper. and Reload second round of fine detection.
Paper size not detected.
Reload paper.
Paper size not detected. Paper
Press Load/Eject Please Reload
and reload the Size Undetected
paper. Press (upper arrow) Key
Paper size not detected.
Lift release lever.
Could not detect
paper size. Push
release lever back, then pull
out the
cut sheet.
Could not detect
paper size.
Press OK, then insert roll
paper
straight into feed
slot.
2019 Cannot cut paper. Cutting failure/jam detected due to a
Lift the release cutting failure
lever and reload An idle cutter unit or a cutter blade that is
the paper. too blunt to cut sheet has been detected by
Cannot cut paper. the paper leading edge detection sequence.
Reload the paper. Or, cutter unit home position detection was
failed.
Paper cutting
failed. Lift the
release lever.
Paper cutting
failed. Remove the paper
after cutting at the
top of feed slot. Push the
release
lever back.
201A Paper not aligned When loading cut sheet, paper (right) side The error is cleared by releasing the
with right guide. detection was failed. release lever. After that, load paper to
Press OK and the correct position.
then reload the
roll paper.
Paper not aligned
with right guide. Push the
release
lever back, then
reload the paper.
201B Roll paper is not When loading roll paper, paper (right) side Paper is ejected automatically, and by
securely in contact detection was failed. pressing the [OK] button the error is
with roll holder. cleared. After that, load paper to the
Press OK, then correct position.
re-attach the roll
paper.
8-8
Chapter 8
Code
201C Paper jam While printing, paper width was detected By releasing the release lever, move to
Push the release to have fluctuated beyond the predefined the loading sequence, and load paper
lever back. value. to the correct position.
Failure of detecting right edge of the paper
(cut paper, in printing).
201D Paper jam While printing, paper width was detected 1. Cut the paper near the feed slot, and
Remove the paper to have fluctuated beyond the predefined remove the paper.
after cutting at the value. 2. Release the release lever, and load
top of feed slot. Push the Failure of detecting right edge of the paper the paper to the correct position.
release (cut paper, in printing).
lever back.
201E Media Type not Media Check Paper mismatch (cut sheet) Check the cassette pick-up setting/
Stop: Stop Printing
2405 Borderless printng Roll Paper Chk Invalid paper loading position (borderless Reload the roll paper.
not possible. Check Width/Spcr printing) Check spacers
Lift the release Borderless Prtng The position at which paper is loaded is
lever and reload Not Possible unfit for borderless printing.
the paper. Data with a borderless print specification
has been received while the left or right
Online: Print edge of roll paper was off the center of the
Bordless Printing borderless print idle ejection port at the
not possible. Lift completion of roll paper pickup.
release lever and
reload the paper.
Bordless Printing
not possible. Lift
release lever and
reload the paper
Online: Not bordrlss
Stop: Stop Printing
Paper position not
suitable for
borderless printing
Borderless printng
not possible. Check
roll position.
Online: Print
Load/Eject: Change Paper
Borderless printng
not possible. Check
roll width and
spacers.
Online: Print
Load/Eject: Change Paper
2406 Borderless printng Check Supported Borderless print data not printable (logic) Reset the driver and RIP.
not possible. Check paper Paper. Borderless print data was received at the
size setting. No Borderless w/ start of printing and one or more of the
Online: Print This Roll Paper following requirements are met at the same
Load/Eject: Change Paper time:
Borderless printng -A feeder slot other than one for roll paper
not possible. Check has been specified in the data.
supported paper. -A paper type that does not support
borderless printing has been set on the data.
-Banner printing has been specified on the
data at the same time.
-A paper size that does not support
borderless printing has been specified in a
job for which paper had already been fed.
2407 Borderless printng It occurs when all of the following Reset /replace the roll paper.
not possible. Paper conditions are met at start of printing. Confirm and explain usage
stretched or shrank. environment.
Confirm usage cond. -Borderless printing data has been
of the paper. received.
-Roll paper has been loaded, and its paper
width and edge position recognized at
loading are within the supported range of
borderless printing.
-As a result of right/left side edge detection
after start of print processing, it was
detected as beyond the supported range of
borderless printing.
2408 Borderless printng At the start of borderless printing, roll Replace with appropriate paper.
not possible. Check paper whose size doesn't support
supported paper. borderless printing has been loaded.
Bordless Printing
not possible. Lift
release lever and
reload the paper.
8-9
Chapter 8
Code
2409 Paper position is not Invalid paper loading position (suspended Reload/ replace the roll paper.
suitable for job/ borderless printing) Check roll paper.
borderless printing. All of the following conditions were met. 1) Select "Normal printing. (No
Check paper position. -Borderless printing data has been borderless printing)" and enforce
Print to normal printing. received. printing.
Stop printing. -Roll paper whose paper loading position is Borderless print setting is ignored.
not suitable for borderless printing has Print with default margin.
been loaded. Default margin depends on selected
-The right or left edge of roll paper is more feeding trays and media type.
than 1mm off the prescribed position of the 2) Select "Stop printing" or press "stop
pre-ejection opening. button"to stop printing.
240A Borderless printing is Borderless printing is not possible 3) Select "replace printing" or release
not possible. Check (suspended job/ unsupported size). All of releasing lever.
supported paper. the following conditions are met.
Check paper position. -Borderless printing data has been
Print to normal printing. received.
Stop printing. -Roll paper not supporting borderless
printing has been loaded.
2500 Ink tank is empty. No Ink Left Ink tank empty (continued use not allowed) 1. Replace the tank.
to Press OK and (lower arrow) The ink tank has run out of ink. (The 2. If the problem persists after the tank
250C replace ink tank. reserved volume of ink is put to use after has been replaced, the remaining ink
No ink left. the remaining ink falls below the pin check detection system is at fault (replace the
Replace ink tank. level.) supply unit or check the bundled
(In the small LCD, the lower arrow points wires).
to the color in question.)
The last 2 digits signify applicable colors.

00:Bk, 01:Y, 02:M, 03:C, 04:PM, 05:PC,
06:MBk1,
07:MBk2, 08:GY, 09:PGY, 0A:R, 0B:B,
0C:G
2510 Ink level is Online Key Remaining ink level unknown (continued Replace the ink tank.
to unknown. Press To Print use allowed)
251C Check ink level. Ink Lvl Unknown The level of ink remaining in the tank is
Press Online to start Press Online detected when the tank cover is closed.
printing. Consumption has exceeded the original ink
capacity (mismatch detected).
Refill ink may have been used.
(In the small LCD, the lower arrow points

10:Bk, 11:Y, 12:M, 13:C, 14:PM, 15:PC,
16:MBk1,
17:MBk2, 18:GY, 19:PGY, 1A:R, 1B:B,
1C:G
2520 No ink tank Ink Tank Ink tank not installed (continued use not 1. Remove and then reinstall the tank.
to loaded. Check XX allowed) 2. Replace the tank.
252C Press OK and No Ink Tank On a model that is furnished with a 3. Failure of remaining ink detection
check ink tank. Check Ink Tank subtank, this error is indicated if the system.
No ink tank subtank has run out of ink and the state of (Replace the supply unit /check the
loaded. an ink tank not being installed is detected. bundled wires.)
Check ink tank.
20:Bk, 21:Y, 22:M, 23:C, 24:PM, 25:PC,
26:MBk1,
27:MBk2, 28:GY, 29:PGY, 2A:R, 2B:B,
2C:G
2540 Ink tank error. Ink Tank Ink tank ID error 1. Replace the tank.
to Press OK and Replace BK The type of ink tank is wrong. 2. Failure of remaining ink detection
254C replace ink tank. Ink Tank Error system.
Wrong ink tank. Repl. Ink Tank The last 2 digits signify applicable colors. (Replace the supply unit /check the
Replace ink tank. 40:Bk, 41:Y, 42:M, 43:C, 44:PM, 45:PC, bundled wires.)
46:MBk1,
Wrong ink tank. 47:MBk2, 48:GY, 49:PGY, 4A:R, 4B:B,
Press OK and 4C:G
replace ink tank.
2560 Ink tank error. Ink Tank Ink tank EEPROM error 1. Replace the tank.
to Press OK and Replace BK There is an error in tank EEPROM. 2. Failure of remaining ink detection
256C replace ink tank. Ink Tank Error system.
Repl. Ink Tank The last 2 digits signify applicable colors. (Replace the supply unit /check the
60:Bk, 61:Y, 62:M, 63:C, 64:PM, 65:PC, bundled wires.)
66:MBk1, 67:MBk2, 68:GY, 69:PGY,
6A:R, 6B:B, 6C:G
8-10
Chapter 8
Code
2570 Ink insufficient. Ink tank short on ink 1. Replace the tank.
to Press OK and A suction operation was attempted, but 2. Failure of remaining ink detection
257C replace ink tank. there is not enough ink left in the tank for system.
the operation (iPF8000 series, iPF9000 (Replace the supply unit /check the
series). bundled wires.)
Reference)
About 5 mL to 40 mL of ink may have been
left in the tank when this warning occurs.
70:Bk, 71:Y, 72:M, 73:C, 74:PM, 75:PC,
76:MBk1, 77:MBk2, 78:GY, 79:PGY,
7A:R, 7B:B, 7C:G
2580 Ink insufficient. Not Enough Ink Ink tank short on ink 1. Replace the ink.
to Press OK and (lower arrow) A suction operation was attempted, but 2. Failure of remaining ink detection
258C replace ink tank. Replace ink tank there is not enough ink left in the tank for system.
Ink insufficient. orOnline to prnt the operation. (Replace the supply unit /check the
Replace ink tank. (In the small LCD, the lower arrow points bundled wires.)
Reference)
80:Bk, 81:Y, 82:M, 83:C, 84:PM, 85:PC,
86:MBk1, 87:MBk2, 88:GY, 89:PGY,
8A:R, 8B:B, 8C:G
2590 Ink insufficient. Not Enough Ink Ink tank short on ink 1. Replace the ink.
to Press OK and (lower arrow) A print operation was attempted, but there 2. Failure of remaining ink detection
259C replace ink tank. Replace ink tank is not enough ink left in the tank for the system.
(*1) Ink insufficient. orOnline to prnt operation. (Replace the supply unit /check the
Replace ink tank. (In the small LCD, the lower arrow points bundled wires.)
Reference)
90:Bk, 91:Y, 92:M, 93:C, 94:PM, 95:PC,
96:MBk1, 97:MBk2, 98:GY, 99:PGY,
9A:R, 9B:B, 9C:G
(*1) 259C: 03810208-259C
259C Ink insufficient. Ink insufficientPress (lower Ink insufficient in inktank. 1. Replace inktank
(*2) Press OK and arrow) key. The amount of ink left in the inktank is 2. Failure of detecting the ink amount
to replace ink tank. Replace inktank or start insufficient for printing. (In the small LCD, leftintheinktank.
25A8 Ink insufficient. printing online. the lower arrow points to the (Replace the supply unit /check the
Press OK and correspondence color.) bundled wires.)
replace ink tank.
Reference)
There are the cases that about 5ml to 40ml
ink is left in a inktank at warning occurs.
9C:Bk,9D:C,9E:M,9F:Y,A0:PC,A1:PM,A
2:MBk1,A3:MBk2,
A4:GY,A5:PGY,A6:R,A7:G,A8:B
(*2) 259C: 03810104-259C
25B7 Close the ink tank The remaining ink falls below the pin Close the ink tank cover.
cover. Unable to detect ink check level while ink tank cover is open.
level correctly. Note) It does not recover if the cover is
Unable to detect ink level open when replacing the ink tank with
correctly. a valid one.
If removing the ink tank with lower ink

remains (LIR) than Supply Pin in this
situation, an error is detected.
Also when keeping printing in this
situation, if empty subtank
corresponding to the ink tank with LIR
is detected, the error shifts from ink
tank with LIR to empty subtank.
260E Hardware error. Power On Gap detection failure 1. Check to see if the multisensor
03130031-260E Again Carriage gap calibration has not been reference plate (white patch for batch
Gap Detect Err carried out, or gap detection is disabled by correction) is not soiled and perform
Turn off printer, corrupt calibration data. GAP CALIB (if soiled, adjust the part
wait, then after replacing it).
turn on again. 2. Replace the multisensor and
perform GAP CALIB.
3. Replace the carriage unit and
perform GAP CALIB.
260F Gap error. Power On Gap reference plane error Check the multisensor reference plate
Again Request to replace an abnormal reference (for soiling and faulty mounting).
Turn off printer. Gap Error plane sheet (only in Service mode).
2618 Hardware error. Vh voltage error
03130031-2618
Turn off printer,

wait, then
turn on again.
8-11
Chapter 8
Code
2800 No printhead Printhead Printhead [X] non-existing 1. Check the status of the printhead
Install printhead. Please Check mounted.
No Printhead [X]: Double-head model : The R-head does 2. Mount the long flexible cable and
Check Printhead not exist. check the status of the cable being
Single-head model: The head does not exit. locked.
2801 Printhead error Printhead Printhead [X] DI correction failure Replace the printhead.
Open top cover and Please Replace
replace the Printhead Error [X]: Double-head model: R head DI
printhead. Replace Printhd correction failure
Single-head model: Head DI correction
failure
2802 Printhead error Printhead An invalid printhead has been mounted in Replace with a valid printhead.
Open top cover and Please Replace [X]. (An error has occurred but the
replace the Printhead Error printhead itself is not damaged, so
printhead. Replace Printhd [X]: Double-head model: Invalid head communication has been maintained
mounted on the R-side properly.)
Single-head model: Invalid head mounted
2803 Printhead error Printhead Printhead [X] EEPROM error Replace the printhead.
Open top cover and Please Replace
replace the Printhead Error [X]: Double-head model: R head
printhead. Replace Printhd EEPROM error
Single-head model: Head EEPROM error
2804 PHeads: wrong pos. Printhead Printheads mounted in L/R opposite Replace with a valid printhead. (An
Open top cover and Check Printhead positions error has occurred but the printhead
check the L/R Heads Revrsd L printhead is mounted on R side. itself is not damaged, so
printhead positions. Check Printheads communication has been maintained
properly.)
The L/R printheads cannot be
interchanged.
2805 Printhead error. The specified time has been passed in 1. Acclimate to room temperature.
lower printhead temperature than the 2. Replace the printhead.
Open top cover and replace specified temperature. 3. Replace the main controller PCB.
the printhead. 4. Replace the CR board.
2807 PHeads: wrong pos. Printhead Printhead mounted in L/R opposite Replace with a valid printhead. (An
Open top cover and Check Printhead positions. error has occurred but the printhead
check the L/R Heads Revrsd R printhead is mounted on L side. itself is not damaged, so
printhead positions. Check Printheads communication has been maintained
properly.)
The L/R printheads cannot be
interchanged.
2808 No left printhead Printhead Left Printhead L non-existing 1. Check the status of the printhead
Install left Chk L Printhead mounted.
printhead. No Left Printhd 2. Mount the long flexible cable and
Chk L Printhead check the status of the cable being
locked.
2809 Left printhead Printhead Left Printhead L DI correction failure Replace the printhead.
error Replace Printhd
Open top cover and Left Printhd Err
replace the left Replace Printhd
printhead.
280A Left printhead Printhead Left Invalid printhead L has been mounted. Replace with a valid printhead.
error Replace Printhd (An error has occurred but the
Open top cover and Left Printhd Err printhead itself is not damaged, so
replace the left Replace Printhd communication has been maintained
printhead. properly.)
280B Left printhead Printhead Left Printhead L EEPROM error Replace the printhead.
error Replace Printhd
Open top cover and Left Printhd Err
replace the left Replace Printhd
printhead.
280C PHead needs Printhead (R) Printhead R non-ejection warning (Check 1. Check image quality. (Unless there
280D cleaning. Check Nozzles printhead) Printing paused/ continued are problems with the image quality,
280E Press Online to clear error. Online Key printing allowed there is no need to replace the
The printhead Press To Print printhead.)
requires cleaning. The level of error is decided as shown in 2. Replace the printhead.
the table below, based on the number of
The printhead non-ejecting nozzles per color (per chip)
requires cleaning. and the number of nozzles unable to back
Online=Print up.
Stop=Stop Printing
Execute printhead Depending on the firmware version, the
cleaning. If this specifications vary as shown in the table
message is still below.
displayed, replace
the printhead.
1. Initial firmware
No. of nozzles impossible to back up

Less than 30 30 or over
8-12
Chapter 8
No. of non-ejecting more than 0, less than --- Check printout

nozzles 100
1 color (per chip) more than 100, less --- Check head
than 200
200 or over Check head Check head
2. Running change firmware

The specifications have been changed from the versions shown below.
iPF500/600/5000/700: Ver.1.33, iPF510/610/710/8000/9000: Ver.1.36
iPF8100/9100/8000S/9000S: Ver.1.37, iPF810/820/6000S: Ver.1.03
iPF605/6200: Ver.1.02, iPF5100/6100: Ver.1.38, iPF720:Ver.1.10
You can choose A:(default setting) or B:(if you want to use automatic stop) from Service mode.
A: (default setting) No. of non-ejecting more than 0, less than ---

nozzles 320
1 color (per chip) 320 or over Head replacement
B: (If you want to use No. of nozzles impossible to back up
automatic stop) less than 30 30 or over
nozzles 100
1 color (per chip) more than 100, less --- Check printhead
than 320
320 or over Replace printhead Replace printhead
3. iPF650/750 series, iPF6300/6350/8300 and later model

You can choose A:(default setting) or B:(if you want to use automatic stop) from User mode.
A (Default setting) No. of non-ejecting more than 0, less than ---

nozzles 320
1 color (per chip) 320 or over Head replacement
B (if you want to use No. of nozzles impossible to back up
automatic stop) less than 30 30 or over
nozzles 100
1 color (per chip) more than 100, less --- Check printhead
than 320
320 or over Replace printhead Replace printhead
Error code Applicable printhead

Check printout 1010 LR or single-head
model
1012 R printhead
1013 L printhead
Check printhead 280C LR or single-head
model
280D R printhead
280E L printhead
Replace printhead 2827 LR or single-head
model
2828 R printhead
2829 L printhead
Code
2811 Printhead Printhead Replace Printhd Incompatible printhead version Replace with a valid printhead.
error Printhd Err (An error has occurred but the
Open top cover and Replace Printhd printhead itself is not damaged, so
replace the left communication has been maintained
Wrong printhead.
Open top cover and

replace the
printhead.
2812 Right printhead Printhead Right Incompatible printhead R version Replace with a valid printhead.
Open top cover and Right Printhd Err printhead itself is not damaged, so
replace the right Replace Printhd communication has been maintained
2813 Left printhead Printhead Left Incompatible printhead L version Replace with a valid printhead.
Open top cover and Left Printhd Err printhead itself is not damaged, so
replace the left Replace Printhd communication has been maintained
8-13
Chapter 8
Code
2816 Maintenance Maint Cartridge Maintenance cartridge EEPROM error Replace the maintenance cartridge.
cartridge problem. Replace Cart Communication is enabled but the
Maint Cart Error information is corrupted.
Replace Replace Cart
the maintenance <Maintenance cartridge detection timings>
cartridge. The presence of a maintenance cartridge is
Maintenance detected at the following timings:
cartridge problem. 1. Before printing/during printing (twice
Hold base of maint per second)/at the end of printing/ between
cart firmly. Keep it pages
level during removal 2. Before a recovery operation/during a
error or warning.
2817 Maintenance Maint Cartridge Maintenance cartridge ID error Replace the maintenance cartridge.
cartridge problem. Replace Cart A maintenance cartridge for another model (The maintenance cartridge was
Maint Cart Error has been mounted. capable of normal communication
Replace Replace Cart when the error occurred.)
Wrong maintenance detected at the following timings:
cartridge. 1. Before printing/during printing (twice
Hold base of maint per second)/at the end of printing/ between
cart firmly. Keep it pages
level during removal 2. Before a recovery operation/during a
error or warning.
2818 No maintenance Maint Cartridge Maintenance cartridge not found Remove and reinstall, or replace the
cartridge. Load Cartridge Cannot communicate, or cannot detect a maintenance cartridge.
No Maint Cart maintenance cartridge.
Check Load Cartridge
Insert new maint detected at the following timings:
cart and push in 1. Before printing/during printing (twice
fully per second)/at the end of printing/ between
pages
error or warning.
2819 Maintenance Maint Cartridge Maintenance cartridge full Replace the maintenance cartridge.
cartridge full. Replace Cart Maintenance cartridge full is detected from
Maint Cart Error the dot count and the usage period (drying Reference) The absorber may appear
Replace Replace Cart time). whitish or weigh light, depending on
the maintenance the usage conditions.
cartridge. <Maintenance cartridge detection timings>
Maintenance The presence of a maintenance cartridge is
cartridge full. detected at the following timings:
Hold base of maint 1. Before printing/during printing (twice
cart firmly. Keep it per second)/at the end of printing/ between
level during removal pages
error or warning.
281A Prepare for MTCart Full Soon Maintenance cartridge near-full (continued Prepare a maintenance cartridge.
maint cart usage allowed)
replacement. Near-full has been detected from the dot
count and the usage period (drying time).
<Maintenance cartridge detection timings>

The presence of a maintenance cartridge is
detected at the following timings:
pages
error or warning.
8-14
Chapter 8
Code
281B No MaintenanceCartridge Maint Cartridge The maintenance cartridge before cleaning Replace the maintenance cartridge.
capacity. Replace Cart does not have an enough capacity The maintenance cartridge can be put
Replacethe Maint Cart Error (reusable). to reuse after the end of cleaning.
maintenancecartridge. Replace Cart Near-full has been detected from the dot
No MaintenanceCartridge count and the usage period (drying time). Reference) The absorber may appear
capacity. whitish or weigh light, depending on
Hold base of maint <Maintenance cartridge detection timings> the usage conditions.
cart firmly. Keep it The presence of a maintenance cartridge is
level during removal detected at the following timings:
pages
error or warning.
2820 Cannot adjust Online Key Head registration unadjustable Check the nozzle check pattern
printhead. and recalibrate The adjustment value has gone out of
Printhd Adj Err bounds during automatic head adjustment.
Press Online to Please Readjust
clear the error
and readjust
printhead.
2821 Cannot adjust Online Key LF unadjustable 1. Adjustment is not possible with
band. and recalibrate A detected value has gone out of bounds transparent/semi-transparent paper.
Band Adj Error while performing automatic band Replace with paper having similar
Press Online to Please Readjust adjustment. substrate and perform automatic band
clear the error adjustment or manual adjustment.
and readjust 2. Make detailed band adjustment
the band. (automatic).
Cannot adjust 3. Check the nozzle check pattern.
paper feed. 4. Initialize the system settings/paper
preferences and then add additional
Press OK to clear paper and perform automatic band
the error and adjustment (detailed). If the paper
readjust printhead. preferences are initialized, all the
paper setting would be reset to their
factory defaults.
2822 Cannot adjust OnlineKey: Press Eccentricity uncorrectable (which does not 1. Check the paper type: Replace with
eccentric. To Clear Error occur when in User mode) photo glossy paper (UF120).
Eccent Adj Error A detected value has gone out of bounds 2. Check the paper for soiling, tear and
Press Online to while making adjustment. other defects.
clear the error. Having run LF tuning, update the
Cannot adjust additional paper.
eccentric.
2823 Hardware error. Power On Head check error
03010000-2823 Again
Invalid Head Chk
Turn off printer,
wait, then
turn on again.
2824 Cannot adjust OnlineKey: Press Optical axis unadjustable (which does not Check the paper (paper type check).
optic axis. To Clear Error occur when in User mode)
Optic Axis Adj An adjustment pattern has not been printed.
Press Online to Error The optical axis deviates from the correct
clear the error. position by -/+3 mm or more.
Cannot adjust
optic axis.
2825 This type of media Paper type not compatible with HP-GL/2 Check the paper.
is not compatible has been specified.
with HP-GL/2.
2826 LFNG XXX XXX XXX When executing LF unevenness auto Check the paper.
XXX diagnostic processing, the multisensor read Check the multisensor.
press OK key value has gone outside the predefined
(XXXX is a measured scope (Service mode only).
value.)
8-15
Chapter 8
Code
2827 Execute printhead Printhead non-discharge error 1. Execute cleaning.

2828 cleaning. If this (Replace printhead/ continued printing not 2. Replace printhead.
2829 message is still allowed)
displayed, replace
Printhead. At start of printing the number of non-
Execute printhead ejecting nozzles is more than 320 per color
cleaning. If this (1 chip).
message is still 2827: Both L and R, or single printhead
displayed, replace model
Printhead. 2828: R printhead
[Stop: Stop Printing 2829: L printhead
Execute printhead * For the detailed head non-ejection errors,

cleaning. If this see section 280C.
message is still (If Setting of SERVICE MODE >
displayed, replace SETTING >HEAD WARNING is off, the
printhead . error code is 280E.)
Printing stopped.
[OK]
282A CR MOTOR TUNING Carriage motor identification processing Error is cleared by OK button.
ERROR :PRESS OK (rotation adjustment) failed (for Service 1. Check installation of carriage or
mode) carriage belt.
2. Clean the carriage main rail (Do not
oil it.)
3. Replace the carriage motor.
282B CR VIBRATION When processing carriage motor Error is cleared by OK button.
ERROR :PRESS OK identification (rotation adjustment), 1. Check installation of carriage or
carriage vibration has been detected (for carriage belt.
Service mode). 2. Clean the carriage main rail (Do not
oil it.)
3. Replace the carriage motor.
282D Left printhead Printhead error detected (L head only). After restarting, replace the printhead
error. Displayed when an abnormal temperature L.
rise of printhead has been detected to
Turn off printer, prompt you to restart.
wait, then
turn on again.
282E !Printhead error Temperature rising detected by particular 1. Replace the printhead.
Turn off printer, ink pre-injection before printing was 2. Replace the main controller PCB.
wait, then judged abnormal.
turn on again.
2830 Left printhead Printhead error detected (L head only). Replace the printhead L.
error. Displayed when restarting after detection
of error 282D to prompt you to replace
Open top cover and printhead L.
replace the left
printhead.
2832 Hardware error VHT leak detection error of right printhead iPF6300/6400 Series
03130031-2832 or of a single printhead, in case of VHT iPF8300/8400/9400
Turn off printer, exceeds rated value or falls below the rated Series
wait, then value. Replace right or left
turn on again. printhead.
2833 Hardware error VHT leak detection error of left printhead,
03130031-2833 in case of VHT exceeds rated value or falls
Turn off printer, below the rated value.
wait, then
turn on again.
2834 !Unknown printhead. Open Printhead contact failure is detected after 1. Remove and reinstall the printhead.
top cover and re-install the 2. Replace the printhead.
printhead. printhead installation. 3. Replace the carriage unit.
4. Replace the main controller PCB.
2901 Mail box The available size of the permanent area of Reorganize data.
nearly full. the hard disk space has fallen to less than 1
Delete unwanted data GB.
The mail box is
nearly full. Delete
unwanted jobs.
2902 Mail box full. The hard disk has run out of free space, Reorganize data.
Now printing disabling copy printing or error recovery.
without saving data.
2905 Mail box full. A job save has been executed when the Reorganize data.
Delete unwanted data available size of the permanent area of the
on your computer hard disk space was lost.
to resume printing. Cancel the job.
Press Stop
to cancel printing.
The mail box
is full.
Delete unwanted data
from your computer
to continue.
8-16
Chapter 8
Code
2906 Mail box full. The 101st job has been received when 100 Reorganize data.
Cannot save. Delete jobs are already saved in the permanent
unwanted data on area of the hard disk space.
your computer to
resume printing.
Press Stop to cancel
printing.
Too many jobs for
mail box.
Delete unwanted data
from your computer
to continue.
2907 Mail box full. 100 jobs are already saved in the Reorganize data.
Delete unwanted data permanent area of the hard disk space
Maximum jobs (Warning).
stored. Delete
unwanted data.
2908 Hard disk error. HDD format error 1. Format as instructed by the on-panel
message.
Press OK to reformat 2. Replace the HDD.
Hard disk error.
Press OK to format
HDD and restart the
printer (Takes 40
min). This deletes
all HDD data.
(cannot be canceled)
Hard disk error.
Will format HDD and
restart the printer
(Takes 40 min). This
deletes all HDD data
(cannot be canceled)
2909 File read error. HDD file error Restart the printer.
(The file in error is deleted, but the
Turn off printer, printer will recover normally when it is
wait a while, and restarted.)
turn it on again.
Invalid files
will be deleted.
290A Hardware error. HDD not connected. Connect the HDD/ Check the harness.
03130031-290A HDD was not detected at startup. Replace the HDD.
Turn off printer,
wait, then
turn on again.
2918 Power On Cassette detection sensor detection failure 1. Check to see if the cassette itself is
Again (cassette presence/absence sensor) properly loaded.
Cassette Sensor No cassette has been detected during 2. Check and replace the sensor (I/O
Detection Error cassette pickup. mode).
291A Roll sensor Power On Roll sensor detection failure 1. Check the roll unit, and remove,
cannot detect. Again Could not detect the roll unit. install or replace the roll unit.
Roll Sensor 2. Check I/O mode (roll unit
Turn on printer Detection Error detection).
again.
291B Hardware error. Power On Lift shift timeout 1. Switch off the printer, then back on.
03130031-291B Again A lift operation has been executed, but no 2. The carriage cannot travel to the lift
Lift Motion sensor has been detected or a sensor has drive position.
Turn off printer, Timeout remained detected. 3. The lift drive cam is not engaged.
wait, then 4. Faulty lift drive sensor
turn on again. 5. Faulty lift drive motor
291D Hardware error. Power On Spur cam sensor detection failure Check the spur cam sensor in I/O
03130031-291D Again mode.
Hardware Err 1 -If OK, check the lifter drive system.
Turn off printer, 03130031-291D -If NG, replace the sensor.
wait, then
turn on again.
8-17
Chapter 8
Code
2920 Media Take-up Cannot take up paper 1. Check to see if the media take-up
error. An error check has been made on paper unit is switched on with the lock lever
after the paper had been fed 1850 mm, but down.
Check the paper. the media take-up unit was not driven at all 2. Check the connection between the
Press Online to in that interval (up to about 3700 mm main unit and the media take-up unit.
clear error. [when run immediately after the start of 3. Check to see if the wait roller is
Media Take-up detection]). properly set.
error. 4. Check to see if the media take-up
detection sensor is shielded by paper
Check the paper. when it is presented.
5. Faulty media take-up detection
sensor
6. Faulty Media take-up motor
Media take-up unit Media take-up unit use has been set to [Do Press the [Online] button to set the
ready. not use] at the start of printing when the media take-up unit use setting to force
media take-up unit is active. [Use] and print.
Online: Print The media take-up unit settings are
Stop: Stop Printing checked only when executing external
printing.
2921 Rewinding error. Continued rewinding error 1. Check to see if any obstacle is
Check for jam at The media take-up unit has continued placed at the media take-up paper
indicated position. rewinding for 10 seconds, with the media detection sensor position.
Press Online to take-up paper detection sensor turned on, at 2. Faulty media take-up paper
clear error. printer power-on and at the start of detection sensor
Rewinding error. printing. 3. Faulty media take-up button
Check for jam at 4. Faulty media take-up motor
indicated position.
2930 Cutting Mode not Stacker is not ready. Continue or stop the print. If the
Automatic. Remove - The power supply is not supplied to the preparation of the stacker isn't
stacker and print stacker. performed, the error occurs again.
again or cancel and - The distance between the stacker and
change settings. printer is not appropriate.
- The stacker is not joined.
Print again - Stacker initial error
Cancel
2931 Cutting Mode not When the stacker is usable condition, the Print again after separating the
Automatic. Remove printing has been started at the setting of distance between the stacker and
stacker and print cut-off or cutline print or eject or manual printer enoughly, or cancel print.
again or cancel and mode.
change settings.
Print again
Cancel
2E00 Load Roll Media Paper mismatch (roll paper) Load roll paper.
No roll paper have been fed when a job
with a roll paper specification is received.
2E01 Roll printing Roll Selected Paper mismatch (roll paper) Load roll paper.
is selected. Load Roll Roll Paper have not been fed when an
internal print job having a roll paper
Press Load/Eject specification started (during internal
and load a roll. printing).
Roll printing
is selected.
2E02 Sheet printing Front paper feed Paper mismatch (cut sheet) Load cut sheet.
is selected. slot is selected. No cassette paper has been loaded when
Press Load/Eject Press Load/Eject and received.
and load sheets. load a sheet.
Manual printing
is selected.
Top paper feed
slot is selected.
Press OK and
load a sheet.
Top paper feed
slot is selected.
Press Load/Eject and

load a sheet.
Front paper feed
slot is selected.
Press OK and
load a sheet.
Front paper feed
slot is selected.

load a sheet.
8-18
Chapter 8
Code
2E03 Load Papr in Cas Paper mismatch (cut sheet) Feed paper as instructed by the on-
Press Online. Not cut sheet have been loaded in cassettes screen guidance.
when data having a cassette specification is
received.
2E04 Manual(Front) Load Front Tray Paper mismatch (cut sheet) Feed paper manually from the front as
(Paper type) No manually fed paper has been fed when instructed by the on-screen guidance.
(Paper size) a job having a front paper feed
Load Paper specification is received.
Stop Printing
2E05 Manual(Top) Load Top Tray Paper mismatch (cut sheet) Feed paper manually from the top as
(Paper type) No manually fed paper has been fed when instructed by the on-screen guidance.
(Paper size) a job having a top paper feed specification
Load Paper is received.
Stop Printing
Sheet printing Paper mismatch (cut sheet) Load cut sheet.
is selected. Not cut sheet have been loaded in cassettes
when data having a cassette specification is
received.(When paper type/ size is not
determined)
2E08 Wrong paper size. PaprSiz Mismatch Paper mismatch (size) (roll paper) Check the paper that is actually loaded
Check paper size setting on Prnt:PressOnline The width of data and that of the actually on the printer and the paper size setting
computer. Loaded Papr Diff loaded paper do not match. of the driver.
From Spfd Size
Online: Print
Stop: Stop Printing
Wrong paper size. Driver: Chk Papr
Check paper size setting in Size Setting
driver. Loaded Papr Diff
From Spfd Size
Online: Print
Stop: Stop Printing
PaprWidth Mismatch
2E09 Insufficient paper for job Roll Paper Short on roll paper Replace the roll paper.
Online: Print Please Replace All of the following conditions have been
Stop: Stop Printing Paper Level Low met at the start of printing:
Load/Eject: Change Paper Replace Paper -[ON] has been selected for [Remaining
Roll Paper Detection].
-Among the paper size settings coded in the
print data, the paper length exceeds the
remaining length of roll paper.
2E0A Roll printing is Sheets Loaded Paper mismatch (roll paper) Check the paper that is actually loaded
selected, but sheets are Press (lower arrow) To Eject Print data having a roll paper print on the paper and the paper feed setting
loaded. Roll Selected specification has been received at the of the driver.
Load Roll completion of manual feed paper pickup.
remove the sheets.
Roll printing is
selected, but manual
paper is loaded.
Roll printing is
selected, but sheets are
loaded.
Press OK,
remove the sheets,
and load a roll.
Roll printing is
selected, but sheets
are loaded.
OK:Eject Sheets
Stop:Stop Printing
Roll printing is
selected, but sheets
are loaded.
2E0B Cassette printing Sheets Loaded Paper mismatch (cut sheet) Check the paper that is actually loaded
is selected. Press (lower arrow) To Eject Print data having a cassette print on the paper and the paper feed setting
Cassette Selectd specification has been received at the of the driver.
Press Load/Eject and Load Papr in Cas completion of manual feed paper pickup.
remove manually
loaded sheets.
8-19
Chapter 8
Code
2E0C Manual printing Tray Selected Paper mismatch (cut sheet) Check the paper that is actually loaded
is selected, but a roll is Press OK 1. Print data having a manual feed print on the paper and the paper feed setting
loaded. specification has been received at the of the driver.
completion of roll paper pickup.
Press Load/Eject and 2. Print data having a manual feed print
remove the roll. specification has been received when there
Sheet printing is roll paper printout.
is selected, but 3. Cut sheet data has been received when
a roll is loaded. the media take-up unit is in use.
Stop Printing
Sheet printing
is selected, but
a roll is loaded.
2E0E No Roll Feed Unit. Roll P Unit Roll paper unit not installed 1. Check the roll unit, and remove,
Please Check The unit has received print data having a install or replace the roll unit.
Turn printer off Power On roll paper print specification when it had 2. Check I/O mode (roll unit
and install roll Again started without a roll unit being connected detection).
feed unit. to it.
2E0F Top cover is open. Top Cover The top cover is abnormally open. Check the cover.
Please Close Check the sensor (I/O mode).
Turn off printer, Top Cover Open
wait a while, and Close Top Cover
turn it on again.
2E10 Ink tank cover Ink Tank Cover Ink tank cover error open (continued use Close the ink tank cover.
is open. Close Please allowed) Check the sensor (I/O mode).
Tank Cover Open The ink tank cover opened while
Turn off printer, Close Please performing any operation, such as printing
wait a while, and and suctioning.
turn it on again.
2E11 Carriage Cover is open. Carriage cover open error Close the carriage cover.
A carriage cover open has been detected. Check the sensor (I/O mode).
2E12 Rel lever is in Faulty release lever Push down the release lever.
wrong position. The state of the release lever up (released) Check the sensor.
Turn off printer, has been detected.
wait, then
turn on again.
2E14 Wrong paper size. PaprSiz Mismatch Paper mismatch (size or width) Check the paper that is actually loaded
Check paper size setting on Prnt:PressOnline The paper size specified for the [Print to on the printer and the paper size setting
computer. Loaded Papr Diff meet the paper width] setting of the driver of the driver.
From Spfd Size on receiving print data and the width of the
Online: Print roll paper actually fed did not match.
Stop: Stop Printing
Wrong paper size. Driver: Chk Papr
Check paper size Size Setting
setting in driver. Loaded Papr Diff
From Spfd Size
Online: Print
Stop: Stop Printing
8-20
Chapter 8
Code
2E15 Wrong paper type. Paper mismatch Paper mismatch (type) (on adjustment) Equalize the paper types for the first
Press (lower arrow) To The second and subsequent sheets of paper and second sheets with each other in
Stop: Stop Printing Replace have been fed as a paper type different adjustment printing.
Load/Eject: (Paper Type) from the first sheet when LF adjustment
Change Paper (Paper Size) was made with cut sheet.
Wrong paper type. Loaded Paper
Check Type
Replace paper Switch Paper
in cassette. In Cassette
Wrong paper type. Loaded Paper
Lift the release Check Type
lever and reload Press (lower arrow) Key
the paper. and Reload
Stop: Stop Printing

Wrong paper type.
Lift the release
lever and reload
the paper.
Wrong paper type.
Lift the release
lever and reload
the paper.
Paper mismatch
Make sure media type
and paper size match
for the adjustment
print.
Wrong paper type. Driver: Chk Papr Paper mismatch (type) Check the paper that is actually loaded
Check paper type Type Setting At the start of printing, paper type specified on the printer and the driver paper type
setting in driver. Chk Paper Type in the job and the type of paper actually setting.
Press Online loaded do not match, and [Stop] has been
Online: Print selected for [Paper Mismatch Detection].
Stop: Stop Printing
Wrong paper type. PaprTyp Mismatch
This type of media Prnt:PressOnline
is not compatible
with HP-GL/2.
Wrong paper feed Paper Feed Slot Paper mismatch (type) Check the feeder slot/cassette pick-up
slot for this paper SpcfdPapr NotFit A paper type that cannot be fed from the setting.
type. Press (lower arrow) Key specified feeder slot has been specified.
and Reload
Press Load/Eject
and reload the
paper.
Wrong paper feed
slot for this paper
type.
2E16 Wrong paper type. Paper Mismatch Paper mismatch (type) Check the paper that is actually loaded
Check paper type setting on Prnt:PressOnline The data type defined in the data and the on the printer and the driver paper type
computer. Check Paper type of actually loaded paper do not match. setting.
Press Online Following the transmission of data in the
Online: Print GARO format, all of the following
Stop: Stop Printing conditions have been met at the start of
Wrong paper type printing:
and size. Check -The paper type that has been set in the job
paper type and size and the type of actually fed paper do not
setting on computer. match.
Online: Print -[Stop] has been selected for [Paper
Stop: Stop Printing Mismatch Detection].
Wrong paper type

and size. Check
paper type and size
setting in driver.
Online: Print
Stop: Stop Printing
2E17 No cassette Cassette Cassette not installed 1. Check to see if the cassette itself is
detected. Undetected properly loaded.
Check the cassette. Check Cassette 2. Check and replace sensor (I/O
Press Online mode).
2E18 Cannot load. Remove paper Paper not fed as far as the platen
Press Load/Eject Cannot Feed
and reload the Press (upper arrow) Key
paper.
2E19 Cannot load. Remove paper Feeding error Refeed the paper.
Press Load/Eject Cannot Feed LF out of synchronization for cut sheet
paper.
2E1A Cannot load. Remove paper Feeding error Refeed the paper.
paper.
8-21
Chapter 8
Code
2E1B The roll is empty. Roll Paper No roll paper available (trailing edge of roll 1. Replace the roll paper.
Load/Eject: Change Paper Please Replace paper detected) 2. Check paper sensor R (I/O mode).
The roll is empty. Paper Not Loaded -Trailing edge of paper has been detected 3. Is the paper fed successfully (under
Lift the release Press (upper arrow) Key by paper sensor in a roll paper operation. a negative load or any other
lever and replace -LF out of synchronization on roll paper. influence)?
the roll. (Detected the spool no longer rotating.)
The roll is empty.

The roll is empty.
Lift the release
lever and replace
the roll.
Out of roll paper.
Push the release
lever back, then
replace the roll.
2E1C Paper jam. Paper Jam Jam while ejecting paper 1. Open and close the release lever to
Press Load/Eject Press (upper arrow) Key (A sequence of removing jams with the reload the paper.
and reload the pinch roller released is required) 2. Remove the paper once
paper. A jam has been detected while ejecting
paper.
2E1D Cannot load. Remove paper Feeding error Refeed the paper.
paper.
2E1F Cannot print Paper Mismatch Paper mismatch (size) Check the paper that is actually loaded
as specified. ReplcPap:Press (lower The second and subsequent sheets of paper on the printer and the paper size setting
Press Load/Eject arrow) have been fed as a paper size different from of the driver.
and replace paper with A2/ the first sheet when adjustment was made
16.6"x23.4" with cut sheet.
(vertical) or larger
Cannot print as specified. Need A3 Vertical The paper size setting in effect at the start
Press Load/Eject and or Larger of an internal print session has fallen below
replace roll with 10 in. wide Press (lower arrow) Key the minimum size specified for that internal
or larger roll. and Reload print session.
Cannot print as specified. [XXX x YYY]: Required minimum size

Lift the release lever and
replace paper with [ XXX ] The second and subsequent sheets of paper
(vertical) or have been fed as a paper size different from
larger. the first sheet when adjustment was made
Cannot print with cut sheet.
as specified. [XXX x YYY]: Required minimum size
Lift the release
lever and replace
roll with 10 in.
wide or larger roll
Cannot print
as specified.
Replace paper with
[XXX] (vertical)
or larger.
The paper is too
small. Replace paper
with [XXX] (vertical) or
larger.
The paper is too
small. Replace roll
with 10 in. wide or
larger roll.
Cannot print as specified.
replace paper with [XXX]
(vertical) or larger.
Cannot print as specified.
replace roll with 10 in. wide
or larger roll.
2E20 Wrong paper type. Paper mismatch (type) (on adjustment) Equalize the paper types for the first
Lift the release The second and subsequent sheets of paper and second sheets with each other in
lever and reload have been fed as a paper type different adjustment printing.
the paper. from the first sheet when LF adjustment
was made from a cassette.
Stop: Stop Printing
Wrong paper.
Lift the release
lever and replace
the paper.
Paper mismatch
Make sure media type
and paper size match
for the adjustment
print.
8-22
Chapter 8
Code
2E21 Hardware error. Power On IEEE1394 interface error 1. Restart the printer.
03130000-2E21 Again Any error has been detected while 2. Remove and reinsert the IEEE1394
Turn off printer, IEEE 1394 Error initializing IEEE1394 at startup. board and then restart the printer.
wait, then Restart Printer 3. Replace the IEEE1394 board.
turn on again.
2E22 Media Type not Media Check Paper mismatch (cut sheet) Check the cassette pick-up setting/
Stop: Stop Printing

2E23 Hardware error. Power On Cutter unit failure 1. Remove paper slip (foreign matter)
03130031-2E23 Again At startup or completion of paper jam attached to the cutter home position
Turn off printer, Hardware Err 1 handling, when attempting to get the cutter sensor.
wait, then 03130031-2E23 which is in other position than HP back to 2. Check the cutter driving circuit and
turn on again. HP, the home position sensor timed out the cutter unit.
without response. When FU3902 blows out on PF510/
5100/610,
-Replace the main controller PCB
When FU2802 blows out on iPF6300
series/ 6400 series
-Replace the main controller PCB.
2E24 Roll feed unit err Power On Faulty roll paper unit Check the roll cam sensor (I/O mode).
Turn off printer and check Again Failed to detect the cam in the roll unit
roll feed unit Roll Feed Unit while no paper was loaded.
Error
2E25 Cannot detect papr Can't DetectPapr Jam while picking up, ejecting or printing
Remove paper and press on paper (JAM2)
Load/Eject. Remove Paper
Press Online
Cannot feed paper. Remove paper
Remove paper and press Press Online
Load/Eject.
Cannot detect papr After loading of roll paper or cut sheet was
Remove paper and loaded successfully, Paper detection
press OK. sensor/ Media sensor sensor detected no
paper (JAM2).
2E27 Cannot load. Remove paper Feeding error (nip release required)
Press Load/Eject Cannot Feed LF out of synchronization (feed motor
and reload the Press (upper arrow) Key won't rotate) has been detected.
paper.
Cannot feed paper
Lift the release
lever and reload
paper.
Cannot feed paper.
Reload the paper.
Paper jam. Paper Jam Jam while picking up, ejecting or printing 1. Open and close the release lever to
Press (upper arrow) Key on paper reload the paper.
Press Load/Eject (A sequence of removing jams with the 2. Remove the paper once and then
and reload the pinch roller released is required)(JAM1) refeed it.
paper. Virtually all recovery errors that could
Paper jam. Lift occur in connection with paper pickup are
the release lever. handled.
Paper jam.
Push the release
lever back.
Paper jam.
all the way.
Paper jam.
all the way
and press OK.
2E30 The paper is Paper mismatch (size) Continued printing allowed.
too small. With [Pause] selected for [Paper Mismatch Check driver setting
Detection] in the menu setting, paper size Replace with appropriate paper.
for the paper loaded was smaller than the
size specified by data.
2E31 Insufficient paper All of the following conditions have been Replace the roll paper.
for job met at the start of external printing:
-[ON] has been selected for [Remaining
-Automatic roll feed to another roll paper
slot which is not the current feeding path,
out of the 2 slots the printer has, is not
available.
8-23
Chapter 8
Code
2E32 Insufficient paper All of the following conditions have been Replace the roll paper.
for job met at the start of external printing:
-[ON] has been selected for [Remaining
-Automatic roll feed to another roll paper
slot which is not the current feeding path,
out of the 2 slots the printer has, is not
available.
2E33 Roll Paper Paper mismatch (roll paper) Load roll paper.
(Paper type) No roll paper has been fed when a job with 1. Select "load a roll" and follow
(Paper size) a roll paper specification is received. instruction on the panel.
Load Roll Paper 2. Select "stop printing," or stop
Stop Printing printing by pressing stop button.
Roll 1(Upper) Paper mismatch (roll paper) 3. Release the release lever and load
(Paper type) No roll paper has been fed when a job with the paper.
(Paper size) a roll paper specification is received.
Press Load/Eject When paper has not been loaded on either
and load a roll. upper or lower slot, and the feeding slot is
set to [Automatic] in the job setting, an
error of upper roll occurs.
2E34 Roll 2 (Lower) Paper mismatch (roll paper) Load roll paper.
(Paper type) No roll paper has been fed when a job with
(Paper size) a roll paper specification is received.
Press Load/Eject When no paper has been loaded on either
error of upper roll (2E33) occurs.
Roll 2 (Lower) Paper mismatch (roll paper)
is selected. No roll paper has been fed when a job with
a roll paper specification is received.
Press Load/Eject When no paper has been loaded on either
error of upper roll (2E33) occurs.
* This is a message that appears when
paper type/ size specification does not exist
due to HPGL format etc.
2E35 Roll printing Paper mismatch (roll paper) Load roll paper.
is selected. No roll paper has been fed when
Roll printing performing internal printing.
is selected.
Press Load/Eject
and load a roll.
2E36 Roll printing Paper mismatch (roll paper) (lower) Load roll paper.
is selected. No roll paper was fed when internal
printing with the specified roll paper
Press Load/Eject (lower) was started.
and load a roll.
2E37 Roll printing Paper mismatch (roll paper) (Upper) Load roll paper.
is selected. No roll paper has been fed when a job with 1. Select "load a roll" and follow
roll paper specification is received. instruction on the panel.
Roll 1 (Upper) Paper mismatch (roll paper) 2. Select "stop printing," or stop
is selected. No roll paper was fed when the job printing by pressing stop button.
specified with upper roll paper was 3. Release the release lever and load
Press Load/Eject received. the paper. (This step 3 is only for 800/
and load a roll. 8000/9000 series.)
2E38 Roll 2 (Lower) Paper mismatch (roll paper)(Lower) Load roll paper.
is selected. No roll paper has been fed when a job with
lower roll paper specification is received.
Press Load/Eject
and load a roll.
2E39 The Roll 2 (Lower) is No roll paper available (trailing edge of roll 1. Replace the roll paper
empty. paper detected) -Check paper sensor R (I/O mode).
Lift the release -Detected that cut sheet sized paper has 2. Is the paper fed successfully (under
lever and replace been fed at the roll paper feeding slot. a negative load or any other
the roll. -The trailing edge of paper was detected by influence)?
The roll (XX) is empty. the Paper detection sensor/ Media sensor
Press OK. sensor during operation in which roll paper
was used.
-The spool stopped rotating during paper
loading or printing
(XX: Upper roll paper/ Lower roll paper)
2E3A Roll1 jammed. Manually During upper roll paper feeding operation, Manually rewind the paper and reload.
rewind the the paper was fed with the roll feed sensor
roll all the way detecting the paper, but the paper detection
and press OK. sensor/ media sensor sensor could not
Roll1 (Uppr) jammed. detect the paper and the operation timed
Manually rewind the out.
roll all the way
and press OK.
8-24
Chapter 8
Code
2E3B Roll 2 (Lwr) jammed. During lower roll paper feeding operation, Manually rewind the paper and reload.
Manually rewind the the paper was fed with the roll feed sensor
roll all the way detecting the paper, but the paper detection
and press OK. sensor/ media sensor sensor could not
detect the paper and the operation timed
out.
2E3C Paper jam. Lift During operations with cut sheet, the state Reload the paper.
the release lever. of the paper detection sensor/ media sensor
sensor has become invalid.
2E3D Roll 1 (upper) jam During operations with upper roll paper, Reload the paper.
Lift the release the paper was fed with the roll paper
lever. detection sensor and the roll feeding sensor
detecting the paper, but the state of the
paper detection sensor/ media sensor
sensor became invalid.
2E3E Roll 2 (lower) jam During operations with lower roll paper, Reload the paper.
Lift the release the paper was fed with the roll paper
lever. detection sensor and the roll feeding sensor
detecting the paper, but the state of the
2E3F Paper jam. Lift When either upper or lower roll paper is in Reload the paper.
the release lever. operation, the states of the roll paper
detection sensor, roll feeding sensor, and
2E40 Cannot print as Print data having lower roll paper Remove the printout of upper roll, and
selected. Another specification has been received while print again.
roll is in use. upper roll printout remains.
[Stop]: Stop printing
2E41 Cannot print as Print data having upper roll paper Remove the printout of lower roll, and
selected. Another specification has been received while print again.
roll is in use. lower roll printout remains.
[Stop]: Stop printing
2E42 MediaType Mismatch Paper mismatch (type/ restart printing of Continued printing allowed.
suspended job) Replace with appropriate paper.
It occurs when all of the following
conditions are met:
-[Stop] selected for [Paper Mismatch
Detection] in menu settings.
-[Change Paper] button was pressed for
suspended jobs from host.
-The paper type that has been set in the job
and the type of actually fed paper do not
match.
2E45 MediaType Mismatch Paper mismatch (type/ restart printing of Continued printing allowed.
suspended job) Check the driver settings.
It occurs when all of the following Replace with appropriate paper.
conditions are met:
-[Stop] selected for [Paper Mismatch
Detection] in menu settings.
-The paper width that has been set with
data and the paper width of actually fed
paper do not match.
2E47 Cutter Position Error Cut Failure Check around the cutter unit.
The cutter is not at home position when
restart from jam. Also paper feeding was
detected.
2F11 CR error Power On An operation order has been issued while
Again the carriage suffered a hardware error.
Call for Service. CR Error
2F12 LF error Power On LF error 1. Replace the feed roller encoder
Again -An operation order has been received sensor.
Call for Service. LF Error while the LF suffered a hardware error. 2. Replace the feed motor.
-The target position could not be reached <Supplement>
within a predicted operation time +3 -If the carriage travels heavily near the
seconds during an LF operation. stop position, a mechanical load error
-The sensor could not be detected during an may be suspected.
LF operation involving sensor detection. -If any other symptom is observed, a
feeding sensor may be at fault.
2F13 Hardware error. Power On A/D converter external trigger output stop
03130031-2F13 Again (Hardware error 1)
Turn off printer, Hardware Err 1
wait, then 03130031-2F13
turn on again.
2F14 Hardware error. Power On ASIC register not writable (Hardware error Replace the main controller PCB.
03130031-2F14 Again 2)
Turn off printer, Hardware Err 2 Could not write to the ASIC register on the
wait, then main controller PCB.
turn on again.
8-25
Chapter 8
Code
2F16 Hardware error. Power On Mist fan error 1. Check the bundled wires in the mist
03130031-2F16 Again The rotation of the mist fan is not fan drive circuit.
Turn off printer, Mist Fan Error detectable. 2. Replace the mist fan unit.
wait, then 3. Replace the main controller PCB.
turn on again.
2F17 Hardware error. Power On Platen fan lock detection error 1. Check the bundled wires in the
03130031-2F17 Again The lock signal has been supplied platen suction fan drive circuit.
Turn off printer, Platen Fan Lock continuously for 3 seconds or longer, 10 2. Replace the platen suction fan unit.
wait, then Power On seconds after the platen fan started rotating. 3. Replace the main controller PCB.
turn on again. Again
Platen Fan Err
2F1F Hardware error. Power On Purge sensor error (recovery purge motor
03130031-2F1F Again HP detection error)
Turn off printer, Purge Motor The recovery system has been driven but
wait, then Sensor Error no sensor interrupt occurs.
turn on again. The recovery system has been driven to
close the cap, but the cap has not been
capped successfully.
2F20 Hardware error. Power On Cap motor cam positioning error
03130031-2F20 Again The recovery system has been driven but
Motor Cam Pos no sensor interrupt occurs.
Turn off printer, Error The recovery system has been driven to
wait, then close the cap, but the cap has not been
turn on again. capped successfully.
2F21 Rel lever is in Pinch roller open detected with the pinch 1. Restart with the pinch roller closed.
wrong position. roller locked. 2. Check the sensor in I/O DISPLAY
in Service mode (Check the pinch
Turn off printer, roller pressure release detection SW/
wait, then the release lever lock sensor.)
turn on again.
2F22 Hardware error. Power On Pump shift timeout <Supplement>
03130031-2F22 Again The target position could not be reached -If the carriage travels heavily towards
Turn off printer, Pump Motion within a predicted operation time +3 the stop position: A mechanical load
wait, then Timeout seconds during pump operation or no error may be suspected.
turn on again. sensor has been detected during a pump -Otherwise: The sensor in the purge
operation involving sensor detection. unit may be at fault.
2F23 Hardware error. Power On Purge motor error <Supplement>
03130031-2F23 Again A PWM duty of 100% has lasted for 200 -If the motor could not be run at all or
Turn off printer, Pump Motion msec in a pump operation. has resulted in an error after moving by
wait, then Error a slight distance:
turn on again. A. A mechanical load error may be
suspected.
B. The motor or drive circuit may be at
fault.
-If the carriage has run more or less out
of control and resulted in an error:
A. The encoder sensor may be at fault.
2F24 Cannot cut paper. Cutting Error Cutter shift timeout
Lift the release Please Cut Papr The cutter failed to reach the home position
lever and reload Press (upper arrow) Key in time during a cutting operation
the paper. to Release Paper
2F24 Hardware error. Power On Cutter shift timeout error
03130031-2F24 Again No sensor has been detected during a cutter
Turn off printer, Cutter Timeout operation involving sensor detection.
wait, then
turn on again.
2F25 Hardware error. Power On Carriage motor HP not detectable Check the carriage HP sensor in I/O
03130031-2F25 Again Detected only for the wide format. mode.
Turn off printer, CR Position Err For the narrow format, the carriage motor <Supplement>
wait, then Restart Printer HP can be detected when the carriage hits -If the motor could not be run at all:
turn on again. the wall in a full scan following the A. A mechanical load error may be
detection of the HP. suspected.
fault.
-If the carriage has resulted in an error
after moving at a constant speed:
A. The carriage HP sensor may be at
fault.
A. The encoder sensor may be at fault.
2F26 Hardware error. Power On Carriage operation disabled <Supplement>
03130031-2F26 Again -A PWM duty of 100% has lasted for 200 -If the motor could not be run at all or
Turn off printer, Carriage Motion msec in a carriage operation has resulted in an error after moving by
wait, then Error -A collision has been detected in a carriage a slight distance:
turn on again. operation (with the speed predicted from A. A mechanical load error may be
the PWM output value having a deviation suspected.
of 25 ips or more from the actual speed). B. The motor or drive circuit may be at
fault.
A. encoder sensor may be at fault.
8-26
Chapter 8
Code
2F27 Hardware error. Power On Carriage shift timeout <Supplement>

03130031-2F27 Again The target position could not be reached -If the carriage travels heavily towards
Turn off printer, Carriage Timeout within a predicted operation time +3 the stop position, a mechanical load
wait, then Restart Printer seconds during carriage operation. error may be suspected.
turn on again.
2F28 Hardware error. Power On Lift shift timeout 1. Switch off the printer, then back on.
03130031-2F28 Again A lift operation has been executed, but no 2. The carriage cannot travel to the lift
Turn off printer, Lift Motion sensor has been detected or a sensor has drive position.
wait, then Timeout remained detected. 3. The lift drive cam is not engaged.
turn on again. 4. Faulty lift drive sensor
5. Faulty lift drive motor
2F29 Hardware error. Power On LF feeding motor timeout (cut sheet) 1. Replace the feed roller encoder
03030000-2F29 Again -The target position could not be reached sensor.
Turn off printer, LF Feed Timeout within a predicted operation time +3 2. Replace the feed motor.
wait, then Restart Printer seconds during an LF operation. <Supplement>
turn on again. -The sensor could not be detected during an -If the carriage travels heavily near the
LF operation involving sensor detection. stop position, a mechanical load error
may be suspected.
-If any other symptom is observed, a
feeding sensor may be at fault.
2F2A Hardware error. Power On Cannot detect the LF home position 1. Check the sensor (I/O mode check).
03130031-2F2A Again The LF home position could not be 2. Replace the feed roller encoder
Turn off printer, LF Position Err detected on LF homing during sensor.
wait, then Restart Printer initialization. 3. Replace the encoder film.
turn on again. 4. Replace the feed motor/belt/ adjust
the belt tension.
5. Replace the long flexible cable.
<Supplement>
-If the motor could not be run at all:
A. A mechanical load error may be
suspected.
fault.
-If the carriage has resulted in an error
after moving at a constant speed: The
feed roller HP sensor may be at fault.
of control and resulted in an error, the
encoder sensor may be at fault.
When FU2802 blows out on iPF6300/
6400 series
2F2B Hardware error. Power On LF operation failure (LF operation 1. Replace the feed roller encoder
03130031-2F2B Again disabled) sensor.
Turn off printer, LF Motion A pump duty of 100% has lasted for 200 2. Replace the feed motor.
wait, then Error msec during LF operation. <Supplement>
turn on again. -If the motor could not be run at all or
has resulted in an error after moving by
a slight distance:
A. A mechanical load error may be
suspected.
fault.
of control and resulted in an error, the
encoder sensor may be at fault.
When FU2802 blows out on iPF6300/
6400 Series
2F2C Hardware error. Power On Cassette shift timeout <Supplement>
03130031-2F2C Again -The target position could not be reached -If the carriage travels heavily near the
Turn off printer, Hardware Err 1 within a predicted operation time + 3 stop position, a mechanical load error
wait, then 03130031-2F2C seconds during cassette operation. may be suspected.
turn on again. -No sensor has been detected during a -Otherwise, the cassette unit sensor
pump operation involving sensor detection. may be at fault.
2F2D Cassette not Power On Cassette operation disabled 1. Check the cassette motor and the
working. Again A PWM duty of 100% has lasted for 200 drive circuit.
Turn off printer, Cassette Motion msec in a cassette operation. 2. Check the cassette encoder sensor.
wait, then Error
turn on again.
2F2E Hardware error. Power On Roll shift timeout
03130031-2F2E Again No sensor has been detected during a roll
Turn off printer, Roll Motion operation involving sensor detection.
wait, then Timeout
turn on again.
8-27
Chapter 8
Code
2F2F Hardware error. Power On Non-ejection detection error 1. Check whether any foreign matter
03800500-2F2F Again As a result of nozzle checking made by the such as paper slip exists on the head
Turn off printer, Eject. Detect head management sensor unit: management sensor optical axis.
wait, then Err 1. All 640 nozzles in a nozzle line are non- 2. Light interception due to ink
turn on again. discharging. accumulation.-> Remove the ink/
2. At least 50 nozzles have been found Replace the unit.
mismatched in a nozzle line of 640 nozzles 3. Check the head management
since the last session of detection. sensor's connector connection
4. If Service mode nozzle check
pattern printing is no problem, replace
the head management sensor unit.
Reference 1) As for the detection

condition 1. above, in the iPF650/750,
iPF6300/6350, and iPF8300 series or
later, the error codes are broken up into
2F40,2F41,2F42,2F43,2F44, and 2F47
depending on the non-ejection
conditions.
Reference 2) Error
2F2F,2F40,2F41,2F42,2F43,2F44,
and 2F47 are detected in the following
order.
1. Determines signal level (2F47) of
head management sensor
2. Determines complete non-ejection
of all colors (2F40)
3. Determines multiple mismatches
(2F2F)
of a single color (2F41)
of one line (2F42)
of 640 nozzles (2F43)
7. Determines non-ejection of more
than 320 nozzles (2F44)
Reference 3) The amount of change

(between non-ejecting and ejecting
nozzle counts) from the last session of
nozzle checking is defined as the
amount of mismatch.
2F30 Hardware error. Power On Non-ejection detecting position error
03800500-2F30 Again No detectable region has been found during
Turn off printer, Eject. Detect non-ejection position adjustment.
wait, then Err
turn on again.
2F32 Multi-sensor error Power On Faulty multisensor 1. Retry the adjustment with the effect
Turn off printer, Again Light quantity adjustment of multisensor of outside light, such as that of the
wait a while, then Multi-sensor Err failed. afternoon sun, being removed.
turn it on again. Or, outside light entered during 2. Check the position at which the
multisensor light quantity adjustment. multisensor is installed.
3. Replace the multisensor.
2F33 Use another paper. Paper Type Unadjustable because of transparent paper Change to appropriate paper.
Press Online to Please Change Paper are unidentifiable on automatic
clear the error. Can't Adj Paper adjustment (transparent/semi-transparent
Chg Paper Type paper).
2F34 Cannot calibrate. Press OK Color calibration error 1. Check to see if the loaded paper
Press OK and try and recalibrate The adjustment value has gone out of permit calibration.
calibration again. Calibration Err bounds during calibration. 2. Check calibrated printed matter for
Cannot calibrate. Recalibrate soiling and other defects.
Try calibration 3. Check the nozzle pattern
again.
2F35 Calibration Calibration Faulty multisensor (on calibration) 1. Check the parts counter in service
There is a problem multi-sensor err A failure to calibrate has been detected mode and replace the multisensor unit.
with the Press OK from the parts counter. 2. Initialize the counter for the
multi-sensor. to cancel replacement unit mounted. (It is
Press OK to cancel recommended to estimate the usage
calibration. status of other units coming to the end
Calibration of their service life and replace them as
There is a problem needed.)
with the
multi-sensor.
Cancel calibration.
2F37 ERROR E173-2F37 ERROR E173-2F37 Linear scale error
Call for service. Call For Service No signal is available from the carriage
encoder when the printhead is driven.
2F38 Top cover is open. Ink Tank Cover The top cover is abnormally open. Check the cover.
Turn off printer, Close Please Check the sensor (I/O mode).
wait a while, and Tank Cover Open
turn it on again. Close Please
8-28
Chapter 8
Code
2F3A Hardware error. Power On Ink Supply Valve Open/Closed motor 1. Replace the ink supply unit.
03130031-2F3A Again timeout error 2. Replace the main controller PCB.
Turn off printer, Valve Motor Err
wait, then
turn on again.
2F3B Hardware error. Power On CS communication error 1. Remove and insert the ink tank, or
03130031-2F3B Again An irrecoverable communication error has replace the ink tank.
Turn off printer, Hardware Err 1 occurred communicating between the CS 2. Check bundled wires in the ink tank
wait, then 03130031-2F3B chip mounted on the ink tank and the main unit and the main controller PCB.
turn on again. unit. 3. Replace the main controller PCB.
2F3C Hardware error. LF nip sensor error. Check the lift cam sensor/ pressure
03130031-2F3C When executing nip automatic operation, release switch (I/O mode)
Turn off printer, one of the following conditions is met.
wait, then -The sensor detected nip closed after the
turn on again. nip completed opening operation.
-The sensor detected nip open after the nip
completed closing operation.
2F3D Hardware error. HP pre-ejection pump motor overload error Replace the HP maintenance jet tray
03130031-2F3D unit.
Turn off printer,wait, then
turn on again.
2F3E Hardware error. HP pre-ejection pump motor shift timeout Replace the HP maintenance jet tray
03130031-2F3E unit.
Turn off printer,wait, then
turn on again.
2F3F Hardware error. An error other than overload error or shift Replace the HP maintenance jet tray
03130031-2F3F timeout error has been detected for the HP unit.
Turn off printer,wait, then pre-ejection pump motor.
turn on again.
2F40 Hardware error. When the result of non-ejection detection is
03800500-2F40 as follows.
Turn off printer,wait, then When non-ejection has been detected for
turn on again. all nozzles of all colors
-The error code assuming a problem in the
supply system/ purge system/ main
controller PCB (electric).
03800500-2F41 as follows:
Turn off printer,wait, then Complete non-ejection of nozzles in 1
turn on again. to 5 chip(s).
(A line EVEN/ A line ODD/ B line
EVEN/ B line ODD
Total of 2560 nozzles x 1 to 5 chip(s)
complete non-ejection)
-Error code assuming a problem in the ink
supply system/ purge system.
Turn off printer,wait, then Complete non-ejection of one line in
turn on again. 1chip.
(In either A line or B line, a complete non-
ejection of 1280 nozzles)
-Error code assuming broken flexible cable
or contact failure (heat enable line).
Turn off printer,wait, then Complete non-ejection (640 nozzles) of
turn on again. EVEN line or ODD line.
-Error code assuming broken flexible cable
or contact failure (data line).
Turn off printer,wait, then More than half of 640 nozzles in EVEN
turn on again. line or ODD line have non-ejection (more
than 320 nozzles).
-Error code assuming a head failure such as
broken heater board of head.
2F46 Hardware error. Only for iPF750 series The shutter HP sensor did not respond at Check the platen shutter HP sensor (I/
03130031-2F46 startup and at switching of platen shutter at O Display). Check/ replace the platen
Turn off printer,wait, then printing. shutter drive unit or sensor
turn on again.
8-29
Chapter 8
Code
2F47 Hardware error. Only for iPF750 series The optical axis of the head management 1. Check whether any foreign matter
3800500-2F47 sensor unit has been intercepted for some such as paper slip exists on the head
Turn off printer,wait, then reasons. management sensor optical axis.
turn on again. 2. Light interception due to ink
The amount of LED luminescence and the accumulation.-> Remove the ink/
level of detection signal of diode light Replace the unit.
receiving sensitivity has gone beyond the 3. Check connection of the head
predefined range. (determines the level of management sensor's connector.
APCCHK)(It's not a problem of printhead 4. Main controller PCB (Check the
or ink supply system.) fuse/ Replace the PCB.)
5. A large amount of ink mist has been
attached to optical element.
6. Replace the head management
sensor.
2F48 Hardware error. VHT (heater drive drive power supply for iPF6300 series
03130031-2F48 printhead) error 1. Replace the printhead.
Turn off printer, wait, then VHT has gone below or above the rating. 2. Replace the main controller PCB.
turn on again. iPF8300 series
1. Replace the printhead.
2. Replace the CR relay board.
3. Check/ replace the long flexible
cable.
2F49 Hardware error. Printhead short-circuited detected. iPF6300 series
2F50 03130031-xxxx Prior to VH power on, it has been detected 1. Replace the printhead
2F51 Turn off printer, wait, then that the printhead had been damaged due to 2. Replace the main controller PCB.
turn on again. paper jam etc, and ink went inside the iPF8300 series
terminal area causing near short-circuit. 1. Replace the printhead
2F49: L side printhead 2. Replace the CR relay board
2F50: R side printhead 3. Check/ replace the long flexible
2F51: LR both printhead cable.
2F4A Hardware error. iPF6300/830 or newer main controller PCB error. Replace the main controller PCB.
03130031-2F4A
Turn off printer, wait, then
turn on again.
2F4D Hardware error. Left printhead only. VHT leak detection error of left printhead, For iPF6400 series,
03130031-2F4D in case of VHT exceeds rated value or falls 1. Replace the printhead.
Turn off printer, wait, then Possible to occur on below the rated value. 2. Replace the main controller PCB.
turn on again. iPFX400 or newer models. For iPF8400/9400 series,
2F4E Hardware error. Right printhead or a single VHT leak detection error of right 1. Replace the printhead.
03130031-2F4E printhead printhead, in case of VHT exceeds rated 2. Replace the CR relay board.
Turn off printer, wait, then value or falls below the rated value. 3. Check and replace the long flexible
turn on again. Possible to occur on cable printed circuit.
iPFX400 or newer models. 4. Replace the main controller PCB.
2F4F Hardware error. Possible to occur on VHT leak detection error of right and left
03130031-2F4F iPFX400 or newer models. printhead or a single printhead, in case of
Turn off printer, wait, then VHT exceeds rated value or falls below the
turn on again. rated value.
2F52 Hardware error. Detected that a carriage unit of a legacy Replace with an appropriate carriage
03130031-2F52 model has been mounted (iPF8300/6300/ unit.
Turn off printer, wait, then 6350 only). 1. Replace with an appropriate carriage
turn on again. unit.
2. Replace the printhead.
2F53 Hardware error. Supply valve motor error of the left ink iPF8400/9400 Series
03130031-2F53. tank. 1. Replace the left ink tank unit.
Turn off printer,wait, then Drove supply valve motor. The movement 2. Replace the main controller PCB.
turn on again. was not detected.
2F54 Hardware error. Supply valve motor error of the right ink iPF8400/9400 Series
03130031-2F54. tank. 1. Replace the right ink tank unit.
Turn off printer,wait, then Drove supply valve motor. The movement 2. Replace the main controller PCB.
turn on again. was not detected.
2F60 !Spectrophotometer Unit Spectrophotometer unit won't return 1. Install spectrophotometer unit.
not connected. signals. 2. Replace signal line.
Turn off power and attach 3. Replace connection.
Spectrophotometer Unit. 4. Replace spectrophotometer unit
PCB.
2F61 Hardware error UART communication error. 1. Replace signal line.
038A0002-2F61 (Data transfer volume in consistency, 2. Replace connection.
Turn off printer, wait a checksum error etc.) 3. Replace spectrophotometer unit
while, then turn it on again. PCB
2F62 Hardware error When transmitting specified pulses to 1. Replace spectrophotometer unit
038A0002-2F62 spectrophotometer carriage motor, the PCB.
Turn off printer, wait a spectrophotometer carriage unit won't 2. Replace lines around
while, then turn it on again. respond to spectrophotometer carriage HP spectrophotometer carriage unit.
sensor. 3. Replace spectrophotometer carriage
motor.
8-30
Chapter 8
Code
2F63 Hardware error The spectrophotometer up-down unit 1. Replace spectrophotometer up-
038A0002-2F63 upper detection sensor won't respond when down unit motor.
Turn off printer, wait a a predefined pulse is sent to the 2. Replace spectrophotometer up-
while, then turn it on again. spectrophotometer up-down unit motor. down unit upper detection sensor.
3. Re-install delivery guide.
4. Replace the spectrophotometer unit
PCB.
2F65 Hardware error When a predefined pulse is sent to the 1. Replace spectrophotometer up-
038A0002-2F65 spectrophotometer up-down unit motor, down unit motor.
Turn off printer, wait a the spectrophotometer up-down unit lower 2. Replace spectrophotometer up-
while, then turn it on again. detection sensor in spectrophotometer unit down unit lower detection sensor.
won't respond. 3. Re-install delivery guide.
PCB.
2F66 Hardware error Media dry fan won't return signals. 1. Replace fan
038A0002-2F66 2. Replace signal lines
Turn off printer, wait a 3. Replace the spectrophotometer unit
while, then turn it on again. PCB.
2F67 Hardware error Embedded FlashROM read/ write error Replace the spectrophotometer unit
038A0002-2F67 PCB.
Turn off printer, wait a
while, then turn it on again.
2F68 Hardware error Spectrophotometer EEPROM read/write Replace the spectrophotometer unit
038A0002-2F68 error PCB.
2F69 Hardware error Write/read error at RAM check Replace the spectrophotometer unit
038A0002-2F69 PCB.
2F6A Hardware error Firmware update failed. 1. Update firmware again
038A0002-2F6A 2. Replace the spectrophotometer unit
Turn off printer, wait a PCB.
2F6B Hardware error Initialization after power on of CPU at Replace the spectrophotometer unit
038A0002-2F6B spectrophotometer unit side failed. PCB.
2F6C Hardware error. Failed self-testing. Replace the spectrophotometer unit
03130031-2F6C. PCB.
Turn off printer, wait, then
turn on again.
2F70 Hardware error. Indication at ink priming error in both For iPF6400 Series,
03130031-2F70. subtanks. 1. Replace both of the inktank units.
Turn off printer, wait, then 2. Replace the main controller PCB.
turn on again.
2F71 Hardware error. Call for Service. Indication at ink priming error in the left For iPF6400 Series,
03130031-2F71. HW1 error subtank. 1. Replace the left inktank unit.
Turn off printer, wait, then 03130031-2F71 2. Replace the main controller PCB.
turn on again.
2F72 Hardware error. Call for Service. Indication at ink priming error in the right For iPF6400 Series,
03130031-2F72. HW1 error subtank. 1. Replace the right subtank
Turn off printer, wait, then 03130031-2F72 2. Replace the main controller PCB.
turn on again.
2F80 !Spectrophotometer sensor Spectrophotometer sensor won't return 1. Install Spectrophotometer sensor.
is not mounted. Please check signals. 2. Check cables.
if the sensor is mounted 3. Replace spectrophotometer sensor.
properly and press OK. 4. Replace the spectrophotometer unit
PCB.
2F81 ! Spectrophotometer After white calibration, the 1. Clean white tile.
Unit Calibration white tile spectrophotometer sensor returned a value 2. Mount white tile.
error. other than predetermined value. 3. Replace spectrophotometer sensor.
Clean the tile then mount it
and press OK.
2F82 ! Delivery guide of SP unit While the spectrophotometer up-down unit 1. Mount delivery guide.
is not mounted. Check if the upper detection sensor and 2. Replace the spectrophotometer unit
guide is mounted properly spectrophotometer top cover open/closed PCB.
and press OK. detection sensor are detecting, the interlock 3. Replace spectrophotometer up-
switch remains OFF. down unit upper detection sensor.
2F83 !Backing plate error in the No signal retuned from backing plate. 1. Clean the backing plate.
spectrophotometer unit. The signal from the backing plate is 2. Replace the spectrophotometer unit
Clean the backing plate. beyond threshold. PCB.
Install the backing plate to 3. Replace the spectrophotometer
the unit. Then press [OK]. sensor.
2F85 ! SP unit up and down cover Spectrophotometer top cover open/closed 1. Close spectrophotometer top cover.
is open. detection sensor won't respond. 2. Replace spectrophotometer top
Close it and press OK cover open/closed detection sensor.
PCB.
8-31
Chapter 8
Code
2F86 ! SP unit cover is open. Spectrophotometer cover open/closed 1. Close spectrophotometer cover.
Close it and then press OK. detection sensorwon't respond. 2. Replace cover sensor.
PCB.
2F87 ! Colorimetric readout error. When executing color measuring, the 1. Operate paper feed adjustment.
Please press OK and execute spectrophotometer sensor returned a value 2. Change the patch size to large.
color measuring again. other than predetermined value was 3. Printer support (In case of printing
returned. failure).
4. Replace spectrophotometer sensor
2F88 ! Colorimetric readout error. When reading the positioning bar, a value 1. Operate paper feed adjustment.
Please press OK and execute other than predetermined value was 2. Printer support (In case of printing
color measuring again. returned. failure).
3. Replace spectrophotometer sensor.
2F89 ! Colorimetric readout error. 1) No shifting amount detected from the 1. Operate paper feed adjustment.
Please press OK and execute positioning bar reading value. 2. Printer support (In case of printing
color measuring again 2) Position shifting exceeded the threshold failure).
value. 3. Replace spectrophotometer sensor
3) Skew exceeded the threshold value.
2F90 Detected 3V of abnormal power out from
the printhead.
(Latch up current flows at head logic and
temporarily the print head falls into
abnormal state ; it is possible to recover by
power on and off.)
2FA0 !It is recommended to clean Inform the calibration timing of the Calibrate the spectrophotometer
the white calibration board spectrophotometer sensor. sensor.
to prevent it from possible
dirt.
4001 ERROR E146-4001 ERROR E146-4001 Borderless/flow pre-ejection/mist recovery Check the parts counter and replace the
Call for service. Call For Service count full target unit or Refresh Service Kit.
Initialize the parts counter for the
401A ERROR E602-401A HDD failure 1. Restart in service mode.
Call for service. Failed to read and write to and from the 2. Remove and install HDD
HDD. 3. Replace HDD. Switch on service
mode after the replacement.
401B ERROR E602-401B Poor HDD connection 1. Restart in service mode.
Call for service. The HDD and the HDD controller are not 2. Remove and install HDD
indefinable. 3. Replace HDD. Switch on service4.
Replace HDD controller or the main
controller PCB. Restart after the
replacement.
401C ERROR E198-401C ERROR E198-401C Faulty RTC 1. Restart the printer in service mode.
Call for service. Call For Service Any error other than the two errors 2. Replace the main controller PCB.
mentioned below has been detected while
initializing the RTC at startup.
401D ERROR E198-401D ERROR E198-401D RTC low battery error 1. Restart the printer in service mode.
Call for service. Call For Service A battery error has been detected while 2. Check the RTC battery.
initializing the RTC at startup. 3. Replace the main controller PCB.
401E ERROR E198-401E ERROR E198-401E RTC clock stop 1. Restart the printer in service mode.
Call for service. Call For Service The RTC has been detected idle while 2. Replace the main controller PCB.
initializing the RTC at startup.
4027 Hardware error. Power On Lift shift timeout error 1. Switch off the printer, then back on.
03130031-4027 Again A lift operation has been executed, but no 2. The carriage cannot travel to the lift
Turn off printer, Lift Motion sensor has been detected or a sensor has drive position.
wait, then Timeout remained detected. 3. The lift drive cam is not engaged.
turn on again. 4. Faulty lift drive sensor
5. Faulty lift drive motor
4034 ERROR E196-4034 ERROR E196-4034 Multisensor unit version error Replace the multisensor unit.
Call for service. Call For Service A different version of multisensor is
installed.
This would not occur in an ordinary user
environment.
4037 ERROR E173-4037 ERROR E173-4037 Linear scale error
Call for service. Call For Service No signal is available from the carriage
encoder when the printhead is driven.
403E ERROR E161-403E ERROR E161-403E Head abnormal temperature rise (printhead
Call for service. Call For Service 1 (R), or A model)
Either of the two Di sensors maintained for
each printhead chip (color-specific) has
been detected at 120 degrees C or higher or
-10 degrees C or lower.
403F ERROR E161-403F ERROR E161-403F Head abnormal temperature rise (printhead
Call for service. Call For Service 2 (L))
Either of the two Di sensors maintained for
each printhead chip (color-specific) has
been detected at 120 degrees C or higher or
-10 degrees C or lower.
8-32
Chapter 8
Code
4040 ERROR E196-4040 ERROR E196-4040 Checksum error 1. Start in download mode to upgrade
Call for service. Call For Service The checksum of a file transmitted on the firmware.
execution of the firmware update is 2. Restart the printer in service mode to
unmatched. clear the error.
4041 ERROR E196-4041 ERROR E196-4041 Flash erase error 1. Start in download mode to upgrade
Call for service. Call For Service Failed to erase flash ROM on execution of the firmware.
the firmware update. 2. Restart the printer in service mode to
clear the error.
4042 ERROR E196-4042 ERROR E196-4042 Flash write error 1. Start in download mode to upgrade
Call for service. Call For Service Failed to write flash ROM on execution of the firmware.
the firmware update. 2. Restart the printer in service mode to
clear the error.
4042 Unknown file. MIT data transfer failure 1. Execute "Initialize Paper Type"
Check file format. Failed to write MIT data on its from the system settings. (Note: All
Turn off printer, transmission. paper information will be reset to its
wait a while, then factory defaults and additional Paper
turn it on again. deleted.)
2. Upgrade the firmware in download
mode.
4043 ERROR E196-4043 ERROR E196-4043 Firmware update failure error 1. Start in download mode to upgrade
Call for service. Call For Service Failed to allocate a work area on RAM on the firmware.
firmware update. 2. Restart the printer in service mode to
clear the error.
4044 ERROR E196-4044 ERROR E196-4044 EEPROM size error 1. Start in download mode to upgrade
Call for service. Call For Service Size information about the firmware data the firmware.
transmitted on firmware update and the 2. Restart the printer in service mode to
size of actually transmitted data do not clear the error.
match. 3. Check the firmware transfer
environment (IF changes, PC).
4045 ERROR E196-4045 ERROR E196-4045 Engine EEPROM write error 1. Start in download mode to upgrade
Call for service. Call For Service An EEPROM read/write failure has been the firmware.
detected in the engine portion of the 2. Restart the printer in service mode to
firmware. clear the error.
4046 ERROR E141-4046 ERROR E141-4046 Recovery part revolutions reaching 50,000 Check the parts counter and replace
Call for service. Call For Service cycles or more required parts.
Recovery part operations have reached a (Replacement of the parts coming to
predetermined count. the end of their useful lives is
recommended.)
Initialize the counter for the
replacement unit mounted.
The iPF5000/500/600 have a counter
problem fixed. Identify the firmware
version and start in download mode to
upgrade the firmware to Ver.1.13 or
later from any earlier release.
4047 ERROR E144-4047 ERROR E144-4047 Carriage count error Check the parts counter and replace the
Call for service. Call For Service Supply part operations have reached a target unit or Refresh Service Kit.
predetermined count. Initialize the parts counter for the
4048 ERROR E144-4048 ERROR E144-4048 Non-discharging nozzles on initial filling
Call for service. Call For Service An unallowable number of non-
discharging nozzles have been detected at
the completion of initial filling.
4049 Unknown file. Cannot update Wrong transfer ROM data model 1. Restart the printer in service mode to
Check file format. firmware Files for a different model have been clear the error (this error won't occur
Turn off printer, Power On transferred on firmware update. when FUT is used).
wait a while, then Again 2. Start in download mode to upgrade
turn it on again. the firmware.
404A ERROR E194-404A ERROR E194-404A Non-ejection count error Check the parts counter and replace the
Call for service. Call For Service A non-ejection part operation counter has target unit or Refresh Service Kit.
reached a specified limit. Initialize the parts counter for the
404B ERROR E199-404B ERROR E199-404B Temperature/humidity sensor error 1. Restart the printer in service mode to
Call for service. Call For Service When temperature 0 and humidity 0% are clear the error.
detected, the detection mechanism is 2. Identify the firmware version and
considered failed and an error message is update the firmware to the last release
displayed. if it is earlier than Ver.1.31 (firmware
defect).
3. Remove and reinsert the
temperature/humidity sensor PCB
connector
4. Replace the temperature/humidity
sensor PCB.
8-33
Chapter 8
Code
404C ERROR E196-404C ERROR E196-404C Serial number information mismatch 1. Check to see if the correct PCB is
Call For Service A mismatch has been detected between the mounted, since a PCB of the wrong
Call for service. serial number information stored in the model may have been mistakenly
EEPROM on the main controller PCB and mounted during servicing.
that stored in the EEPROM on the MTC 2. Invoke service mode to implement
relay PCB at startup. PCB replacement.
404D ERROR E196-404D ERROR E196-404D Machine ID information mismatch 1. Check to see if the correct PCB is
Call For Service A mismatch has been detected between the mounted, since a PCB of the wrong
Call for service. model ID information stored in the model may have been mistakenly
EEPROM on the main controller PCB and mounted during servicing.
that stored in the EEPROM on the MTC 2. Invoke service mode to implement
relay PCB at startup. PCB replacement.
404E ERROR E196-404E ERROR E196-404E An EEPROM read/ write error has been 1. Start in download mode to upgrade
Call for service. Call for service. detected in the controller portion of the the firmware.
firmware. 2. Start in service mode to clear the
error.
404F ERROR E144-404F Pump revolutions full Clear the counter in service mode after
Call for service. The number of HP pre-ejection pump having replaced the HP pre-ejection
revolution has reached the defined value. tray unit.
4050 Error E161-4050 Error! Non-ejection detection error
Call for service. For E161-4050 The timing of "ink priming sequence" is
iPF6000, Call for service. fallowing.
03800500-4050. -At installation of a new model printer
-At reinstallation after the second
transportation.
-At replacement of the printhead
405A Error E602-405A Incorrect capacity HDD model is Replace HDD
Call for service. connected.
405B Error E602-405B Mismatched HDD model is connected. Replace HDD
Call for service.
4061 !The paper loaded askew. Postion ditection of askew loaded paper.
Remove the paper.
8-34
Dec 16 2014

IPF605 ServiceManual E

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

IPF605 ServiceManual E

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

IPF605 ServiceManual E

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual

COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC.

Indicates an item of a non-specific nature, possibly classified as Note, Caution, or Warning.

Indicates an item requiring care to avoid electric shocks.

Indicates an item requiring care to avoid combustion (fire).

Indicates an item prohibiting disassembly to avoid electric shocks or problems.

Indicates an item of reference assisting the understanding of the topic in question.

Provides a description of a service mode.

Provides a description of the nature of an error indication.

The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:

Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

Chapter 2 TECHNICAL REFERENCE

2.2 Firmware .................................................................................................................................................... 2- 5

3.2.2 Reinstalling the Printer .......................................................................................................................................... 3- 21

6.4 Service Tools............................................................................................................................................ 6- 22

Chapter 7 SERVICE MODE

Chapter 8 ERROR CODE

1.1 Product Overview ..........................................................................................................................................................1-1

1.1 Product Overview

1.1.1 Product Overview

[1] Top Cover [10] Operation Panel

Functional enhancements new to this model include:

1.2.3 Ink Tank

The ink tank is disposable.

A round-blade cuter comes with the cutter unit.

1.2.5 Roll Feed Unit

Roll Feed Unit

1.2.7 IEEE1394 (FireWire) Board

IEEE1394 (FireWire) expansion board (option)

1.3 Product Specifications

1.3.1 Product Specifications

Type Bubble jet large-sized paper printer

- Cut sheet (manual feed from top)

- Cut sheet (manual feed from front)

Width of media allowing borderless printing:

Media type allowing borderless printing:

Firmware Flash ROM (update from USB or Ethernet, IEEE1394)

1.4 Detailed Specifications

1.4.1 Print Speed and Direction

1.4.2 Interface Specifications

1.5 Names and Functions of Components

1.5.3 Top Cover (Inside)

1.5.4 Manual Loading Area

1.5.5 Roll Feed Unit Cover (Inside)

1.6 Basic Operation

1.6.1 Operation Panel

[1] [18] [17]

1.6.2 Main Menu

1. Main menu operations

b) How to exit the Main menu

c) Buttons used with the Main menu

*1: Displayed if a roll is loaded.

3. Main menu during printing

4. Main Menu Settings

Setting Item Description, Instructions

Setting Item Description, Instructions

Setting Item Description, Instructions

Setting Item Description, Instructions

Setting Item Description, Instructions

Setting Item Description, Instructions